1st DRAFT (Rev B) Including comments from CEDD, WSD, HyD & DSD and Steering Committtee

General Specification for Civil Engineering Works (GS), 2006 Edition Guidance Notes This electronic file is for reference only. When the content of this electronic file is inconsistent with the hard copy of the Guidance Notes for GS, 2006 Edition and the Amendments issued, the hard copy of the Guidance Notes for GS, 2006 Edition and the Amendments shall prevail.

(This Version is Continuously Updated to include Amendments issued)

This Electronic File has incorporated the following Amendments:-

Rev First Issue 1 2 3

Issue Date 18 September 2008 6 February 2009 26 August 2009 26 November 2009

Amendment Incorporated Amendment No. 1/2009 Amendment No. 2/2009 Amendment No. 3/2009

GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES

The Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region

2006 Edition

The Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region The 1992 Edition was first printed in April 1993 Second Reprint, November 1998 Third Reprint, December 1999 Fourth Reprint, November 2001 The 2006 Edition was printed in July 2008.

Prepared by: Quality Management and Standards Unit, Civil Engineering and Development Department, Civil Engineering and Development Building, 101, Princess Margaret Road, Homantin, Kowloon, Hong Kong. Members of Steering Committee for the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works: Assistant Director (Technical), Chairman Chief Geotechnical Engineer/LPM3 Chief Highway Engineer/R & D Technical Secretary, NTE DevO Chief Engineer/Land Works Technical Secretary 1 Chief Civil Engineer Chief Engineer/Design Senior Engineer/Quality Management and Standards, Secretary CEDD CEDD HyD CEDD CEDD DSD HD WSD CEDD

2006 Edition

FOREWORD
The Guidance Notes (GN) on the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works (GS), 1992 Edition have been updated to cope with the 2006 Edition of the GS with the updated text printed in green colour for easy reference. Each section of the GN was updated by a works department with the appropriate expertise and background knowledge. The overall coordination of the GN and its final production was carried out by the Quality Management and Standards Unit of the Civil Engineering and Development Department. The GN have been endorsed by the Steering Committee for the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works for promulgation.

June 2008

2006 Edition

INTRODUCTION
The Guidance Notes are to be read in conjunction with the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works (GS), 2006 Edition. For ease of cross-referencing, the number of the GS Clause, and where appropriate, the sub-clause to which the guidance note applies, is quoted in the first column. These are also quoted in the text. Abbreviations used in the Guidance Notes in general follow Clause 1.02 of the GS, and definitions of the words and expressions contained in Clause 1 of the General Conditions of Contract for Civil Engineering Works, 1999 Edition. The Guidance Notes are restricted to internal use within the Government departments and are intended to give guidance on application of the provisions of the GS during the design and site supervision stages. Application of the GN is not mandatory and project officers should ensure suitability for use in each individual case.

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON THE GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS, 2006 Edition
CONTENTS
SECTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 GENERAL SITE CLEARANCE LANDSCAPE SOFTWORKS AND ESTABLISHMENT WORKS FENCING DRAINAGE WORKS EARTHWORKS GEOTECHNICAL WORKS PILING WORKS CARRIAGEWAYS: SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAYS MISCELLANEOUS ROADWORKS TRAFFIC SIGNS, ROAD MARKINGS AND ROAD STUDS WORK FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS FORMWORK AND FINISHES TO CONCRETE STEEL REINFORCEMENT CONCRETE AND JOINTS IN CONCRETE PRESTRESSING STEELWORK HANDRAILING, LADDERS, STAIRS AND FLOORING BRIDGEWORKS MARINE WORKS WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORKS WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES BUILDING WORKS ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRESERVATION AND PROTECTION OF TREES

2006 Edition

CONTENTS

SECTION 1 GENERAL
Page No.

INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS
1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 1.07 Application of the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works ................. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................. Glossary of Terms ...................................................................................................... Trials and Approval ................................................................................................... British Standards, Codes of Practice, and Other Standards ..................................... Specifications in Metric and Imperial Units ............................................................ Dimensions from Drawings ...................................................................................... 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5

PROGRAMME
1.08 Programme ................................................................................................................. 1.6

CONTRACTORS SUPERINTENDENCE
1.11 1.12 Supervision of Piling Works ................................................................................... 1.6 Particulars of Agent and Employees ......................................................................... 1.6

CONSTRUCTION SAFETY AND SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC

(Amd 1/2009)

1.13

Construction Safety and Safety of the Public (Amd 1/2009)

.............................................. 1.7

WORK ON ROADS
1.14 1.15 1.17 1.18 1.19 Approval for Temporary Traffic Arrangements and Control .................................. Temporary Traffic Arrangements and Control ......................................................... Use of Roads and Footways ...................................................................................... Work on Roads and Footways .................................................................................. Reinstatement of Roads and Footways .................................................................... 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.8

CARE OF THE WORKS

1.22 Protection of Works ................................................................................................... 1.8
6

2006 Edition

Page No.

DAMAGE AND INTERFERENCE

1.23 1.24 Damage and Interference ........................................................................................... 1.8 Watercourses and Drainage Systems ......................................................................... 1.8

RECORDS
1.28 Records of Wage Rates .............................................................................................. 1.9

LIAISON WITH OTHERS

1.31 Liaison with Others .................................................................................................... 1.9

SITE CLEANLINESS
1.32 1.33 1.34 Site Cleanliness ........................................................................................................ 1.10 Prevention of Mosquito Breeding ........................................................................... 1.10 Prevention of Dust .................................................................................................... 1.10

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

1.35 Materials and Equipment Provided by the Employer ............................................ 1.10

TESTING
1.39 1.40 Samples for Testing .................................................................................................. 1.11 Testing ....................................................................................................................... 1.11

SITE ESTABLISHMENT
1.45 1.46 1.48 1.49 1.50 1.52 1.53 Use of the Site .......................................................................................................... Submission of Particulars ........................................................................................ Fences and Signs on the Site ................................................................................... The Engineers Site Accommodation ...................................................................... The Contractors Site Accommodation ................................................................... Transport for the Engineer ....................................................................................... Clearance of the Site ................................................................................................ 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.13 1.13 1.13 1.14

MEETINGS
1.54 Meetings ................................................................................................................... 1.14
7

2006 Edition

Page No.

PHOTOGRAPHS
1.55 Photographs ............................................................................................................. 1.14

SECTION 2 SITE CLEARANCE

SITE CLEARANCE
2.04 2.05 2.06 2.08 Demolition ................................................................................................................. Pipes and Cables ........................................................................................................ Trees ........................................................................................................................... Materials and Equipment for Re-use and Storage ................................................... 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.4

SECTION 3 LANDSCAPE SOFTWORKS AND ESTABLISHMENT WORKS

GENERAL AND GLOSSARY OF TERMS
3.01 to 3.10 General Requirements ............................................................................................... 3.3 Establishment Works ................................................................................................. 3.3

MATERIALS
3.12 3.13 to 3.16 3.17 & 3.18 3.19 3.20 & 3.21 3.22 3.23 3.24 3.25 Whip Trees ................................................................................................................. Light Standard Trees ................................................................................................. Semi-mature Trees ..................................................................................................... Small Shrubs .............................................................................................................. Large Shrubs .............................................................................................................. Conifers ...................................................................................................................... Palms .......................................................................................................................... Bamboos .................................................................................................................... Herbaceous Plants ..................................................................................................... Ground Covers ........................................................................................................... Climbers ..................................................................................................................... Containerised Plants ..................................................................................................
8

3.3 3.3 3.3 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4

2006 Edition

Page No.

3.26 3.27 3.28 3.29 3.30 3.31 3.32 3.33 3.34 3.35 3.36 3.37

Grass Seed .................................................................................................................. Turf ............................................................................................................................ Sprigs .......................................................................................................................... Plant Name ................................................................................................................. Soil-mix ...................................................................................................................... Soil Conditioner ......................................................................................................... Mulch .......................................................................................................................... Mulch for Hydroseeding ............................................................................................ Fertilizer........................................................................................................................ Soil Binder .................................................................................................................. Stakes, Ties and Guys .................................................................................................. Protective Fabric Material ........................................................................................

3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.7 3.7

SUBMISSIONS
3.38 to 3.40 Particulars of Seed Mixture, Turf, Sprigs, Soil Conditioner, Soil-mix and Water ............ 3.7 Samples of Materials .................................................................................................. 3.7

PRE-PLANTING WORKS
3.49 3.50 3.51 3.53 3.54 Preparatory Works ...................................................................................................... Cleaning Ground ........................................................................................................ Ripping ....................................................................................................................... Soiling ......................................................................................................................... Cultivation .................................................................................................................. 3.7 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8

PLANTING
3.58 3.59 3.61 3.62 3.64 General ........................................................................................................................ Use of Excavated Material ......................................................................................... Staking, Tying and Guying ........................................................................................ Mulching ..................................................................................................................... Pit Planting of Seedlings, Shrubs, Whips, Climbers, Ground Covers and Herbaceous Plants ...................................................................................................... 3.8 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9

GRASSING
3.69 & 3.70 3.71 3.72 3.73 3.74 3.76 3.77 Hydroseeding ........................................................................................................... Hydroseeding Cover ................................................................................................ Surface Conditions for Hydroseeding ..................................................................... Application of Hydroseeding ................................................................................... Protective Material ................................................................................................... Patching Up .............................................................................................................. Turfing ...................................................................................................................... Sprigging ..................................................................................................................
9

3.10 3.10 3.10 3.11 3.11 3.11 3.12 3.12

2006 Edition

Page No.

ESTABLISHMENT WORKS
3.79 3.80 3.81 3.82 3.83 3.84 3.85 3.86 3.87 3.89 3.90 3.91 Establishment Works ............................................................................................... Inspection of Establishment Works ........................................................................ Replacement of Plants and Grass .......................................................................... Security of Stakes, Ties and Guys .......................................................................... Firming Up Plants ................................................................................................... Watering ................................................................................................................... Weeding ................................................................................................................... Pruning ..................................................................................................................... Grass Cutting ........................................................................................................... Post-planting Fertilizer ............................................................................................ Control of Pests, Fungi and Disease ....................................................................... Forking Over ............................................................................................................ 3.13 3.13 3.13 3.13 3.13 3.14 3.14 3.15 3.15 3.16 3.16 3.16

TESTING: GRASS COVER

3.94 Testing: Grass Cover ............................................................................................... 3.16

TREE TRANSPLANTING
3.97 Transplanting of Existing Trees .............................................................................. 3.17

APPENDIX 3-A BRITISH STANDARDS RELEVANT TO LANDSCAPE SOFTWORKS AND ESTABLISHMENT WORKS .................... 3.18

SECTION 4 FENCING
NOTE ...................................................................................................................... 4.3 MATERIALS
4.12 4.14 Timber ........................................................................................................................ 4.3 Bolts, Nuts, Washers and Fittings ............................................................................. 4.3

10

2006 Edition

Page No.

POSTS AND GATES FOR FENCING

4.19 Gates .......................................................................................................................... 4.3

ERECTING FENCING
4.23 & 4.24 4.25 Alignment of Fencing ................................................................................................ 4.4 Posts for Fencing ........................................................................................................ 4.4 Erecting Posts for Fencing ......................................................................................... 4.4

SECTION 5 DRAINAGE WORKS

NOTE ...................................................................................................................... 5.3 MATERIALS
5.11 5.13 5.15 5.17 5.18 5.19 5.20 5.22 5.25 5.28 5.29 5.30 5.33 5.35 Precast Concrete Pipes and Fittings .......................................................................... DI Pipes and Fittings .................................................................................................. uPVC Pipes and Fittings ............................................................................................ Bolts, Nuts and Washers ............................................................................................ Elastomeric Joint Rings ............................................................................................. Detachable Couplings and Flange Adapters ............................................................. Anticorrosion Tape ..................................................................................................... Aggregates for Granular Bed and Granular Fill ......................................................... Precast Concrete Manholes ....................................................................................... Manhole Covers, Gully Gratings and Kerb Overflow Weirs ................................... Penstocks .................................................................................................................... Gate Valves ................................................................................................................. Air Valves ................................................................................................................... Filling Abandoned Pipes and Manholes ................................................................... 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5

SUBMISSIONS
5.44 Particulars of Diversions of Flow .............................................................................. 5.6

11

2006 Edition

Page No.

TRANSPORT, HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

5.45 5.47 Transport, Handling and Storage of Pipes, Joints and Fittings ............................... 5.6 Storage of Pipes ......................................................................................................... 5.6

EXCAVATION
5.52 Excavation ................................................................................................................. 5.6

LAYING AND BEDDING PIPES

5.53 Laying Pipes .............................................................................................................. 5.7

JOINTING PIPES
5.57 Flanged Joints ............................................................................................................ 5.7

THRUST AND ANCHOR BLOCKS

5.66 Thrust and Anchor Blocks ......................................................................................... 5.7

BED, HAUNCH AND SURROUND

5.67 5.68 Granular Bed .............................................................................................................. 5.8 Concrete Bed, Haunch and Surround ....................................................................... 5.8

TOLERANCES
5.70 Tolerances: Pipelines for Drainage Works ............................................................... 5.8

CONNECTIONS
5.71 Connections to Structures ......................................................................................... 5.9

MANHOLES, CHAMBERS, GULLIES AND CHANNELS

5.73 Manholes, Chambers and Gullies ............................................................................. 5.9

12

2006 Edition

Page

No.

INSTALLATION OF PENSTOCKS AND VALVES

5.76 Installation of Penstocks and Valves ......................................................................... 5.9

PIPES AND MANHOLES TO BE ABANDONED

5.77 Pipes and Manholes to be Abandoned ...................................................................... 5.9

CLEANING OF PIPELINES
5.78 Cleaning of Pipelines ............................................................................................... 5.10

TESTING: PIPES FOR DRAINAGE WORKS

5.81 5.82 5.83 Batch: Pipes for Drainage Works ............................................................................ 5.10 Samples: Pipes for Drainage Works ........................................................................ 5.10 Testing: Pipes for Drainage Works .......................................................................... 5.10

TESTING: MANHOLE COVERS, GULLY GRATINGS AND KERB OVERFLOW WEIRS

5.95 Testing: Covers, Gratings and Weirs ....................................................................... 5.10

TESTING: WATERTIGHTNESS OF PENSTOCKS

5.99 Testing: Watertightness of Penstocks ...................................................................... 5.11

TESTING: GRAVITY PIPELINES FOR DRAINAGE WORKS

5.102 5.103 Testing: Gravity Pipelines for Drainage Works ...................................................... 5.11 Compliance Criteria: Gravity Pipelines for Drainage Works ................................. 5.11

REPAIR OF PIPELINES AND CULVERTS BY INTERNAL LINING

5.108 5.113 General ...................................................................................................................... 5.12 Performance Tests on Internal Lining Material ...................................................... 5.12

13

2006 Edition

Page No.

APPENDIX 5.4 TESTS ON GRAVITY PIPELINES FOR DRAINAGE WORKS

5.4.7 Procedure: Infiltration Test ...................................................................................... 5.12

SECTION 6 EARTHWORKS
NOTE ...................................................................................................................... 6.3 GLOSSARY OF TERMS
6.04 6.07 6.08 Earthworks Final Surface .......................................................................................... 6.3 Formation ................................................................................................................... 6.3 Intermediate Areas of Fill .......................................................................................... 6.3

MATERIALS
6.09 Fill Material ............................................................................................................... 6.4

GENERAL EARTHWORKS REQUIREMENTS

6.12 6.13 6.16 6.17 6.18 Ownership of Earthworks Material .......................................................................... Temporary Works for Earthworks ............................................................................ Earthworks Material Allowed to Become Unsuitable or to Deteriorate ................. Additional Excavation and Stabilization .................................................................. Removal of Earthworks Material .............................................................................. 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5

EXCAVATION
6.19 6.20 6.21 6.24 Disposal of Excavated Material ................................................................................ Use of Excavated Material ........................................................................................ Obstructions in Excavations ..................................................................................... Excavations for Structures, Pits and Trenches ......................................................... 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6

14

2006 Edition

Page No.

BLASTING TRIALS
6.25 to 6.29 Blasting Trials ............................................................................................................. 6.6 Changes in Blasting Procedure .................................................................................. 6.6

BLASTING
6.30 to 6.37 Statutory Requirement for Blasting ........................................................................... 6.7 Controlled Blasting .................................................................................................... 6.7

DEPOSITION OF FILL MATERIAL

6.38 6.39 6.40 6.41 6.43 6.45 Types of Fill Material ................................................................................................. Sources of Fill Material ............................................................................................. Surface Preparation for Fill Material ......................................................................... Commencement of Deposition of Fill Material ........................................................ Deposition of Fill Material ........................................................................................ Deposition of Fill Material Adjacent to Structures and Utilities .............................. 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.8

COMPACTION OF FILL MATERIAL

6.48 Compaction of Fill Material ...................................................................................... 6.8

INTERMEDIATE AREAS OF FILL

6.56 & 6.57 Deposition of Fill Material in Intermediate Areas of Fill ......................................... 6.8 Compaction of Fill Material in Intermediate Areas of Fill ....................................... 6.8

EARTHWORKS IN PUBLIC FILLING AREA

6.58 Public Filling Area ..................................................................................................... 6.9

TOLERANCES
6.68 Tolerances: Earthworks Final Surfaces and Formations .......................................... 6.9

15

2006 Edition

SECTION 7 GEOTECHNICAL WORKS

PART 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Page No.

GENERAL
7.01 7.06 7.07 General Requirements ............................................................................................... 7.3 Prestressed Ground Anchors ..................................................................................... 7.3 Reinforced Fill Structures ......................................................................................... 7.3

TRIALS
7.08 Trials for Geotechnical Works .................................................................................. 7.3

PART 2: GROUND INVESTIGATION NOTE ...................................................................................................................... 7.4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS

7.10 7.11 7.23 to 7.26 Bulk Sample ............................................................................................................... 7.4 Inspection Pit ............................................................................................................. 7.4 Definition of Rock, Boulders, Cobbles and Gravel ................................................. 7.4

DRILLING FOR GROUND INVESTIGATION

7.43 7.44 7.45 Drilling Rigs for Ground Investigation .................................................................... 7.4 Drilling Equipment for Ground Investigation .......................................................... 7.5 Drilling for Ground Investigation ............................................................................. 7.5

SAMPLING FOR GROUND INVESTIGATION

7.53 Supply of Equipment and Containers ....................................................................... 7.5

16

2006 Edition

Page No.

IN-SITU TESTING
7.69 7.71 7.72 7.74 Dynamic Probe Tests ................................................................................................. In-situ Density Tests ................................................................................................... Falling or Rising Head Permeability Tests ................................................................ Constant Head Permeability Tests ............................................................................. 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6

PART 3: SLOPE TREATMENT WORKS MATERIALS

7.86 7.88 7.90 7.92 7.96 Soil-cement ................................................................................................................. Reinforcement for Sprayed Concrete ........................................................................ Rock Bolts .................................................................................................................. Rock Dowels .............................................................................................................. Grout for Soil Nails .................................................................................................... 7.7 7.7 7.7 7.7 7.8

SUBMISSIONS
7.101 7.104 Particulars of Sprayed Concrete ................................................................................ 7.8 Soil Nails .................................................................................................................... 7.8

PRELIMINARY WORK
7.107 7.108 7.109 Access to Slopes ......................................................................................................... 7.8 Protection Fences and Barriers .................................................................................. 7.8 Preparation for Slope Treatment Works .................................................................... 7.9

ROCK SLOPE TREATMENT WORKS

7.113 Sealing and Infilling of Rock Joints .......................................................................... 7.9

SPRAYED CONCRETE
7.117 7.118 7.123 Trial Panel ................................................................................................................... 7.9 Preparation of Slope Surfaces .................................................................................... 7.9 Curing Spraying Concrete ....................................................................................... 7.10

PROTECTIVE MESH FOR SLOPES

7.126 Fixing Protective Mesh for Slopes .......................................................................... 7.10
17

2006 Edition

Page No.

ROCK BOLTS
7.127 7.128 Trials for Rock Bolts ............................................................................................... 7.10 Drilling, Preparing and Testing Rock Bolt Holes .................................................. 7.10

SOIL NAILS
7.136 7.137 7.138 7.139 Drilling for Soil Nails .............................................................................................. Installation and Grouting of Soil Nails ................................................................. Pull-out Tests for Soil Nails .................................................................................... Soil-nail Head .......................................................................................................... 7.11 7.11 7.12 7.12

TESTING: OPTIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT AND MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY OF SOIL-CEMENT FILL
7.146 Compliance Criteria: Concrete Cores from Sprayed Concrete ............................. 7.12

TESTING: PACKER TESTS ON DRILLHOLES FOR ROCK BOLTS

7.148 Testing: Packer Test ................................................................................................. 7.13

TESTING: ROCK BOLTS

7.152 Compliance Criteria: Rock Bolts ............................................................................ 7.13

PART 4: GROUTING FOR GEOTECHNICAL WORKS GLOSSARY OF TERMS

7.156 Grouting ................................................................................................................... 7.14

MATERIALS
7.160 7.161 7.162 7.163 Grout for Geotechnical Works ................................................................................ Standpipes ................................................................................................................ Particulars of Grouting for Geotechnical Works .................................................... Trials for Grouting ................................................................................................... 7.14 7.14 7.14 7.14

18

2006 Edition

Page No.

DRILLING FOR GROUTING FOR GEOTECHNICAL WORKS

7.164 Drilling for Grouting for Geotechnical Works ........................................................ 7.15

GROUTING FOR GEOTECHNICAL WORKS

7.167 7.168 7.169 Grouting Equipment ................................................................................................. 7.15 Mixing Grout ............................................................................................................ 7.15 Pressure Grouting ..................................................................................................... 7.15

TESTING: GROUT - BLEEDING

7.175 Testing: Bleeding of Grout ...................................................................................... 7.15

TESTING: GROUT - FLOW CONE EFFLUX TIME

7.178 Testing: Flow Cone Efflux Time of Grout .............................................................. 7.16

TESTING: GROUT - CRUSHING STRENGTH

7.181 Testing: Crushing Strength of Grout ....................................................................... 7.16

TESTING: PACKER TESTS ON DRILLHOLES FOR GROUTING AND GROUTED DRILLHOLES

7.183 Testing: Packer Tests ................................................................................................ 7.16

PART 5: GROUNDWATER DRAINAGE AND CONTROL GLOSSARY OF TERMS

7.191 7.192 7.193 7.195 7.196 7.197 7.198 7.199 Prefabricated Band Drain ......................................................................................... Raking Drain ............................................................................................................ Relief Drain .............................................................................................................. Granular Filter Material ........................................................................................... Geotextile Filter ........................................................................................................ Filter Pipes ................................................................................................................ Raking Drains ........................................................................................................... Relief Drains ............................................................................................................. 7.17 7.17 7.17 7.17 7.17 7.18 7.18 7.18

19

2006 Edition

Page No.

7.200 7.202

Fill Material for Trench Drains ............................................................................... 7.19 Prefabricated Band Drains ...................................................................................... 7.19

SUBMISSIONS
7.204 7.206 7.212 Particulars of Geotextile Filter ................................................................................ 7.19 Particulars of Raking Drains ................................................................................... 7.19 Samples of Materials ............................................................................................... 7.19

GEOTEXTILE FILTER
7.219 7.222 Damage to Geotextile Filter .................................................................................... 7.19 Records of Geotextile Filter .................................................................................... 7.20

RAKING DRAINS
7.223 Installation of Raking Drains .................................................................................. 7.20

TRENCH DRAINS
7.229 Deposition and Compaction of Fill Material for Trench Drains ........................... 7.20

CAISSON DRAINS
7.233 Discharge of Water from Caisson Drains ............................................................... 7.20

PREFABRICATED BAND DRAINS

7.235 Installation of Prefabricated Band Drains .............................................................. 7.20

GROUNDWATER CONTROL AND DRAWDOWN

7.239 Monitoring of Groundwater Control and Drawdown ............................................ 7.20

TESTING: GRANULAR FILTER MATERIAL

7.243 Testing: Granular Filter Material ............................................................................ 7.21

20

2006 Edition

Page No.

TESTING: FILL MATERIAL FOR TRENCH DRAINS

7.247 Testing: Fill Material for Trench Drains ................................................................. 7.21

PART 6: GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS

7.254 7.255 7.256 Instruments for Geotechnical Instrumentation ....................................................... 7.22 Location and Arrangement of Instruments ............................................................. 7.22 Installation of Instruments ....................................................................................... 7.22

MONITORING AND RECORDING

7.260 Recording Readings ................................................................................................. 7.22

SETTLEMENT PLATES
7.261 Installation of Settlement Plates .............................................................................. 7.23

TILTMETER SYSTEM
7.262 Installation of Tiltmeter System .............................................................................. 7.23

STANDPIPE PIEZOMETERS
7.264 7.265 Standpipe Piezometers ............................................................................................. 7.23 Installation of Standpipe Piezometers ..................................................................... 7.23

21

2006 Edition

SECTION 8 PILING WORKS

Page No.

GENERAL
8.01 General Requirements ............................................................................................... 8.3

SURFACE TREATMENT OF STEEL PILES

8.25 Epoxy Coatings to Steel Piles ................................................................................... 8.4

GENERAL PILING WORKS REQUIREMENTS

8.37 8.40 8.41 Monitoring of Noise, Vibration, Ground Movement and Groundwater Level ...... 8.4 Pre-drilling for Piles Founded on Rock .................................................................... 8.4 Founding Levels ........................................................................................................ 8.5

PRELIMINARY PILES
8.42 Preliminary Piles ........................................................................................................ 8.5

DRIVEN PILES
8.43 8.44 8.52 Supports for Driving Piles ......................................................................................... 8.6 Use of Diesel Hammer .............................................................................................. 8.6 Measurement of Set of Driven Piles ......................................................................... 8.6

HAND-DUG CAISSONS
8.54 Excavation for Hand-dug Caissons .......................................................................... 8.7

BARRETTES
8.56 Excavation for Barrettes ............................................................................................ 8.7

22

2006 Edition

Page No.

CONSTRUCTION USING BENTONITE SLURRY

8.59 Excavation using Bentonite Slurry ............................................................................ 8.7

FIXING REINFORCEMENT FOR PILES

8.63 Fixing Reinforcement for Piles ................................................................................. 8.8

PLACING CONCRETE IN PILES

8.66 Placing Concrete in Piles ........................................................................................... 8.8

INSPECTION OF PILING WORKS

8.69 Inspection of Excavations for Piles ........................................................................... 8.9

RECORDS OF PILING WORKS

8.81 Record of Piling Works .............................................................................................. 8.9

TESTING: LOAD TESTS ON PILES

8.82 Testing: Load Tests on Piles ...................................................................................... 8.9

TESTING: INTEGRITY TESTS

8.92 8.94 Testing: Integrity Tests on Piles and Non-destructive Integrity Testing ................ 8.11 Sonic Tests on Bored Cast-in-situ Piles .................................................................. 8.12

TESTING: BENTONITE SLURRY

8.96 Testing: Bentonite Slurry ......................................................................................... 8.12

23

2006 Edition

SECTION 9 CARRIAGEWAYS: SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

Page No.

MATERIALS
9.02 9.04 9.05 9.06 9.07 9.08 Sub-base Material Using Virgin Material................................................................... Aggregates for Bituminous Materials ...................................................................... Filler for Bituminous Materials ................................................................................ Bitumen ...................................................................................................................... Bituminous Emulsion ................................................................................................ Bituminous Priming Material ................................................................................... 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.4 9.4 9.4

DESIGN OF SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

9.09 9.10 Design Procedure for Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials ...................... 9.4 Design of Bituminous Materials ............................................................................... 9.5

SUBMISSIONS
9.11 9.12 9.15 Particulars of Filler and Bitumen for Bituminous Materials ................................... 9.6 Particulars of Mixes for Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials .................. 9.6 Particulars of Methods of Laying and Compacting Sub-bases and Bituminous Materials .................................................................................................................... 9.6

TRIALS
9.17 9.18 9.20 9.21 9.22 9.23 9.24 Trial Areas .................................................................................................................. Samples: Trial Areas .................................................................................................. Compliance Criteria: Trial Areas .............................................................................. Non-compliance: Trial Areas .................................................................................... Approved Mix for Bituminous Materials other than Bituminous Roadbase Material ...................................................................................................................... Commencement of Placing Bituminous Materials .................................................. Changes in Materials and Methods of Construction ................................................ 9.7 9.7 9.7 9.7 9.8 9.8 9.8

HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT OF MATERIALS

9.25 9.26 Handling and Storage of Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials ................ 9.8 Transport of Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials ..................................... 9.9

24

2006 Edition

Page No.

MIXING OF SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

9.27 9.28 9.29 Mixing of Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials ......................................... 9.9 Mixing Plant for Bituminous Materials .................................................................... 9.9 Mixing Bituminous Materials .................................................................................... 9.9

LAYING AND COMPACTION OF BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

9.33 9.34 9.35 9.37 Laying and Compaction of Bituminous Materials ................................................... 9.9 Laying Bituminous Materials by Paving Machine ................................................. 9.10 Laying Bituminous Materials by Manual Methods ................................................ 9.11 Joints in Bituminous Materials ................................................................................ 9.11

PROTECTION OF SURFACES OF SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

9.38 Protection of Surfaces of Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials .............. 9.11

TOLERANCES
9.40 Tolerances: Level of Carriageway ........................................................................... 9.11

TESTING: SURFACE REGULARITY

9.42 Testing: Surface Regularity ..................................................................................... 9.12

TESTING: SUB-BASE MATERIAL

9.45 9.46 Samples: Sub-base Material .................................................................................... 9.12 Testing: Sub-base Material Using Virgin Material ................................................. 9.12

TESTING: RELATIVE COMPACTION OF SUB-BASE

9.48 Testing: Relative Compaction of Sub-base ............................................................. 9.12

25

2006 Edition

Page No.

TESTING: AGGREGATES, FILLER AND BITUMEN FOR BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

9.52 9.53 Samples: Aggregates, Filler and Bitumen for Bituminous Materials ................... 9.13 Testing: Aggregates, Filler and Bitumen for Bituminous Materials ..................... 9.13

TESTING: BITUMINOUS MATERIALS OTHER THAN BITUMINOUS FRICTION COURSE MATERIAL

9.55 9.56 9.57 Samples: Bituminous Materials other than Bituminous Friction Course Material ....................................................................................................... 9.13 Testing: Bituminous Materials other than Bituminous Friction Course Material ....................................................................................................... 9.13 Compliance Criteria: Bituminous Materials other than Bituminous Friction Course Material ......................................................................................... 9.14

TESTING: BITUMINOUS FRICTION COURSE MATERIAL

9.59 9.60 9.61 Samples: Bituminous Friction Course Material ..................................................... 9.14 Testing: Bituminous Friction Course Material ....................................................... 9.14 Compliance Criteria: Bituminous Friction Course Material ................................. 9.14

TESTING: BITUMINOUS MATERIAL CORES

9.62 9.63 9.65 Samples: Bituminous Material Cores ..................................................................... 9.14 Testing: Bituminous Material Cores ....................................................................... 9.15 Non-compliance: Bituminous Material Cores ....................................................... 9.15

APPENDIX 9-A LAYER THICKNESS .................................................................................. 9.16 APPENDIX 9-B COMPLIANCE CRITERIA .................................................................... 9.17 APPENDIX 9-C RECTIFICATION ......................................................................................... 9.19

26

2006 Edition

SECTION 10 CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAYS

Page No.

MATERIALS
10.09 10.12 Fine Aggregates ........................................................................................................ 10.3 Joint Sealant .............................................................................................................. 10.3

TRIALS
10.23 10.24 10.25 10.26 Trial Length .............................................................................................................. Testing: Trial Length ................................................................................................ Compliance Criteria: Trial Length .......................................................................... Non-compliance: Trial Length ................................................................................ 10.3 10.4 10.4 10.4

FORMING JOINTS
10.34 10.36 10.37 10.38 10.40 Forming Joints .......................................................................................................... Longitudinal Joints ................................................................................................... Isolation Joints .......................................................................................................... Forming Grooves ..................................................................................................... Sealing Joints ............................................................................................................ 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5

PLACING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE

10.41 Placing and Compacting Concrete .......................................................................... 10.6

CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
10.42 Construction Joints ................................................................................................... 10.6

SURFACE FINISH
10.44 Surface Texturing ..................................................................................................... 10.6

CURING CONCRETE
10.45 Curing Concrete ....................................................................................................... 10.6

27

2006 Edition

Page No.

PROTECTION OF CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY

10.46 Protection of Concrete Carriageway ....................................................................... 10.7

TOLERANCES
10.50 10.53 10.54 Tolerances: Dowel Bars and Tie Bars .................................................................... 10.7 Tolerances: Alignment of Concrete Carriageway .................................................. 10.7 Tolerances: Level of Concrete Carriageway ........................................................ 10.7

TESTING: SURFACE REGULARITY

10.55 10.56 Testing: Surface Regularity ..................................................................................... 10.8 Compliance Criteria: Surface Regularity ............................................................... 10.8

TESTING: TEXTURE DEPTH

10.58 Compliance Criteria: Texture Depth ....................................................................... 10.8

TESTING: CONCRETE CORES FROM TRIAL LENGTHS

10.62 Samples: Concrete Cores from Trial Lengths ........................................................ 10.8

SECTION 11 MISCELLANEOUS ROADWORKS

PART 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MATERIALS
11.09 Cement Mortar ......................................................................................................... 11.3

28

2006 Edition

Page No.

PART 2: CONCRETE PROFILE BARRIERS MATERIALS

11.11 Concrete Mix ............................................................................................................ 11.4

SUBMISSIONS
11.12 Particulars of Concrete Profile Barriers .................................................................. 11.4

PART 3: PEDESTRIAN GUARD-RAILING GENERAL

11.27 Design of Pedestrian Guard-railing ......................................................................... 11.5

PART 4: UNTENSIONED BEAM BARRIERS MATERIALS

11.39 11.40 Beams ....................................................................................................................... 11.6 Posts .......................................................................................................................... 11.6

CONSTRUCTION OF UNTENSIONED BEAM BARRIERS

11.47 11.49 Installation of Untensioned Beam Barriers ............................................................. 11.6 Concrete Footings .................................................................................................... 11.7

PART 5: KERBS, EDGINGS AND QUADRANTS MATERIALS

11.52 Granite Kerbs, Edgings and Quadrants ................................................................... 11.9

29

2006 Edition

Page No.

PART 6: FOOTWAYS, CYCLETRACKS AND PAVED AREAS CONSTRUCTION OF FOOTWAYS, CYCLETRACKS AND PAVED AREAS
11.57 In-situ Concrete Footways, Cycletracks and Paved Areas .................................. 11.10

PART 7: PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS FOR PAVING GLOSSARY OF TERMS

11.60 Unit .......................................................................................................................... 11.11

MATERIALS
11.67 Sand ......................................................................................................................... 11.11

LAYING UNITS
11.74 Laying Units ........................................................................................................... 11.11

REINSTATEMENT OF UNITS
11.80 Reinstatement of Units .......................................................................................... 11.12

APPENDIX 11.1 DETERMINATION OF CHARACTERISTIC COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF INTERLOCKING BLOCKS

11.1.4 Calculation ............................................................................................................. 11.13

30

2006 Edition

SECTION 12

TRAFFIC SIGNS, ROAD MARKINGS AND ROAD STUDS

Page No.

PART 1: TRAFFIC SIGNS FABRICATION OF TRAFFIC SIGNS

12.10 12.13 Posts for Traffic Signs .............................................................................................. 12.3 Faces for Traffic Signs ............................................................................................. 12.3

CONSTRUCTION AND ASSEMBLY OF TRAFFIC SIGNS

12.18 Construction and Assembly of Traffic Signs .......................................................... 12.3

PART 2: ROAD MARKINGS GLOSSARY OF TERMS

12.22 Road Markings ......................................................................................................... 12.4

MATERIALS
12.23 12.24 Hot Applied Thermoplastic Material ....................................................................... 12.4 Cold Applied Preformed Material ........................................................................... 12.4

LAYING ROAD MARKINGS

12.33 12.36 12.39 Preparation of Surfaces ............................................................................................ 12.5 Use of Road Marking Paint ..................................................................................... 12.5 Skid Resistance Level .............................................................................................. 12.5

REMOVING ROAD MARKINGS

12.41 Shot-blasting Machine ............................................................................................. 12.5

31

2006 Edition

Page No.

PART 3: ROAD STUDS MATERIALS

12.42 Road Studs ............................................................................................................... 12.6

SECTION 13 WORK FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

ELECTRICAL EARTHING SYSTEMS
13.22 Electrical Earthing Systems .................................................................................... 13.3

GROUTING FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

13.23 Grouting for Electrical and Mechanical Installations ............................................ 13.3

COMPLETION AND PROTECTION OF WORK FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

13.24 Completion of Work for Electrical and Mechanical Installations ......................... 13.3

TOLERANCES
13.26 Tolerances: Floors of Switchgear Rooms ............................................................... 13.3

INSPECTION OF WORK FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

13.28 Inspection of Work for Electrical and Mechanical Installations ........................... 13.4

TESTING: EARTHING CONTINUITY

13.29 Testing: Earthing Continuity ................................................................................... 13.4
32

2006 Edition

Page No.

TESTING: LOAD TESTS ON BEAMS AND JOISTS

13.31 Testing: Load Tests on Beams and Joists ................................................................ 13.4

SECTION 14 FORMWORK AND FINISHES TO CONCRETE

NOTE .................................................................................................................... 14.3 MATERIALS
14.14 14.16 Formwork ................................................................................................................. 14.3 Release Agents ......................................................................................................... 14.3

SUBMISSIONS
14.21 Particulars of Formwork and Finishes to Concrete and Samples of Materials ....... 14.4

TRIAL PANELS
14.22 14.25 Trial Panels ............................................................................................................... 14.4 Changes in Materials and Methods of Construction .............................................. 14.5

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK

14.28 14.29 14.32 Design and Construction of Falsework and Formwork ......................................... 14.5 Construction of Formwork ...................................................................................... 14.5 Built-in Components ................................................................................................ 14.6

APPLICATION OF RELEASE AGENTS

14.33 Application of Release Agents ................................................................................ 14.6

33

2006 Edition

Page No.

INSPECTION OF FORMWORK AND REINFORCEMENT

14.34 Inspection of Formwork and Reinforcement ......................................................... 14.6

TREATED FINISHES
14.38 14.39 14.41 Treated Finishes ....................................................................................................... 14.7 Class T1 Finish ........................................................................................................ 14.7 Class T4 Finish ........................................................................................................ 14.7

WORK ON CONCRETE SURFACES

14.45 Remedial and Repair Work on Concrete Surfaces ................................................. 14.7

APPENDIX 14-A
LATERAL PRESSURE FOR FORMWORK DESIGN ................ 14.8

APPENDIX 14-B
SUMMARY OF ACI FORMULAE ON LATERAL PRESSURE FOR FORMWORK DESIGN ..................................... 14.10

SECTION 15 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

MATERIALS
15.03 15.04 15.05 15.06 15.08 15.10 Bar Reinforcement and Fabric Reinforcement ...................................................... Stainless Steel Reinforcement ................................................................................. Epoxy Coatings to Reinforcement .......................................................................... Hot Dip Galvanizing to Reinforcement .................................................................. Cover Spacers .......................................................................................................... Tying Wire ............................................................................................................... 15.3 15.3 15.3 15.3 15.4 15.5

34

2006 Edition

Page No.

SUBMISSIONS
15.12 15.14 Particulars of Bar Reinforcement and Fabric Reinforcement ................................ 15.5 Particulars of Galvanized Coatings to Reinforcement ........................................... 15.5

HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

15.19 Storage of Reinforcement ........................................................................................ 15.5

CUTTING AND BENDING REINFORCEMENT

15.20 Cutting and Bending Reinforcement ....................................................................... 15.5

SURFACE CONDITION OF REINFORCEMENT

15.21 Surface Condition of Reinforcement ...................................................................... 15.6

FIXING REINFORCEMENT
15.25 Welding of Reinforcement ....................................................................................... 15.6

TOLERANCES
15.28 Tolerances: Reinforcement ...................................................................................... 15.6

INSPECTION OF REINFORCEMENT
15.29 Inspection of Reinforcement ................................................................................... 15.7

APPENDIX 15-A STANDING COMMITTEE ON CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY - RUST GUIDE FOR STEEL REINFORCEMENT BARS ...................................................................... 15.8

35

2006 Edition

SECTION 16 CONCRETE AND JOINTS IN CONCRETE

PART 1: CONCRETE WORKS
Page No.

NOTE ................................................................................................................... 16.3 GENERAL

16.02 Designation of Concrete Mixes .............................................................................. 16.4

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
16.05 Grade Strength ......................................................................................................... 16.4

MATERIALS
16.06 16.07 16.08 16.09 16.11 Cement ..................................................................................................................... Pulverized Fly Ash (PFA) ....................................................................................... Aggregates ............................................................................................................... Water ........................................................................................................................ Curing Compound ................................................................................................... 16.4 16.5 16.5 16.5 16.5

CONCRETE
16.12 16.13 16.14 16.15 16.16 Concrete Mix ........................................................................................................... Chloride Content of Concrete ................................................................................. Cementitious Content of Designed Mix Concrete ................................................. Standard Mix Concrete ............................................................................................ No-fines Concrete .................................................................................................... 16.6 16.6 16.7 16.7 16.7

SUBMISSIONS
16.18 Particulars of Concrete Mix .................................................................................... 16.8

TRIALS
16.23 Trial Mix Concrete .................................................................................................. 16.8

36

2006 Edition

Page No.

HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

16.34 Handling and Storage of Aggregates ....................................................................... 16.8

BATCHING AND MIXING CONCRETE

16.38 Mixing Concrete ....................................................................................................... 16.9

PLACING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE

16.42 16.43 Placing Concrete by Pumping ................................................................................. 16.9 Placing Concrete by Tremie .................................................................................... 16.9

CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
16.45 Construction Joints ................................................................................................... 16.9

CURING CONCRETE
16.46 Curing Concrete ..................................................................................................... 16.10

TESTING: CEMENT, PFA, AGGREGATE, ADMIXTURE, CURING COMPOUND

16.49 to 16.51 Batch: Cement, PFA, Aggregate, Admixture, Curing Compound ....................... 16.10 Testing: Cement, PFA, Aggregate, Admixture, Curing Compound, Recycled Water ....................................................................................................... 16.10

TESTING: CONCRETE - WORKABILITY

16.54 16.55 16.57 Samples: Workability of Concrete ......................................................................... 16.10 Testing: Workability of Concrete ........................................................................... 16.11 Non-compliance: Workability of Concrete ........................................................... 16.11

TESTING: CONCRETE - COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

16.58 16.59 16.61 Samples: Compressive Strength of Concrete ........................................................ 16.11 Testing: Compressive Strength of Concrete .......................................................... 16.12 Compliance Criteria: Compressive Strength of Designed Mix Concrete ........... 16.12

37

2006 Edition

Page No.

TESTING: HARDENED CONCRETE

16.63 Samples: Hardened Concrete and Concrete Cores .............................................. 16.12

PART 2: JOINTS IN CONCRETE NOTE .................................................................................................................. 16.13 MATERIALS

16.75 16.77 16.80 Joint Filler .............................................................................................................. 16.13 Joint Sealant ........................................................................................................... 16.13 Waterstops .............................................................................................................. 16.13

FORMING JOINTS
16.85 16.87 Forming Grooves ................................................................................................... 16.13 Sealing Joints ......................................................................................................... 16.14

TESTING: MATERIALS FOR JOINTS

16.91 16.92 Testing: Joint Filler, Joint Sealant, Waterstops ..................................................... 16.14 Compliance Criteria: Joint Filler .......................................................................... 16.14

SECTION 17 PRESTRESSING
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
17.04 Prestressing Tendon ................................................................................................. 17.3

MATERIALS
17.06 17.10 Prestressing Tendons ............................................................................................... 17.3 Grout for Prestressing Systems ............................................................................... 17.3

38

2006 Edition

Page No.

SUBMISSIONS
17.11 17.12 17.13 Particulars of Prestressing Systems ......................................................................... 17.3 Particulars of Prestressing Tendons ......................................................................... 17.4 Particulars of Grout Mix and Grouting Procedure ................................................. 17.4

TRIALS
17.19 17.20 Grouting Trials ......................................................................................................... 17.4 Testing: Grouting Trials ........................................................................................... 17.4

HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

17.26 Handling of Prestressing Tendons ........................................................................... 17.4

SURFACE CONDITION OF MATERIALS FOR PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

17.29 Surface Condition of Materials for Prestressing Systems ...................................... 17.4

INSTALLATION OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

17.30 17.33 Installation of Prestressing Systems ........................................................................ 17.5 Joints in Prestressing Tendons ................................................................................. 17.5

TENSIONING OF PRESTRESSING TENDONS

17.38 17.40 17.41 Tensioning of Prestressing Tendons ........................................................................ 17.5 Post-tensioning ......................................................................................................... 17.5 Protection of External Prestressing Tendons and Anchorages ............................... 17.5

INSPECTION OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

17.43 Inspection of Prestressing Systems ......................................................................... 17.5

GROUTING OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

17.46 Grouting Injection .................................................................................................... 17.6

39

2006 Edition

Page No.

TESTING: DUCT FRICTION

17.55 Testing: Duct Friction .............................................................................................. 17.6

SECTION 18 STEELWORK
NOTE .................................................................................................................... 18.3 GENERAL
18.01 18.02 18.03 Steelwork ................................................................................................................. 18.3 Protection of Steelwork ........................................................................................... 18.4 Amendments to BS 5400:Part 6 ............................................................................. 18.5

MATERIALS
18.04 18.12 18.13 18.14 18.15 18.16 Structural Steel ......................................................................................................... Stainless Steel .......................................................................................................... Cast Iron ................................................................................................................... Grout for Column Bases ......................................................................................... Lubricant for Nut Threads of HSFG Bolts ............................................................. Paint for Steelwork .................................................................................................. 18.6 18.8 18.9 18.9 18.9 18.9

SUBMISSIONS
18.18 18.22 18.26 18.28 Particulars of Workshop Drawings ....................................................................... Particulars of Welding Procedure ......................................................................... Particulars of Inspecting Authority and Testing Consultant ................................ Samples of Materials ............................................................................................. 18.10 18.10 18.10 18.10

TRIALS
18.29 Procedure Trials for Welding, Flame Cutting and Shearing ................................ 18.11

40

2006 Edition

Page No.

HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT OF MATERIALS

18.41 Storage of Steelwork .............................................................................................. 18.12

FABRICATION OF STEELWORK
18.43 18.45 18.51 18.52 Fabrication of Steelwork ........................................................................................ Welding, Heating and Cutting ............................................................................... Tightening of HSFG Bolts ..................................................................................... Defects in Steelwork .............................................................................................. 18.12 18.12 18.13 18.13

PREPARATION OF STEELWORK SURFACES

18.54 18.55 18.56 18.58 18.59 18.60 Cleaning of Steelwork and Coated Surfaces ......................................................... Preparation of Steelwork Surfaces ........................................................................ Blast Cleaning of Steelwork .................................................................................. Mechanical Cleaning of Steelwork ....................................................................... Flame Cleaning of Steelwork ................................................................................ Cleaning of Bolts, Nuts and Washers .................................................................... 18.13 18.14 18.14 18.15 18.15 18.15

METAL COATINGS TO STEELWORK

18.62 Metal Coatings to Steelwork ................................................................................. 18.16

PAINTING STEELWORK
18.63 18.64 18.65 18.66 Painting Systems for Steelwork ............................................................................. 18.18 Application of Paint to Steelwork ...........................................................................18.18 Working Conditions for Painting ........................................................................... 18.19 Priming and Overcoating Time Limits .................................................................. 18.19

PROTECTION OF JOINTS IN STEELWORK

18.71 18.75 18.76 Protection of HSFG Bolted Joints ......................................................................... 18.19 Joints Made after Coating the Parent Material ..................................................... 18.20 Sealing of Joints in Steelwork ............................................................................... 18.20

ERECTION OF STEELWORK
18.83 Supporting Devices for Steelwork ........................................................................ 18.20

41

2006 Edition

Page No.

TOLERANCES
18.87 Tolerances: Erection of Steelwork ........................................................................ 18.20

TESTING: TESTS ON STEELWORK AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS

18.89 Testing: Tests on Steelwork at Manufacturers Works ........................................ 18.20

TESTING: STEELWORK
18.90 18.94 18.95 18.97 Batch: Steelwork .................................................................................................... Non-compliance: Steelwork .................................................................................. Samples: Steel ........................................................................................................ Testing: Welds ........................................................................................................ 18.21 18.22 18.22 18.22

APPENDIX 18-A REQUIREMENTS ON THE SUBMISSION OF PAINT SAMPLES ....................................................................................... 18.23

SECTION 19 HANDRAILING, LADDERS, STAIRS AND FLOORING

MATERIALS
19.01 19.10 General Requirements ............................................................................................. 19.3 Bolts, Nuts, Screws, Washers and Rivets ............................................................... 19.3

DESIGNED BY CONTRACTOR
19.12 Designed by Contractor ........................................................................................... 19.3

42

2006 Edition

Page No.

FABRICATION OF HANDRAILING, LADDERS, STAIRS AND FLOORING

19.15 Welding Steel ............................................................................................................ 19.3

SUBMISSIONS
19.22 Particulars of Handrailing, Stairs, Ladders and Flooring ....................................... 19.4

SECTION 20 BRIDGEWORKS
PART 1: WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
20.01 Prefabricated Sheeting ............................................................................................. 20.3

SUBMISSIONS
20.04 Particulars of Waterproofing Systems ..................................................................... 20.3

INSTALLATION OF WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS

20.08 Installation of Waterproofing Systems .................................................................... 20.3

PART 2: BRIDGE BEARINGS MATERIALS

20.14 20.15 Holding-down Bolts for Bridge Bearings ............................................................. 20.4 Cement Mortar, Grout and Adhesive for Bridge Bearings ..................................... 20.4

43

2006 Edition

Page No.

DESIGN OF BRIDGE BEARINGS

20.17 Design of Bridge Bearings ...................................................................................... 20.4

INSTALLATION OF BRIDGE BEARINGS

20.26 Installation of Bridge Bearings ............................................................................... 20.4

TESTING: BRIDGE BEARINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

20.29 Testing: Bridge Bearings ......................................................................................... 20.5

PART 3: VEHICULAR PARAPETS MATERIALS

20.40 20.41 Holding-down Bolts for Vehicular Parapets ........................................................... 20.6 Grout for Holding-down Bolts ................................................................................ 20.6

INSTALLATION OF VEHICULAR PARAPETS

20.44 Installation of Vehicular Parapets ........................................................................... 20.6

TOLERANCES
20.49 20.51 20.52 Testing: Parapets Materials ..................................................................................... 20.6 Testing: Welded Components of Vehicular Parapets ........................................... 20.6 Testing: Metal Vehicular Parapet Posts ................................................................ 20.7

PART 4: MOVEMENT JOINTS DESIGN OF FABRICATED MOVEMENT JOINTS

20.63 Design of Fabricated Movement Joints .................................................................. 20.8

44

2006 Edition

Page No.

INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED MOVEMENT JOINTS

20.67 Installation of Fabricated Movement Joints ............................................................ 20.8

SECTION 21 MARINE WORKS

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
21.09 Reclamation .............................................................................................................. 21.3

MATERIALS
21.12 21.13 21.15 21.16 21.18 21.21 21.22 Table 21.6 21.24 Fill Material for Marine Works ................................................................................ Rock Armour ............................................................................................................ Facing Stones ........................................................................................................... Bermstones ............................................................................................................... Joint Filler for Slip Joints ......................................................................................... Rubber for Fenders ................................................................................................... Plastic Fenders .......................................................................................................... Physical Properties of Plastic Fenders .................................................................... Precast Concrete Pipes and Fittings for Submarine Outfalls ................................. 21.3 21.4 21.4 21.4 21.4 21.5 21.5 21.5 21.5

SUBMISSIONS
21.25 21.26 Particulars of Marine Works .................................................................................... 21.5 Particulars of Dredging ............................................................................................ 21.5

HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

21.36 21.38 Storage of Fill Material and Dredged Material ....................................................... 21.6 Handling and Storage of Precast Concrete Seawall Blocks, Copings and Wave Deflectors ....................................................................................................... 21.6

45

2006 Edition

Page No.

GENERAL MARINE WORKS REQUIREMENTS

21.42 21.44 21.46 21.49 21.50 21.52 Notification of Marine Works ................................................................................. Marine Traffic and Waterfront Operations ............................................................. Work Boats .............................................................................................................. Refuse Containment Booms and Floating Refuse for Use of Inert Construction and Demolition Material in Reclamation ......................................... Surveys for Marine Works ...................................................................................... Concreting in Locations Affected by Tides ............................................................ 21.6 21.6 21.7 21.7 21.7 21.7

DREDGING
21.54 Dredging .................................................................................................................. 21.7

DEPOSITION OF FILL MATERIAL BELOW +2.5 mPD

21.56 Deposition of Fill Material ...................................................................................... 21.8

DEPOSITION OF ROCK ARMOUR AND ROCK FOR UNDERLAYER

21.59 Deposition of Rock Armour and Rock for Underlayer .......................................... 21.8

CONSTRUCTION OF MARINE STRUCTURES

21.67 Bermstones for Marine Structures .......................................................................... 21.8

DEMOLITION OF MARINE STRUCTURES

21.79 Demolition of Marine Structures ............................................................................ 21.9

TOLERANCES
21.80 21.81 Tolerances: Dredging .............................................................................................. 21.9 Tolerances: Deposition of Fill Material .................................................................. 21.9

TESTING: DREDGED MATERIAL

21.88 Testing: Dredged Material ..................................................................................... 21.9

46

2006 Edition

Page No.

TESTING: PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION, PLASTICITY INDEX AND COEFFICIENT OF UNIFORMITY OF FILL MATERIAL FOR MARINE WORKS
21.89 21.90 Batch: Fill Material for Marine Works .................................................................. 21.10 Samples: Fill Material for Marine Works ............................................................. 21.10

TESTING: RELATIVE DENSITY, WATER ABSORPTION, AGGREGATE IMPACT VALUE, TEN PERCENT FINES VALUE, AGGREGATE ABRASION VALUE, SOUNDNESS, RESISTANCE TO FRACTURE AND WEIGHT OF ROCK ARMOUR AND ROCK FOR UNDERLAYER
21.93 21.95 21.96 21.97 21.99 Batch: Rock Armour .............................................................................................. Testing: Rock for Rock Armour ............................................................................ Samples: Rock Armour .......................................................................................... Testing: Rock Armour ............................................................................................ Non-compliance: Dropping Test ........................................................................... 21.10 21.10 21.10 21.11 21.11

Appendix 21.1 Loading Test for Plastic Fenders ........................................................................... 21.11

APPENDIX 21-A DETERMINATION OF SAND CONTENT OF DREDGED MATERIALS .................................................................................................. 21.12

47

2006 Edition

SECTION 22 WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORKS

Page No.

NOTE .................................................................................................................... 22.3 MATERIALS

22.13 22.14 to 22.20 22.21 22.22 22.27 Materials for Water Supply Pipeworks ................................................................... Steel Pipes and Fittings ........................................................................................... Elastomeric Joint Rings ........................................................................................... Anticorrosion Tape .................................................................................................. Bituminous Coatings ............................................................................................... Extension keys ......................................................................................................... 22.3 22.3 22.3 22.3 22.3 22.4

MATERIALS PROVIDED AND EQUIPMENT LOANED BY THE EMPLOYER

22.28 22.29 Materials Provided by the Employer ...................................................................... 22.4 Equipment Loaned by the Employer ...................................................................... 22.4

INSPECTION OF MANUFACTURE
22.30 Inspection of Manufacture and Testing .................................................................. 22.4

TRIALS
22.35 Welding Trials .......................................................................................................... 22.4

TRANSPORT, HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

22.38 22.40 Transport, Handling and Storage of Pipes, Joints and Fittings ............................. 22.5 Storage of Pipes ....................................................................................................... 22.5

SETTING OUT OF PIPELINES

22.45 Setting-out of Pipelines ............................................................................................. 22.5

48

2006 Edition

Page No.

LAYING AND BEDDING PIPES

22.46 Laying Pipes ............................................................................................................. 22.5

CUTTING AND DRILLING PIPES

22.51 Cutting Pipes ............................................................................................................ 22.6

JOINTING PIPES
22.53 Jointing Pipes ........................................................................................................... 22.6

THRUST AND ANCHOR BLOCKS

22.69 Thrust and Anchor Blocks ....................................................................................... 22.6

BED, HAUNCH AND SURROUND

22.70 Concrete Bed, Haunch and Surround ...................................................................... 22.6

TOLERANCES
22.71 Tolerances: Pipelines ................................................................................................ 22.6

SWABBING
22.72 Swabbing of Pipelines .............................................................................................. 22.7

WORK ON ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPES AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTES

22.77 Work on Asbestos Cement Pipes and Disposal of Asbestos Wastes ...................... 22.7

TESTING: JOINTS IN STEEL PIPES

22.78 Testing: Joints in Steel Pipes ................................................................................. 22.7

49

2006 Edition

Page No.

TESTING: PRESSURE PIPELINES FOR WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORKS

22.81 Testing: Pressure Pipelines for Water Supply Pipeworks ...................................... 22.7

TESTING: WATER STERILIZATION

22.84 Testing: Water Sterilization ..................................................................................... 22.8

APPENDIX 22.2 PROTECTION TO STEEL PIPES, FITTINGS AND SPECIALS USING EPOXY SYSTEM OTHER REQUIREMENTS .................................................................... 22.8

SECTION 23 WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

NOTE .................................................................................................................... 23.3 GLOSSARY OF TERMS
23.08 Water Retaining Structure ....................................................................................... 23.3

MATERIALS
23.09 Sliding Layers .......................................................................................................... 23.3

MATERIALS PROVIDED AND EQUIPMENT LOANED BY THE EMPLOYER

23.10 Materials Provided by the Employer ...................................................................... 23.3

50

2006 Edition

Page No.

DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
23.16 Drainage Systems ..................................................................................................... 23.3

CONSTRUCTION OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

23.18 23.19 23.20 23.21 Floor Slabs of Water Retaining Structures .............................................................. Walls of Water Retaining Structures ....................................................................... Roof Slabs of Water Retaining Structures ............................................................... Built-in Pipes in Water Retaining Structures .......................................................... 23.4 23.4 23.4 23.4

PROTECTION OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

23.22 Protection of Water Retaining Structures ................................................................ 23.4

DEPOSITION OF FILL MATERIAL

23.23 Deposition of Fill Material ...................................................................................... 23.5

CLEANING AND STERILIZATION OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

23.24 23.25 Cleaning and Sterilization of Water Retaining Structures ...................................... 23.5 Treatment and Disposal of Effluent ........................................................................ 23.5

TESTING: WATERTIGHTNESS OF ROOFS

23.31 Non-compliance: Watertightness of Roofs ............................................................. 23.5

TESTING: WATERTIGHTNESS OF STRUCTURES

23.32 23.33 23.34 Testing: Watertightness of Structures ...................................................................... 23.6 Compliance Criteria: Watertightness of Structures ................................................ 23.6 Non-compliance: Watertightness of Structures ....................................................... 23.6

TESTING: WATER STERILITY

23.35 to 23.37 Samples: Water Sterilization .................................................................................... 23.6 Compliance Criteria: Water Sterilization ................................................................ 23.6

51

2006 Edition

SECTION 24 BUILDING WORKS

Page No.

NOTE .................................................................................................................... 24.3 PART 1: ASPHALT ROOFING MATERIALS

24.01 24.02 Mastic Asphalt ......................................................................................................... 24.4 Isolating Membrane ................................................................................................. 24.4

SUBMISSIONS
24.10 Samples of Materials ............................................................................................... 24.4

ASPHALT ROOFING WORK

24.20 Solar Protection ..................................................................................................... 24.4

PART 2: CARPENTRY AND JOINERY MATERIALS

24.25 Timber for Carpentry and Joinery .......................................................................... 24.5

SUBMISSIONS
24.29 24.30 Particulars of Timber ............................................................................................... 24.5 Samples of Materials ............................................................................................... 24.6

STORAGE OF MATERIALS
24.31 Storage of Timber .................................................................................................... 24.6

52

2006 Edition

Page No.

TESTING: TIMBER
24.41 Testing: Timber ........................................................................................................ 24.6

PART 3: GLAZING MATERIALS

24.42 Glass .......................................................................................................................... 24.7

SUBMISSIONS
24.45 Samples of Materials ................................................................................................ 24.7

GLAZING WORK
24.47 Glazing Work ............................................................................................................ 24.7

PART 4: PLUMBING MATERIALS

24.54 Sanitary Appliances .................................................................................................. 24.8

SUBMISSIONS
24.57 Samples of Materials ................................................................................................ 24.8

TESTING: PLUMBING - FOUL DRAINS

24.61 Testing: Plumbing - Foul Drains ............................................................................. 24.8

TESTING: PLUMBING - WATER PIPES

24.63 Testing: Plumbing - Water Pipes ............................................................................. 24.8

53

2006 Edition

Page No.

PART 5: PLASTERWORK AND OTHER FINISHES MATERIALS

24.65 24.66 24.75 24.84 & 24.87 Cement, Water and Sand ......................................................................................... Premixed Plaster........................................................................................................ Tiles .......................................................................................................................... Tile Adhesive and Tile Grout .................................................................................. Particulars of Tile Adhesive and Tile Grout ........................................................... 24.9 24.9 24.9 24.9 24.9

SUBMISSIONS
24.88 Samples of Materials ............................................................................................. 24.10

TRIAL PANELS
24.94 Trial Panels for Tile Adhesive ............................................................................... 24.10

PLASTERING AND RENDERING

24.98 24.99 24.100 & 24.101 Applying Spatterdash to New Concrete ............................................................... Joint Inspection to Spatterdash ............................................................................. Background Preparation for Plastering and Rendering ....................................... Preparation of Hardened Concrete to Receive Cementitious Renders ............... 24.10 24.10 24.10 24.10

SCREEDS, TERRAZZO AND GRANOLITHIC CONCRETE

24.113 Screeds ................................................................................................................... 24.11

PART 6: PAINTING MATERIALS

24.128 24.129 to 24.132 24.146 Paint and Associated Materials ............................................................................. Aluminium Primer ................................................................................................. Calcium Plumbate Primer ..................................................................................... Volatile Organic Compound Content ................................................................... 24.12 24.12 24.12 24.12

54

2006 Edition

Page No.

PART 7: BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK MATERIALS

24.162 Wall Ties ................................................................................................................. 24.13

SUBMISSIONS
24.164 Samples of Materials .............................................................................................. 24.13

HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

24.170 Handling and Storage of Bricks and Blocks ......................................................... 24.13

LAYING BRICKS AND BLOCKS

24.171 Types of Mortar ...................................................................................................... 24.13

PART 8: METAL WINDOWS AND DOORS DESIGN AND FABRICATION OF METAL WINDOWS AND DOORS
24.186 Roller Shutters and Doors ...................................................................................... 24.14

SUBMISSIONS
24.188 Samples of Materials .............................................................................................. 24.14

PART 9: MASONRY SUBMISSIONS

24.196 Samples of Materials .............................................................................................. 24.15

55

2006 Edition

Page No.

RUBBLE STONE WALLING

24.199 Preparation of Stone for Rubble Stone Walling ................................................... 24.15

SECTION 25 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

GENERAL
25.01 General Requirements ............................................................................................. 25.3

WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

25.02 25.03 25.04 25.06 25.07 25.08 25.09 Water Pollution Control - General Requirements .................................................. Marine Plant and Equipment .................................................................................. Avoidance of Pollution during Dredging, Transporting and Dumping of Marine Mud ............................................................................................................. Discharge into Sewers, Drains and Water Bodies .................................................. Wastewater from Construction Activities ............................................................... Surface Runoff ......................................................................................................... Protection of Natural Streams/Rivers ..................................................................... 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.5 25.5 25.5

NOISE CONTROL
25.10 25.11 25.12 Noise Control - General Requirements .................................................................. 25.5 Allowable Noise Limits .......................................................................................... 25.6 Noise Mitigation Measures ..................................................................................... 25.6

AIR POLLUTION CONTROL

25.14 25.15 25.18 25.19 Air Pollution Control - General Requirements ...................................................... Dust Suppression ..................................................................................................... Odour Mitigation ..................................................................................................... Hoardings Adjoining Public Areas ......................................................................... 25.6 25.7 25.7 25.8

56

2006 Edition

Page No.

WASTE MANAGEMENT
25.21 25.23 25.24 25.25 25.26 25.27 Measures to Reduce/Minimize Generation of C&D Materials ............................. Works Involving Demolition ................................................................................... Sorting of C&D Material ......................................................................................... Trip Ticket System ................................................................................................... Avoidance of Nuisance ............................................................................................ Handling and Disposal of Waste ............................................................................. 25.8 25.8 25.8 25.9 25.9 25.9

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND AUDIT

25.29 25.30 Environmental Monitoring and Audit General Requirements ............................ 25.9 Environmental Team .............................................................................................. 25.10

APPENDIX 25-A A LIST OF THE LEGAL AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS RELEVANT TO ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND POLLUTION CONTROL ....................................................................... 25.11

SECTION 26 PRESERVATION AND PROTECTION OF TREES

GENERAL
26.02 General Requirements .............................................................................................. 26.3

SURVEY AND IDENTIFICATION OF EXISTING TREES

26.03 Tree Survey ............................................................................................................... 26.3

REMOVAL OF EXISTING TREES

26.05 26.06 Felling of Existing Trees .......................................................................................... 26.4 Transplanting of Existing Trees ............................................................................... 26.4

57

2006 Edition

Page No.

PRESERVATION AND PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES

26.08 26.09 26.10 26.11 26.14 26.15 General Precautionary Measures to Preserved Trees ............................................. Protection of Preserved Trees from Physical Damage and Soil Compaction ...... Protection of Preserved Trees from Changes in Ground Levels ........................... Protection of Preserved Trees from Excavation including Trenching .................. Pruning of Preserved Trees ..................................................................................... Control of Pest and Disease for Preserved Trees ................................................... 26.4 26.4 26.5 26.5 26.6 26.6

REPAIR OF DAMAGE
26.16 Repair of Damage to Preserved Trees and Other Affected Plants ........................ 26.6

REFERENCES ................................................................................................ 26.7

58

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 1 GENERAL

1.1

2006 Edition

1.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 1 GENERAL
INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS
GS 1.01 Application of the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works In general, the several documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of one another. However, pursuant to this GS Clause and GCC Clause 5(1), there is an order of prevalence which applies, as follows: Special Conditions of Contract General Conditions of Contract Particular Specification and Drawings General Specification British Standards, Codes of Practice and other similar standards. In case of ambiguities or discrepancies between contract documents, the Engineer should, subject to the above notes, issue appropriate instructions clarifying such ambiguities or discrepancies as provided under GCC Clause 5(2). PS clauses may substitute, amend or amplify the corresponding clause in the GS in part or in total. As such, suffixes S and A should be added to the PS clause number to indicate substitution or amendment/amplification respectively. A PS clause introducing such suffixes should be included if necessary. In drafting any SCC or PS clauses, reference should be made whenever appropriate to the GCC and the GS, using phrases such as Pursuant to General Conditions of Contract Clause ... or GS Clause ... is deleted and replaced by ..., etc. GS 1.02 Abbreviations If additional abbreviations are to be used, this GS Clause should be amended by a PS clause as follows: 1.02(3) A 1.02(4) A Abbreviations used in this PS shall have the following meanings: Abbreviations of units of measurement used in this PS shall have the following meanings:

GS 1.03

Glossary of Terms Problems associated with dealing the Contractors dealing with the utility undertakings sometimes cause particular concern. The definition of the term utilities provided here is of contractual significance and should be noted.

1.3

2006 Edition

GS 1.04 (1)

Trials and Approval It should be noted that any verbal approval or purported consent by silence does not constitute approval for the purpose of approval by the Engineer referred to in the GS. Moreover, the Engineer should not be bound by his previous approval and, at his discretion, may approve changes proposed by the Contractor. However, this GS Clause does not mean that the Engineer can approve works or material and later revoke that approval at his discretion. Acceptance of the proposed particulars contained in the Contractors submissions should not be construed as approval by the Engineer of the material or methods of construction. The materials or methods of construction actually used in executing the Works must comply with the Specification and the Contractor is responsible under the GCC for any consequences of non-compliance. Submissions of particulars are mainly required for the following purposes: (a) To allow the Engineer to check whether the materials or methods of construction proposed by the Contractor comply with the Specification, so that any errors or oversights may be discovered at an early stage, and To allow the Engineer to check testing and necessary certification provided by the manufacturer, where testing of the materials after delivery to the Site is impossible or impractical.

(b)

(2)

Any trials that need to be carried out by the Contractor should be expressly stipulated in the Contract either in the PS or on the Drawings. If not, such trials may give rise to claims for delay and additional payment. British Standards, Codes of Practice and Other Standards Should editions of British Standards, Codes of Practice and other standards different from those editions stated in Appendix 1.1 of the GS be adopted, a PS clause stipulating the applicable editions should be included. The Contractor may request the Engineer to approve the use of any editions of British Standards, Codes of Practice and other standards later than those stated in Appendix 1.1 of the GS. For matters concerning materials and testing, the Engineer should consult Chief Geotechnical Engineer/Standards and Testing, Geotechnical Engineering Office, before approval is given.

GS 1.05 (1)

(2)

1.4

2006 Edition

GS 1.06

Specifications in Metric and Imperial Units If any material required for the Contract is not available in metric specifications from any known sources, local or overseas, at the time the material is required for the Contract, the Engineer may, upon application from the Contractor, approve the use of an equivalent material in imperial specifications as a substitute, provided that: (a) (b) (c) (d) No statutory specification is to be altered unless relevant legal provision exists, The Engineer is satisfied that the Contractor has made every reasonable effort to obtain the material in metric specifications, In the Engineers opinion, the substitute material is suitable for the Works in all respects, In the Engineers opinion, the substitute material complies with all the specifications for the material substituted, with allowance for minor discrepancies between the specified metric measurements and the corresponding imperial measurements of the substitute, provided that such discrepancies can be effectively and satisfactorily compensated for by the provision of an extra quantity of the material, The Contractor shall be responsible for all extra quantities of the material required for meeting design and specification requirements of the Works due to the use of the substitute, and No permission given by the Engineer shall relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.

(e)

(f)

The Contractor shall be held responsible for the cost of any additional works or changes required to the permanent works. GS 1.07 Dimensions from Drawings For dimensions not shown or calculable from the Drawings, the Engineer is required under GCC Clause 6, to issue such other Drawings as necessary to the Contractor for the purpose of the execution of the Works provided that, if such Drawings are issued upon a request from the Contractor, adequate notice in writing is given to the Engineer by the Contractor. In the case of simple dimensions inadvertently omitted, the Engineer could, in the first instance, provide the requisite information in writing, followed up with a Drawing. This would avoid unnecessary delay.

1.5

2006 Edition

PROGRAMME
GS 1.08 Programme The additional programme is to be submitted within 14 days calculated from the date of submission of the programme by the Contractor under GCC Clause 16 or from the due date for such submission, whichever is the earlier. The programme to be submitted by the Contractor under this GS Clause is to include, inter alia, the information required under GCC Clause 6. Such information should include a list of the Drawings and Specifications required by the Contractor for execution of the Works. In addition to the requirements of this GS Clause, the Contractor is required under GCC Clauses 50 (upon granting of extension of time) and 51 (upon notification by the Engineer of slow progress of Works) to revise his programme referred to in GCC Clause 16.

CONTRACTORS SUPERINTENDENCE
GS 1.11 Supervision of Piling Works The additional requirement of this clause in the GS, 2006 Edition aims to assure the quality of piling works in order to prevent any risk to the safety of the superstructure. GS 1.12 Particulars of Agent and Employees A PS clause stipulating the qualifications and requirements of the agent is to be included. For contracts with an estimated cost exceeding the Group A limit, it should be specified in the Contract that the Contractor shall provide an agent who holds an acceptable university degree or an equivalent qualification. This policy has been adopted to encourage an adequate standard of superintendence. In special circumstances, when it is considered necessary that the proposed agent is to be a member of the Hong Kong Institution of Engineers or any other institutions of equivalent professional standing in civil engineering, the following PS clause may be considered: The Contractor shall submit within 7 days after the date of commencement of the Works the name and particulars of the proposed agent. The proposed agent shall be a member of the Hong Kong Institution of Engineers elected after 5 December 1975 or of the British Institution of Civil Engineers, or of any other institution of equivalent professional standing in a civil engineering discipline approved by the Engineer. The Contractor may nominate a person as agent who is not a member of the above professional institutions. However, in such a case, the Contractor shall, in addition to the nominated agent, employ a civil engineer who is a member of such an institution to be present at all times on the Site to assist the agent. The name and particulars of such a civil engineer shall be submitted to the Engineer.
1.6

2006 Edition

While the appointment of the agent is subject to approval from the Engineer, the Contractor is not required to seek approval for the appointment of the surveyor and the foreman. However, if the Engineer considers that the approved agent or the surveyor or foreman employed by the Contractor is not suitable, he may, pursuant to GCC Clauses 17 and 18, require the Contractor to replace them by a competent substitute.

CONSTRUCTION SAFETY AND SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC

(Amd 1/2009)

GS 1.13

Construction Safety and Safety of the Public (Amd 1/2009) Reference shall be made to the latest issue of the Construction Site Safety Manual and the DEVB Technical Circulars (Works) for the latest requirements on construction site safety and health and include such requirements in the contracts by means of particular specification clauses. Apart from contractual requirements, it should be noted that contractors also need to comply with the relevant safety and health legislations such as the Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance and its subsidiary Regulations, the Dangerous Goods Ordinance, the Electricity Ordinance, the Shipping and Port Control Ordinance, etc. Guidebooks to these legislations, which are designed to serve as handy references on matter requiring attention, have been published by the relevant Authorities (e.g. Labour Department, Marine Department, Electrical and Mechanical Services Department, Environmental Protection Department). A set of these guides should be kept on site for site staffs reference. Sub-clause (7) of this GS Clause is intended to enhance the safety of the public at and adjoining the Site, in particular, to include measures to prevent the public from getting close to the dangerous areas of the Site. Contract drafters are reminded to review and amend sub-clause (7) of this GS Clause as appropriate by means of a PS Clause if the Contractor is given an exclusive right of possession of the Site for the
execution of the Works and public access to the Site is not allowed under the Contract. (Amd
1/2009)

WORK ON ROADS
GS 1.14 Approval for Temporary Traffic Arrangements and Control Any additional requirements regarding temporary traffic arrangements, including known requirements from the Commissioner of Transport, the Commissioner of Police, the Director of Highways and any other relevant authorities, should be specified by means of a PS clause.

1.7

2006 Edition

GS 1.15

Temporary Traffic Arrangements and Control Sub-clause 2 of this GS Clause is in pursuance of paragraph 2.2 of the Code of Practice for Lighting, Signing and Guarding of Road Works, which requires compliance with this Code to be included in the Specification and an obligatory item to be inserted in the BQ for the Contractor to price accordingly.

GS 1.17

Use of Roads and Footways If considered necessary, provisions may be included in the PS with appropriate BQ items for installation, maintenance and subsequent removal of vehicle wheel-washing bays. Details of the washing bays should be shown on the Drawings.

GS 1.18

Work on Roads and Footways A PS clause stipulating the maximum length of roads occupied at any time should be included in the Contract, where and when appropriate.

GS 1.19

Reinstatement of Roads and Footways Details showing the standard of the reinstatement requirements of existing roads and footways may be included either in the PS or on the Drawings, as appropriate. The Engineer should consult the relevant Regional Office of the Highways Department for the reinstatement requirements, in particular to expressways, prior to the inclusion of the details in the PS or on the Drawings. In some previous cases, certain Regional Offices of Highways Department have only allowed their contractors to carry out the reinstatement works.

CARE OF THE WORKS

GS 1.22 Protection of Works It is relevant to note the Contractors responsibility for the care of the Works under GCC Clause 21 and his responsibility for indemnifying Government against all losses and claims for injury or damage to any person or property of others under GCC Clause 22.

DAMAGE AND INTERFERENCE

GS 1.23 Damage and Interference Pursuant to GCC Clause 24, the Contractor is obliged to indemnify Government against all claims in respect of interference with the convenience of the public, traffic and adjoining properties.

1.8

2006 Edition

GS 1.24

Watercourses and Drainage Systems Heavy rain can occur at any time. Consequently, when considering giving approval to temporary drainage systems, it is wise not to place too much reliance on the Contractors assurance that action can and will be taken to remove obstructions or improve flow as and when necessary. By the time the Contractor has managed to mobilise plant and labour, flooding and damage may have occurred already. It is more advisable for the Contractor to conduct regular clearing of debris in the rainy seasons. The capacity of the temporary drainage systems/diversions must be properly planned and designed in accordance to the requirements of this clause. There is an additional requirement in the GS, 2006 Edition to preserve the natural bottom and existing flow in the river and avoid disturbance to the river habitats. Vegetation alongside the riverbanks should also be minimised. All these measures aim to protect the ecosystem of the natural rivers.

RECORDS
GS 1.28 Records of Wage Rates The wage rate returns are to be completed in quadruplicate on Form no. G.F. 527. One copy of the completed form is to be sent to the Commissioner for Census and Statistics, the second copy is to be kept in the site office for record, the third copy is to be kept by the project office, and the fourth copy is to be retained by the Contractor. In completing the forms, the Contractor is to be advised to ignore wage rates for overtime work and to enter only rates for normal working hours. If the accuracy of wage rates entered on the form is doubtful, the Contractor is to be asked to produce evidence, such as wage books, to support his return.

LIAISON WITH OTHERS

GS 1.31 Liaison with Others If other contractors employed by the Employer, utility undertakings or other authorities are or will be carrying out work on or adjacent to the Site concurrently with the Works under the Contract, the following information should be included in a PS clause: (a) (b) The nature of the work by others, The approximate period(s) during which other contractors will be working on the Site (if the timing will be determined or affected by the Contractors own progress, this should be stated),

1.9

2006 Edition

(c) (d)

Details of any special facilities, such as access roads within the Site which the Contractor is expected to provide or maintain for use by others, and Any other aspects of the work by others that may affect the execution of the Works under the Contract e.g. restrictions on the sequence of work.

SITE CLEANLINESS
GS 1.32 Site Cleanliness The Contractor is also obliged to keep the Site in a clean and sanitary condition under GCC Clause 38. GS 1.33 Prevention of Mosquito Breeding In recent years, it has been noted that the ovitrap indices (which reflect the seriousness of mosquito breeding and thus mosquito-transmitted diseases) may surge sharply in a short period of time. Any lapse in mosquito control could contribute to a rise in the indices. The Government has launched anti-mosquito campaigns to alert the public of the need to eliminate the sources of mosquitoes. The resident site staff shall take all possible measures to prevent mosquito breeding. All possible measures should be taken to remove stagnant water and prevent the breeding of larvae or pupae of mosquitoes. In case the stagnant water (e.g. in gully pits or catch-pits) cannot be removed, the use of non-hazardous larvicide subject to the Engineers approval to prevent mosquito is permitted. GS 1.34 Prevention of Dust To comply with the latest environmental regulations, and to prevent public complaints against dust nuisances, dust-preventive measures that need to be implemented by the Contractor should be included in a PS clause in addition to those required under Clause 25.15 if considered necessary.

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

GS 1.35 Materials and Equipment Provided by the Employer For materials to be provided by the Employer, the following details are to be included in the Contract: (a) (b) (c) Precise information on the materials to be provided, Charges, if any, to the Contractor for the supply of the materials, The location of the store from which the Contractor shall take delivery of the
1.10

2006 Edition

materials, (d) (e) (f) Any handling procedures or protection measures to be observed during transport to the Site and storage of materials on the Site until use, Procedure for inspecting replacements, etc., and materials, reporting damage, obtaining

The method of disposing of surplus materials (return to Employers store and the location thereof, transport to tips, etc.).

For plant or equipment to be provided by the Employer, the following details are to be included in the Contract: (a) (b) (c) The type of plant or equipment to be provided, The basis of hire charges, if any, to the Contractor, Whether the Contractor is required to take delivery of the plant or equipment from and subsequently return to the Employers yard or store, and if so, the method of delivery or return and the location of the yard or store, Whether the Contractor is required to provide operators and consumables for the operation and maintenance of the plant, Any special insurance requirement, and Any other conditions under which the plant or equipment is provided.

(d) (e) (f)

It is relevant to note the Contractors liability under GCC Clause 46 when materials are provided by the Employer.

TESTING
GS 1.39 Samples for Testing It should be noted that, in accordance with GCC Clause 42(2), the Contractor should supply such samples of materials for examining, measuring or testing as may be selected or required by the Engineer or his representative. It is essential that correct and representative samples for testing are taken by the Contractor. Sometimes, the sampling standards and procedures are provided in the GS, British Standards or other listed standards. However, in some cases, this may be left to the discretion of the Engineer. In any event, the responsibility for ensuring that samples taken are a true representation of the materials delivered, or to be delivered, rests with the Engineer who should pay special attention to the selection and witnessing of the sampling on the Site.

1.11

2006 Edition

GS 1.40

Testing It should be noted that not all the tests specified in the GS are available at the Public Works Central Laboratory (PWCL). Those available are subject to change and the Chief Geotechnical Engineer/Standards and Testing of the Geotechnical Engineering Office should be consulted, as necessary, to determine which tests can be undertaken at PWCL. If any particular type of laboratory test cannot be carried out in the Employers laboratories, then this should be made clear in the PS. This is important as GCC Clause 42(4) states that testing carried out in the Employers laboratories shall be free of charge, whereas in accordance with GCC Clause 42(3), the Contractor is required to bear the expense of testing not carried out in the Employers laboratories in so far as the Contract provides.

SITE ESTABLISHMENT
GS 1.45 Use of the Site If the Site (which may include the works area) is to be divided into different Portions, a PS clause stipulating the Portions, the use of each, and the schedule of possession thereof, should be included. Moreover, the availability of any access and restrictive conditions on the use of the Site should also be described. For contracts where a delay in possession of Portions of the Site is envisaged, consideration should be given to the inclusion of the standard SCC clause entitled Delayed Possession of Portions of the Site as stated in Works Bureau Technical Circular No.18/2000. The circumstances under which rock-crushing plant may be used on the Site are provided in Works Bureau Technical Circular No. 11/2002 entitled Control of Site Crushers. Pursuant to GCC Clause 60(1)(c), the Engineer may order variations in respect of changes to the entrance to and exit from the Site. GS 1.46 Submission of Particulars Where considered appropriate, the layout and construction details of the Engineers accommodation should be stipulated in a PS clause. The relevant departmental standard drawings should be consulted with regard to the details to be included on project signboards, and a suitable PS clause included accordingly. GS 1.48 Fences and Signs on the Site A PS clause may be incorporated specifying the number and size of the project signboards to be erected. Where necessary, the Drawings should show those particular areas of the Site that
1.12

2006 Edition

are to be temporarily fenced or enclosed with hoarding to protect or keep out the public. It should be noted that metal instead of timber should be used for environmental sustainability reasons. GS 1.49 The Engineers Site Accommodation If details of the Engineers Site accommodation are to be included in the tender documents, this GS Clause may need to be suitably amended and amplified by a PS clause. Prefabricated units in good working conditions should be used for environmental sustainability reasons. A comprehensive list of the office and laboratory supplies, furniture and equipment, and surveying instruments should be included in or appended to the PS. If it is decided to set up a Site laboratory, Chief Geotechnical Engineer/Standards and Testing (CGE/S&T) should be consulted. There are some standard requirements for the maintenance and calibration of most laboratory equipment, which should be included in the Contract and CGE/S&T, can advise accordingly. Reference should also be made to Works Branch Technical Circular No. 14/2000 entitled Usage of Public Works Laboratories in Public Works Projects. GS 1.50 The Contractors Site Accommodation With regard to the provision of living accommodation for the Contractors staff on the Site, the Engineer should check the engineering conditions issued in respect of the allocation of the Site and consult the relevant District Lands Officer before granting permission to the Contractor. GS 1.52 Transport for the Engineer For land transport, a PS clause stipulating the quantity (nos.), type, age and seating capacity of each vehicle, and other details such as the type of drive, engine size, etc., should be included. As there are a number of models of environmentally friendly vehicles in the market, the Contractor should carry out a prior discussion with the Engineers Representative on the model to be proposed and the efficiency aspects before making the final proposal. For marine transport, a similar PS clause stipulating the quantity (nos.), travelling speed, seating capacity and other details (such as communication equipment) should be included. If land and/or marine transport is not required, relevant sub-clauses or the whole of this GS Clause should be deleted as appropriate. Normal working hours for the Contract should be stipulated in a PS clause. It is, however, relevant to note that normal working hours for the purpose of measurement of labour on a daywork basis are provided in paragraph 27.02 of the SMM as 0800 hours to 1700 hours on all days excluding General Holidays. This GS Clause should be read in conjunction with Lands and Works Branch Technical Circular No. 11/84 entitled Contract Transport.

1.13

2006 Edition

The logbook to be used for the record of journeys is to be the standard logbook GF 100. GS 1.53 Clearance of the Site The Contractor is obliged under GCC Clause 35, to clear away and remove from the Site all surplus materials and rubbish of any kind and leave the Site and the Works in a clean and tidy condition. The Contractor is also required under GCC Clause 73, to remove all Constructional Plant, temporary buildings and surplus materials from the Site, except those required to complete any outstanding work.

MEETINGS
GS 1.54 Meetings The Engineer may require the Contractors agent to attend meetings to review works progress and programme and to discuss site problems with a view to arriving at viable solutions. These meetings should be arranged and chaired by the Engineers Representative at least once a month or at more frequent intervals if considered necessary.

PHOTOGRAPHS
GS 1.55 Photographs Photographs are to be taken regularly and from the same vantage points at various parts or Sections of the Works. The locations of the vantage points are to be indicated on a key plan to be included in the photograph album. When the Contractor takes possession of the Site or any Portion thereof, the existing features of the Site and the area adjacent thereto should be extensively photographed with particular emphasis on the conditions of the adjoining properties or amenities. The Engineer should determine which photographs are to be progress photographs and which are to be record photographs. There should be a PS clause stating the minimum number of photographs (including the size) that should be taken by the Contractor in each month, from which the Engineer may select the progress photographs. Where appropriate, the maximum number of sets of progress photographs the Engineer may select for each month should also be specified. The meaning of set should also be defined in the PS clause. If considered necessary, the Contractor may be required to supply digital cameras for the exclusive use of the Engineers staff. The number and type of cameras and the memory cards as required are to be specified accordingly.

1.14

2006 Edition

It should be noted that in accordance with of GCC Clause 36, photographs of the Site or of the Works shall not be published or circulated by the Contractor unless permitted in writing by the Employer.

1.15

2006 Edition

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 2 SITE CLEARANCE

2.1

2006 Edition

2.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 2 SITE CLEARANCE

SITE CLEARANCE
GS 2.04 (1) Demolition Where site clearance involves the handling and disposal of hazardous materials (e.g. asbestos), the Engineer should discuss with the relevant departments/authorities, use a registered Specialist Contractor for removal of the materials and make appropriate provisions in the BQ. The minimum requirement of 14 days may be relaxed for routine clearance of debris and minor structures. The Engineer must ensure the requirements under the Waste Disposal (Charges for Disposal of Construction Waste) Regulation are followed. The Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings (Year 2004) is available for viewing at the Buildings Department website (http://www.info.gov.hk/bd) under the Codes of Practice and Design Manuals page of the Publications section. This Code contains basic information for the practitioners on better planning and control when carrying out demolition works. It also contains the latest regularity control on site supervision of demolishing complex structures. This Code should be read and used in conjunction with the Buildings Ordnance and the relevant Buildings (Administration) Regulations and Buildings (Demolition Works) Regulations relating to demolition works when preparing demolition plans for approval by the Building Authority. Users of the Code should exercise their professional judgment in application of this Code in selecting the most suitable demolition method. As there have been a number of fatal cases during demolition works, the Engineers Representative should exercise strict supervision of the demolition works in accordance with the approved plans. GS 2.05 Pipes and Cables For abandoned pipes of large diameter (say 375 mm or over) and when there is evidence of possible collapse, the Engineer may consider taking steps to avoid possible subsidence of the adjacent ground. In this case, the alternatives include: (a) Excavation to remove the pipe and refill the trench with suitable material, and (b) Grouting with an approved cement or concrete grout.

(3)

2.3

2006 Edition

GS 2.06

Trees The Engineer should follow the requirements of ETWB TCW No. 3/2006 Tree Preservation in formulating the tree preservation and transplanting proposals. The senior landscape architect of the department concerned and/or the relevant departments/authorities should be consulted as appropriate. Reference may be made to the Cyber Manual for Greening of ETWB on this website (http://etwbwb.host.ccgo.hksarg/).

GS 2.08 (1)

Materials and Equipment for Re-use and Storage The condition of items that are to be re-used or taken to store should be inspected by the Engineer at the commencement of the Works so as to determine the suitability of the items for re-use or storage. Record photographs of such items should be taken, where practicable, prior to their removal. Experience has shown that the Contractor poorly manages storage areas. The poor management not only causes wastage/damage to the construction materials but also environmental impacts and/or safety hazards. The Engineers Representative shall upgrade the supervision and control of the storage areas on the Site in compliance with this clause and the quality/environmental management plans of departments concerned.

(2)

2.4

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 3 LANDSCAPE SOFTWORKS AND ESTABLISHMENT WORKS

3.1

2006 Edition

3.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 3 LANDSCAPE SOFTWORKS AND ESTABLISHMENT WORKS

GENERAL AND GLOSSARY OF TERMS
GS 3.01 to GS 3.10 General Requirements Establishment Works The specification for landscape softworks and establishment works covers the definition of plant material and other material used in planting and grassing operations. It also includes particulars of grassing material, fertilizer, stakes, ties and guys, soil conditioners and the source of water, all of which have to be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Other aspects, such as handling, storage and transport of plant material, ground preparation, techniques of planting and grassing, establishment works and testing, are also covered. Site clearance, earthworks, tree preservation, landscape hardworks and geotechnical works, are specifically excluded as they are covered in other sections of the GS. A list of British Standards relevant to landscape works and establishment works is included at Appendix 3-A of this Guidance Note.

MATERIALS
All plant material should be thoroughly checked before planting to ensure the plants are free of diseases, fungi or plant/insect pests. GS 3.12 Whip Trees In normal circumstances, whips would comply with a height above soil level of 900 mm to 2000 mm. However, for certain species with tall habit, such as Eucalyptus a height of 3000 mm could be acceptable and the central leader should not be pruned to meet the 2000 mm category height. The stem diameter would be the main factor in determining whether a 3000 mm-high tree is a whip or a light standard. GS 3.13 to GS 3.16 Light Standard Trees Semi-Mature Trees Trees should meet all the specified size dimensions of each category, i.e. light standard, standard, heavy standard and semi-mature trees. However, the natural form of the tree species should be considered. The specimen may exceed a particular specified characteristic as long as it meets all the minimum requirements of the category. Except in special cases (e.g. topiary) or when specified in the Contract, the natural shape or form of the tree species should not be altered or trees be topped to meet the specified dimensions. As for all other types of plant material virtually, the species and size of trees should be stated in the contract documents.

3.3

2006 Edition

GS 3.17 & GS 3.18

Small Shrubs Large Shrubs Owing to the natural variation in habit of various shrub species, some species may not be able to meet all the specified characteristics. In these cases, the specific size and species requirements should be stated in the contract documents.

GS 3.19

Conifers The required container size for conifers as well as the minimum acceptable size of the plant should be stated in the contract documents.

GS 3.20 & GS 3.21

Palms Bamboos A species specific size schedule for the categories of palms and bamboos should be included in the contract documents. Whether the plants are to be single or multi-stemmed should also be clearly stated.

GS 3.22

Herbaceous Plants Knowledge of the characteristics of the species is required when the contract drafter specifies herbaceous plants so that the species can be specified against bulb, corm, rhizome, tuber or clump. The size of bulb, diameter of clump, etc. should be detailed in the contract documents. Appropriate PS clauses may also be required to describe the less common categories of plant material, such as aquatic plants, staghorn ferns, tree orchids etc.

GS 3.23

Ground Covers The number of shoots should be specified in the contract documents according to the species.

GS 3.24

Climbers Species whose habit varies from the size specified in the GS should be specified in the contract documents.

GS 3.25

Containerised Plants Containerised plants should be inspected to ensure that they have grown in a container for at least 3 months, and have not been placed in the container shortly before delivery to the Site.

3.4

2006 Edition

GS 3.26

Grass Seed A certificate of purity of the grass seed to be used on the Contract is to be supplied by the Contractor. The batch number of the certificate should be checked against that on the bag. Normally the certificate should not be more than 6 months old. If it is older than that, it may not be necessary to stop grass-seeding operations, but a sample should be retested as a check. A certificate of purity is not necessary for very small areas. Before commencement of grass seeding operations, a 500 g seed sample is to be supplied and retained by the Engineer. Impurities to look out for in the seed mix include stones, soil, twigs and other foreign matter. Lolium perenne is normally included in the seed mix to provide a quick greening effect, particularly in winter when other species are slow to germinate. It is primarily the overnight temperature which stimulates germination and, in the case of Cynodon dactylon and Paspalum notatum, this will not normally take place until the overnight temperature reaches 18C. However, if the Lolium perenne component is greater than 5 g/m, it could become dominant in early season applications and could suppress the germination of other species. Similarly, Eragrostic curvula should not exceed 2% of the mixture, otherwise it will shade out other species and create a fire-hazard in the dry season. Out of season hydroseeding should only be considered if site conditions make this unavoidable e.g. on sections of slope which will be rendered inaccessible by future earthworks making pumping heights excessive.

GS 3.27

Turf Before taking delivery of turf on Site, a sample of approximately 4 m or 5 turves (each of minimum size of 500 mm x 300 mm x 50 mm thick) from the stated source should be requested for inspection. It is not possible to obtain turf with 100% purity of the required grass species and in most cases 75% purity is acceptable. First-quality turf is rarely specified in Hong Kong except perhaps in gardens, sports pitches and high-grade amenity areas. Turf is normally only used on slopes of less than 15.

GS 3.28

Sprigs The length of sprigs is not important as they basically consist of a stolon (stem) with a node that gives them rooting ability. They are normally used on slopes steeper than 15 but not greater than 45. It is very important to obtain a sample of the sprigs to be used. This is especially true in hot weather when the sprigs tend to dry out very quickly. Sprigs are normally used in areas that are not accessible to hydroseeding machinery or are not suitable for conventional seeding, but they can also be used for small areas of amenity grass and lawns.

GS 3.29

Plant Name Although for convenience it is common practice to refer to plant names using Chinese names or English common name, the scientific or botanical name should always be cited in contract documents. Botanical names will take precedence.

3.5

2006 Edition

GS 3.30

Soil-mix Topsoil is scarce in Hong Kong and is rarely of a quality suitable for specification. Consequently, to ensure a high quality growing medium, a soil-mix is used. At least a provisional quantity of soil-mix should be included in every Contract which includes landscape softworks and establishment works in case of unforeseen poor ground conditions. Sample submission is required.

GS 3.31

Soil Conditioner The carbon/nitrogen ratio specified is between 20 and 55. Outside this range, any nitrogen applied to fertilizer may be rendered unavailable to plant material under normal conditions. A certificate of analysis of soil conditioner is required with details of the laboratory from which the analysis was derived (see GS Clause 3.38(1)(d)). Sample submission according to GS Clause 3.40(1)(e) is also required.

GS 3.32

Mulch Mulching helps to suppress weed growth and thus reduce maintenance requirements, and should normally be carried out on all planted areas, unless specified otherwise. The Contractor should submit samples in accordance with GS Clause 3.40(1)(f) for approval.

GS 3.33

Mulch for Hydroseeding As with seed and fertilizers, mulch material used in hydroseeding must have a small particle size. A wide range of products is available including wood fibre, paper waste, organic waste and processed straw and hay. Proprietary-type mulches manufactured from cellulose or paper-based material are specified. The mulch material should be checked to ensure it is free of stones, weeds, and foreign substances that are injurious to plant health.

GS 3.34

Fertilizer Details of the supplier and sample submission in accordance with GS Clause 3.40(1)(g) of each type of fertilizer are required for the Engineers approval.

GS 3.35

Soil Binder A hydroseeding mixture may include one or more chemical products that perform similar functions to mulch. These might include a humectant (a substance that absorbs or helps other substances to absorb or retain moisture) or soil binder such as soil solidifying agents that are mixed with water and applied to soil to stabilize and protect the soil surface. These products are generally specialized and require careful use to be effective. The products should be checked to ensure they are not toxic or injurious to plant health. As for mulches, various soil binders are used according to the preference of individual contractors and information on their composition is not generally readily available.

3.6

2006 Edition

GS 3.36

Stakes, Ties and Guys Steel stakes are normally preferred to timber or bamboo stakes because of resistance to rotting. However, they can cause damage to trees owing to abrasion from sharp edges and corners. This can be avoided if proper tying methods are adopted to restrain the stakes from coming into contact with the trunk or branches of the tree. Rounding of edges and corners is also required. Painting can extend the life of steel stakes and improve their appearance provided that unobtrusive colours are used. Sample submission in accordance with GS Clauses 3.40(1)(h) to (l) is required for the Engineers approval before commencement of works.

GS 3.37

Protective Fabric Material The protective fabric most commonly used in Hong Kong is Bemnet. This is a biodegradable BemlieseTM product, which is a non-woven, cellulose and wood-fibre based, resembling muslin. Some products are composed of jute, wood or coconut fibres, straw or combination of these material, either woven or non-woven. Some other products available in the market are photo-degradable. Particulars and samples of material to be used should be submitted to the Engineer prior to ordering and application. Material to be used should be able to provide the initial protection after the application but in any case should degrade after achieving the required grass coverage. Material that fails to degrade in time within the grass cover establishment should be removed off site as directed by the Engineer.

SUBMISSIONS
GS 3.38 to GS 3.40 Particulars of Seed Mixture, Turf, Sprigs, Soil Conditioner, Soil-mix and Water Samples of Materials The Contractor may, in special circumstances, apply to the Engineer for using alternative plant material as substitutes to those specified in the Contract. In such cases, he must demonstrate that the specified stock is unavailable from all reasonable sources, and the substitutes offered must be comparable in form, colour, habit and size to those specified.

PRE-PLANTING WORKS
GS 3.49 Preparatory Works Setting out of the Works before commencement of ground preparation is already covered by relevant clauses of the GCC. Forming of subsoil to predetermined levels is also adequately covered in Section 6 of the GS. One block item for ground preparation in the contract documents is not adequate. The contract documents should itemise all relevant operations as described in GS Clauses 3.50 to 3.57 and tenderers should be given an opportunity to price each item separately.

3.7

2006 Edition

GS 3.50

Cleaning Ground Other items of ground cleaning may be required as part of the preparatory works on the Site or adjacent areas, such as cleaning of weeds from drainage channels, cutting of long grass, etc. These should be included in the PS with relevant items provided in the contract documents.

GS 3.51

Ripping Ripping would normally only be carried out on the ground that suffers from extreme compaction, such as in areas which have been subjected to continuous over-running by construction vehicles. It should not be carried out on slopes steeper than 15 since this may lead to possible reduction of stability and increase in susceptibility to soil erosion. Ripping would normally be included as a Provisional Item in the contract documents to cover unforeseen eventualities, but may also appear as a firm item where conditions warrant.

GS 3.53

Soiling The depth of soil-mix required will vary, depending on particular site conditions and other factors, and should be clearly stated in the contract documents. Drawings should indicate the areas to be soiled with the required depth specified.

GS 3.54

Cultivation The depth of cultivation and rates for the incorporation of soil conditioner and fertilizer should be stated in the contract documents. The landscape contractor is normally only responsible for any erosion occurring on areas on which he has placed soil mix or on areas of cultivated existing ground i.e. on areas of his own works or areas affected by his own works. He is not responsible for the integrity of the main Contractors earthworks. Disputes may occur on this point between the planting/hydroseeding contractor and the contractor responsible for earthworks, so careful site supervision will be required.

PLANTING
GS 3.58 General In normal circumstances, planting should only be carried out between 1st March and 30th September except as stated in Clause 3.06. If planting is permitted at other times, particulars of changes to the material and methods for planting shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It is often necessary to plant out of season in order to meet contractual completion dates or fit in with the sequence of engineering works.

3.8

2006 Edition

As stated in GS Clause 3.06, the Engineer has the power to stop works, when in his opinion weather and ground conditions are unsuitable, for example, during periods of very heavy rainfall, when the ground is compacted or waterlogged or during periods of drought. GS 3.59 Use of Excavated Material In normal circumstances, the material excavated from the pit should be used as part of the soil-mix as described in GS Clause 3.30. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the excavated material is unsuitable, the Contractor will be responsible for supplying acceptable material for use in the mix. GS 3.61 Staking, Tying and Guying Plant material is commonly damaged during the staking and tying operations and the Engineer should ensure that sufficient care is exercised. Where tree guards are used, stakes may be dispensed with and the tree tied to the guard as described in GS Clause 3.36(3). It is essential that ties are adjustable to allow for growth and where rot-proof rope is used, it should be protected with a plastic or rubber sleeve to avoid damage to the trunk. Guying is normally only used on large palms or trees over 4.0 m high. Sufficient space should be provided where the guy is attached to the tree to allow for growth, and the wire guy should be enclosed in a plastic or rubber sleeve as described in GS Clause 3.36(4). Ground anchors may be required in the case of very large trees or multi-stemmed palms where it is not practical to use staking or guying, such as in paved plazas or other pedestrian areas. In such cases, details of the technique to be employed should be included in the contract documents. Staking should not be too rigid because a newly planted tree must be able to move slightly and movement is needed to stimulate the growth process to form tough wood. GS 3.62 Mulching The provision of a 50 mm thick layer of mulch over planted areas should be billed as a separate item on a m basis. An item should also be included in the contract documents for the topping up of mulched areas during the establishment period, which is to be billed and paid on a m basis. GS 3.64 Pit Planting of Seedlings, Shrubs, Whips, Climbers, Ground Covers and Herbaceous Plants Whips do not always require to be staked. However, in exposed locations or for particular species or sites, this may be required. It may also be necessary when the planting is carried out late in the season and there is insufficient time for the plants to develop anchorage through their root systems. To cover eventualities, a provisional sum allowing for the staking of 10% of whips may be included in the Contract.

3.9

2006 Edition

GRASSING
GS 3.69 & GS 3.70 Hydroseeding Hydroseeding Cover In considering the use of hydroseeding on slopes the following aspects should be considered: (a) Machinery limits: hydroseeding machines operating in Hong Kong generally have a limit on vertical-lift of approximately 20 m, after which staging pumps are required. In general terms, 100 m vertical lift should be considered as a maximum where staging pumps are employed due to loss of suction. (b) Access: in view of (a) above, access for machinery should be a major consideration in planning slopes to be hydroseeded and in programming this work in phase with the engineering works. The Engineer should check the practicality of the method statement for hydroseeding work to ensure that it is capable of implementation. A performance specification is normally adopted for hydroseeding and consequently the responsibility for achieving a satisfactory result rests with the hydroseeding contractor. The Contractor should be required to submit a method statement explaining how he intends to achieve the required grass cover before the commencement of hydroseeding operations. As rule of thumb, grass seed germination should take place within 28 days after application. GS 3.71 Surface Conditions for Hydroseeding The surface of the slope to be hydroseeded should be firm but rough with a coarse, open texture to aid adhesion and rooting. Scarifying as described in GS Clause 3.55 may be required to achieve this as directed by the Engineer. Any exposed construction debris, rubbish, litter, stones larger than 25 mm diameter, weeds and contaminated soil should be removed from the surface of the ground. The slope should not be moistened immediately before hydroseeding as this will inhibit capillary action and reduce the effectiveness of the soil binder and stabilizer. Adequate water is normally present in the hydroseeding mixture to allow germination to take place and, under normal circumstances, no additional watering is required. Horizontal chases may be required, on slopes steeper than 30. These should be 25 mm wide x 25 mm deep and 450 mm apart cut by hand with an implement dragged horizontally across the surface.

3.10

2006 Edition

GS 3.72

Application of Hydroseeding (a) Grass seed: The choice of seed mix should form part of the Contractors submission. (nitrogen/phosphorus/potassium) fertilizer is

(b) Fertilizer: A 15:15:15 commonly used. (c)

Mulch: the rate of 100 g/m refers to air-dried weight that is equivalent to approximately 250 g wet weight. It is not advisable to use a higher rate of application as this may block the hydroseeding machinery.

(d) Soil binder: the appropriate application rate is variable and is very much dependant on the type used. In all cases, the manufacturers instructions should be followed, after making sure that they are applicable to conditions in Hong Kong. (e) Dye: it is not normally manufactured specifically for hydroseeding purposes and can be chemical or organic in origin but must be non-toxic.

GS 3.73

Protective Material Protective material should be degradable. The Contractor has to submit particulars and sample for approval before installation on site. Any residues found after achieving the grass cover should be removed off site.

GS 3.74

Patching Up Broadcast seeding is not normally used in Hong Kong, but may be used for patching up areas of hydroseeding, which are inaccessible or too small for the use of a hydroseeder. The following factors should be borne in mind when considering broadcast seeding: (a) Because of the absence of a soil binding agent and protective membrane, broadcast seeding is very susceptible to erosion and drying out, and

(b) The choice of species should be limited to species specified under the GS or those known to survive in local conditions. The application rate should aim to achieve 100% coverage of areas to be patched up and should be agreed with the Engineer before application.

3.11

2006 Edition

GS 3.76

Turfing (a) The surface to be turfed should be free of rocks, concrete, asphalt, weeds, and debris. Surface irregularities should be smoothed out and the grading of the area should be accepted by the Engineer before turf laying. (b) Size of turf should be 500 mm x 300 mm each, or as agreed with the Engineer. Lay the first strip of turf slabs along a straight line (use a string in irregular areas). Butt joints tightly. Do not overlap edges. On the second strip, stagger the joints (as in laying bricks). Use a sharp knife to cut turves to fit curves, edges, and sprinkler heads. Do not use a turf strip less than 250 mm wide. (c) Do not lay the entire lawn area before watering. When a conveniently large area has been turfed, water lightly to prevent drying out. Continue to lay turves and to water, until installation has been completed. (d) Turf should be laid upon the same day of material arrival on site. Delivered turves, if not planted immediately, should be properly treated to avoid drying out and yellowing. (e) If turf is not settled to the desired finish level, top dressing of suitable soil mix should be applied. (f) After laying of turf has been completed, the area should be rolled lightly to eliminate irregularities and to form good contact between turves and soil. Avoid very heavy rollers or excessive initial watering to avoid roller marks.

(g) Fertilizer for grass lawn may be used as agreed with the Engineer. (h) Minimize traffic over turfed areas during its initial establishment. (i) All dead or dying turves should be replaced with material of equivalent quality as directed by the Engineer.

GS 3.77

Sprigging (a) Prior to sprigging, the surface should be free of rocks, concrete, asphalt, weeds, and debris. Surface irregularities should be smoothed out and the grading of the area should be accepted by the Engineer. (b) At no time prior to planting or after planting shall material be allowed to dry or be subjected to drying conditions. Newly planted materials shall be irrigated and maintained as approved by the Engineer.

3.12

2006 Edition

ESTABLISHMENT WORKS
GS 3.79 Establishment Works The period for establishment works starts on the date as certified by the Engineer as substantial completion for planting woks or as specified under the Contract and shall remain in force for the time stated in the Contract, which is normally 12 months or longer. The Contractor will remain responsible for the landscape softworks during the establishment period and he is expected to perform a number of specified horticultural technical operations in addition to his general obligations to care for and maintain planted material in healthy and satisfactory conditions. It could either be billed as a general establishment works item to cover his general obligations as specified in the GS or as modified in the PS, with specialised operations to be billed separately and carried out as and when instructed by the Engineer. GS 3.80 Inspection of Establishment Works Any plants which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have been wilfully damaged or unlawfully removed from the Site under circumstances beyond reasonable control of the Contractor shall be identified and agreed during the inspection. These plants are to be replaced at billed rates and must therefore be carefully distinguished from those for which the Contractor is liable. A provisional sum may be included in the contract documents to provide for replacements. GS 3.81 Replacement of Plants and Grass Replacement should be carried out at the Contractors own cost unless otherwise specified in the Contract. The replacement of plants and grass should take place within 14 days once identified by the Engineer. GS 3.82 Security of Stakes, Ties and Guys The adjustment of tree ties should take into account the tree growth and thus more frequent adjustment may be required during the growing season. GS 3.83 Firming up Plants Prolonged exposure of rootball will cause permanent damage because of drying out. Plants not at upright position will also induce deformation of the plant. Therefore, firming up should be carried out immediately once observed.

3.13

2006 Edition

GS 3.84

Watering Watering is one of the most important general obligations of the Contractor. There is no simple way to describe when planted or grassed areas are to be watered as the need for watering is dependent on natural precipitation, weather conditions, period elapsed since planting, ground water levels, topography and soil conditions, etc. Grass covered areas often require no watering during the establishment period as the specified coverage must be achieved before the issue of the Completion Certificate. Grass is therefore assumed to have become established before the commencement of the establishment period and the avoidance of excessive watering encourages deeper rooting. Exceptions are the lawn areas in parks or amenity areas where the grassed surface is subject to wear and tear and where it plays an important role in the scenic quality of the landscape. These areas will need to be specifically delineated on the Drawings/in the contract documents. Planted material will need to be watered at regular intervals, reducing in frequency from the time it was planted. The main purpose is to avoid water stress in plants during the establishment period. Any damage due to over watering which results in shallow root growth, or from allowing plants to dry out to their permanent wilting point, shall be made good by replacing affected plant material at the Contractors expense. The permanent wilting point is that point in the drying out process beyond which a plant has lost its natural capacity to recover from lack of water and resume normal growth after watering. Partial recovery after watering manifests itself by unseasonal shedding of leaves, severe dieback of one year old shoots, branches or the entire crown, with new shoots developing immediately above the root collar. Without affecting the Contractors obligation to water as and when required to ensure successful establishment of all plant material, the Engineer should instruct the Contractor to water plants which in his opinion are suffering from water stress and the Contractor should carry out such work within 24 hours of receiving such instruction. The Contractor should keep on site a proper written record of watering operations for inspection by the Engineer.

GS 3.85

Weeding Weeding is a horticultural technical operation of which there are two distinct types: (a) Weeding bare ground to prevent the loss of nutrients from the soil and competition with planted material, and to maintain a neat, well cared for appearance. Such an operation should include shallow or light cultivation of the surface where no mulch has been spread.

(b) Corrective weeding, such as on slopes where planting has been designed to form a new vegetation cover. The operation includes the removal of any weeds which either threaten the survival of planted vegetation, cause excessive competition resulting in reduced growth, cause a potential fire hazard, or adversely affect the tidiness of the planted material.

3.14

2006 Edition

Areas that are anticipated to need such operations must be identified in the contract documents and verified on the Site after planting, and the work could be billed on number of operations basis (as general operation for planted areas), per m2 basis (as specified for large pieces of planted area), or per number of plants (as specified for individual trees/palms/seedling, usually with the pit size to be weeded specified). Examples of weeds include a range of highly invasive vines, such as Cassytha filiformis (), Cuscuta species(), Mikania micrantha (), Seshania species, Pueraria species and Ipomoea species. Weeds removed from planting areas should be collected and disposed off site within 24 hours after the operation. GS 3.86 Pruning Pruning is a specialized operation, including tree surgery, to develop a particular shape or density (bushiness), to encourage or improve flowering and/or to remove dead or damaged limbs from larger trees in the interest of public safety. Such operations should be billed according to the number of specified plants to be treated (usually for trees/palms) or as number of pruning operations to be carried out (usually apply to shrubs and ground covers which require frequent pruning to ensure healthy establishment). Excluded from separate billing is any corrective pruning required as a result of damage caused while plants are in transit to the Site or by being mishandled before and during planting. (See GS Clause 3.44 - Storage of Plants). Tree Surgery operations should be carried out by specialists and are usually required to ensure the continued survival of mature specimen trees of particular amenity value. Operations of this nature should be performed strictly in accordance with standard arboricultural practices. The extent of any removal of main branches should be agreed with the Engineer before the tree surgery operation. Appropriate sharp and sterilized tools should be used to form neat and clear-cut plants. Branches removed from the pruning operation within a planting bed should be collected and removed off site within 24 hours after the operation. GS 3.87 Grass Cutting Grass covered areas are identified in three categories by their purpose and intended use as follows: (a) Category 1 - Amenity grass or lawns, designed to play a role in the scenic quality of the landscape and/or for specific public use. (b) Category 2 - Soil stabilizing grass, designed to form a speedy soil binding and stabilizing vegetative cover on bare soil after initial formation. (c) Category 3 - Grass established by hydroseeding, on prominent roadside slopes, etc., which needs to be maintained as mown grass for visual or other purposes.
3.15

2006 Edition

Cutting requirements vary for each type and, therefore, such areas must be identified on the Drawings and verified on the Site at the commencement of the establishment period. Whilst amenity grass may require at least 3 to 12 cuttings per year, hydroseeded areas on some formed slopes may only require cutting twice a year to remove the potential fire hazard or excessive competition with planted seedlings. Cutting requirements for each type should be assessed and billed separately on a per m2 basis or as number of operations. GS 3.89 Post-planting Fertilizer A slow release post-planting fertilizer should be applied during the first half of a growing season, 3 to 9 months after completion of planting. This application should be billed on a per m basis for grass and shrub areas, but on a per number basis for trees. The fertilizing should take place after the weeding operation. The amount and frequency of application shall comply with manufacturers guidance. Over-fertilization is likely to burn and kill roots. GS 3.90 Control of Pests, Fungi and Disease Where pruning is required to remove parts of the infested plants, caution should be taken to prevent the possible spread. Sterilized tools should be used to carry out the cut, and after each cut, the tool should be sterilized as well. Parts removed from the infested plant should not be kept intact with other plants or soil surface. They should be disposed off the Site and properly treated to avoid spreading of the infestation within and outside the Site. GS 3.91 Forking Over This is a form of cultivation, usually performed by hand, to relieve compaction, aerate the soil, reduce evaporation loss and improve the soil structure. It requires skilled staff to ensure no damage is done to planted stock. It is not a cosmetic exercise and should not be performed on areas covered by mulch, or the areas would be severely disturbed. Areas to be forked over need to be identified on the Site and the work billed on a per m2 basis.

TESTING: GRASS COVER

GS 3.94 Testing: Grass Cover Grass cover is a measure of the extent to which the aerial vegetative growth of the grass provides physical cover or protection to the soil surface. There is no precise scientific method of assessing grass cover available, but rather it is necessary to rely on an experienced visual assessment. Grass should be cut back to a maximum height of 300 mm before testing commences. In practice, the extent of cover is usually self-evident and disputes are rare, although results may be tabulated in graph form, if necessary.

3.16

2006 Edition

TREE TRANSPLANTING
GS 3.97 Transplanting of Existing Trees Success of transplanting largely depends on the plant species and the trees pre-transplant condition, characteristics of the donor site and the receptor site, the season of the year, and follow-up care, as well as on the transplanting method itself. Methods of transplanting depend on the plant size and species, the soil and site conditions, the lead-time before moving, the time betweendigging and planting, the distance between the donor site and the receptor site, available equipment, personnel, and funds. The seasonal factors affect the ease with which a particular species can be transplanted. However, in most cases, the timing of relocation is determined by the project schedule. Whatever the season, the plant must be protected from desiccation. It is recommended to avoid moving plants on extremely cold, hot, dry or windy days. Some practitioners may consider transplanting trees at night to protect micro organism that are thought to promote root growth after transplanting but may be injured or even killed by solar radiation or desiccation. Care must be taken to avoid damaging the roots or fracturing the root ball. Exposed roots should be covered or misted to prevent drying out. The tops should be misted to reduce transpiration. Sometimes leaves can be stripped off or anti-transpirant sprays are applied to plants in leaf to reduce transpiration during and after moving. Unless wisely watered and managed, a large transplant will be subject to severe stress and be more susceptible to insect and disease attack, until the original root volume size is regained. The cost and difficulty of moving also increase rapidly with plant size. Experience has also shown that some species can be transplanted more easily than others. Palms species vary widely in their response to root pruning that should be conducted with care. Where terrain is sloped, the horizontal orientation of the root ball related to the crown must be considered. It would be best to retain the original slope. Pruning before transplanting should usually be limited to branches that will interfere with digging, loading and transplanting and those that cannot be tied in. It is neither necessary nor advisable to reduce the size of the crown in order to compensate for loss of roots.

3.17

2006 Edition

APPENDIX 3-A BRITISH STANDARDS RELEVANT TO LANDSCAPE SOFTWORKS AND ESTABLISHMENT WORKS

BS 3936: Part 1: 1992 BS 3936: Part 4: 1984 BS 3936: Part 9: 1998 BS 3936: Part 10: 1990 BS 3969: 1998 BS 3998: 1989 BS 4043: 1989 BS 4428: 1989

Nursery stock. Specification for trees and shrubs Nursery stock. Specification for forest trees Nursery stock. Specification for bulbs, corms and tubers Nursery stock. Specification for ground cover plants Recommendations for turf for general purposes Recommendations for tree work Recommendations for transplanting root-balled trees Code of Practice for general landscape operations (excluding hard surfaces) Trees in relation to construction. Recommendations

BS 5837: 2005

3.18

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 4 FENCING

4.1

2006 Edition

4.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 4 FENCING
NOTE
The types of fencing required should be shown on the Drawings, supported by appropriate items in the BQ. This will depend on factors such as security requirements and environmental considerations. The Drawings should also show the location of each type of fencing, where appropriate, together with construction details, including post foundations that should be selected dependent upon ground conditions. Other useful guidances on coating and painting of steel, fittings to fencing and welding steel can be found in the guidance notes on Section 18 - Steelwork.

MATERIALS
GS 4.12 Timber Timber shall not be used for construction of fencing except in special circumstances and with the Engineers approval, such as replacement of existing wooden fencing during maintenance. Works Branch Technical Circular No. 32/92 gives some useful guidelines in finding an alternative material for timber. Particular Specification shall be provided if the use of timber is unavoidable. GS 4.14 (2) Bolt, Nuts, Washers and Fittings It may not always be possible to obtain bolts of the correct length. In such cases, the length of bolts projecting beyond the nuts may be suitably adjusted by the use of washers. For small-diameter bolts with fine threads, electroplating may sometimes be considered with an intention to replace hot-dip galvanizing which proves to be impracticable. However, electroplating is not corrosion-resistant and, therefore, other corrosion-resistant material should be adopted to achieve the expected design life.

(4)

POSTS AND GATES FOR FENCING

GS 4.19 Gates The locations of gates, including construction details, should be shown on the Drawings. If a number of different kinds of gate are to be provided, consideration should be given to including type designs and schedules on the Drawings to avoid billing gates individually.
4.3

2006 Edition

ERECTING FENCING
GS 4.23 & GS 4.24 Alignment of Fencing Posts for Fencing To obtain a smooth alignment, both horizontally and vertically, and to adequately secure the fencing, the number of and distance between posts may require to be chosen as site conditions dictate, e.g. on heavily undulating ground and on horizontal curves, straining posts should be placed at the summits and valleys of slopes, and for sharp changes in direction, two straining posts may be used instead of one. Any gap between the bottom of hoarding and ground should be sealed. Where practicable and appropriate, earthworks should be designed so that fences installed on berms will have a regular profile. GS 4.25 Erecting Posts for Fencing Where there is a risk of concrete footings interfering with utilities, ducts or drains, and the alignment of the fence cannot be adjusted to avoid the obstruction, special footings may be required. These should be shown on the Drawings wherever possible. It may be necessary to design the special footings when the actual site conditions are revealed.

4.4

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 5 DRAINAGE WORKS

5.1

2006 Edition

5.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 5 DRAINAGE WORKS

NOTE
The specification for pipeworks in this Section of the GS is basically written for pipes that convey sewage and surface water. Pipes for other purposes may be specified to comply with this Section, if considered suitable by the designer.

MATERIALS
GS 5.11 (2) Precast Concrete Pipes and Fittings The classes of pipes to be used should be indicated in the PS or on the Drawings. For the classification of pipes, reference should be made to the relevant standards. Flexible spigot and socket joints are the most commonly used type of joint for precast concrete pipes. If other types of joint are used, this GS Clause should be amended by including a PS clause to suit. Drawings should show the type of joint for different sections of pipeline. Rebated type flexible joints may be more economical if the pipe wall is sufficiently thick to accommodate a rebated joint. This may occur in extra strength pipes or large diameter pipes, usually over 1500 mm. GS 5.13 (2) DI Pipes and Fittings The classes of pipes to be used should be indicated in the PS or on the Drawings. For the classification of pipes, reference should be made to the relevant standards. When the joint is fully deflected, the amount of allowable withdrawal will be much smaller than the specified minimum of 38 mm. For any given application, the Engineer should assess the combined effect of probable angular deflection and axial movement and ascertain with the pipe supplier the capability of the joint in meeting the requirement. GS 5.15 (2) uPVC Pipes and Fittings The types of joint required, whether flexible or solvent welded, should be shown on the Drawings or stated in the PS. Solvent welded joints are generally more economical if flexibility to accommodate movements is not required.

5.3

2006 Edition

GS 5.17 (5)

Bolts, Nuts and Washers If it is necessary to obtain bolts, nuts or joint rings from sources other than the manufacturer of the joint, the joint manufacturer should be asked to confirm that the proposed materials are compatible with each other and will work satisfactorily with the joint before giving approval. Elastomeric Joint Rings See guidance notes on GS Clause 5.17(5). Detachable Couplings and Flange Adapters In the market, there are a number of proprietary brands of couplings and adapters that are considered to be appropriate for use in this type of work According to para. 6.3.1 (i) Specification in Terms of Performance in Chapter 5 of the Project Administration Handbook, it is not appropriate to refer to a particular trade name/patent/origin in the PS. The Contractor should include in his submission details of projects on which these brands have been used successfully. The angular deflection and straight draw figures stated in Table 5.2 of the GS are considered to be suitable for most applications and are capable of being complied with by a number of popular brands of couplings and adapters. These figures may require amendment, depending on the application, by the inclusion of a PS clause. Anticorrosion Tape In the market, there are number of proprietary brands of anticorrosion tape, which are considered to be appropriate for use in this type of work. The Contractor should include in his submission details of projects on which these brands have been used successfully. See Table 5.3 of the GS for specification requirements for other brands not mentioned above.

GS 5.18 (1) GS 5.19 (1)

(2)

GS 5.20 (1)

GS 5.22 (2)

Aggregates for Granular Bed and Granular Fill The choice of aggregate for granular bed will depend on availability and ground conditions, within the limits stated in Table 5.4 of the GS. Generally, small size aggregates are not preferred in soft fine-grained soils or where the formation may be softened by wet conditions. The suitability of the aggregate should also be checked by the tests described in GS Clauses 5.85 to 5.88.

5.4

2006 Edition

GS 5.25

Precast Concrete Manholes In general, the use of precast concrete manholes enables faster construction and reduces labour cost, and should be specified where appropriate. Proposals by the Contractor to use precast concrete manholes in lieu of in-situ construction should be considered.

GS 5.28 (3)

Manhole Covers, Gully Gratings and Kerb Overflow Weirs Full details of these fittings are shown on various DSD and HyD Standard Drawings. The relevant Standard Drawings should be listed in the PS. Penstocks The materials specification for the components is written for penstocks operating in sewage with a high-chloride content (caused by seawater flushing). If the penstock is required to operate in sewage containing corrosive chemicals, the necessary amendments may be made by a PS clause. The Drawings should indicate, preferably in the form of a schedule, which penstocks are on-seating, off-seating or both. Penstocks with rising stems are normally preferred as they allow the operator to easily see the operating position of the penstock. Also, all the moving parts operating the door are housed above the water line. In some situations, non-rising stems are required, such as when there is insufficient headroom at the operating pillar position. The schedule of penstocks should be given in the PS or on the Drawings, and should indicate which penstocks require non-rising stems. Gate Valves The guidance notes on GS Clause 5.29(1) and GS Clause 5.29(3) also apply here. Air Valves The pressure rating of 3 bars is based on the nominal pressure as recommended by Greenfield & Kennedy Limited for single orifice valves. However, the pressure rating to be used should be checked against the designed operating pressure of rising mains. Filling Abandoned Pipes and Manholes In accordance with BS 3892:Part 2:1984, Grade A ash allows 12.5% to 30% residue on the 45 micron sieve and Grade B allows 30% to 60% residue. When using PFAC in foam concrete, both grades of ash are acceptable. The amount of water required to achieve the desired consistency will vary with the source of PFA and PC, and it will usually be necessary to carry out a simple trial on the Site to determine the water/solids ratio.
5.5

GS 5.29 (1)

(2)

(3)

GS 5.30 (1) & (3) GS 5.33 (1)

GS 5.35 (1)

(2)

2006 Edition

SUBMISSIONS
GS 5.44 Particulars of Diversions of Flow The requirement of 14 days notice is to ensure adequate forward planning and to allow the Engineer to check thoroughly the effects of the proposed flow diversions before such works are carried out. On occasions, flow diversions may be found to be necessary as work proceeds and a shorter notice period may have to be accepted.

TRANSPORT HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

GS 5.45 (2) Transport, Handling and Storage of Pipes, Joints and Fittings The Engineer may permit the use of pipes and fittings that have been damaged during transport or storage, where the damage is of a minor nature and can be repaired satisfactorily. Prolonged exposure to direct sunlight will adversely affect the properties of uPVC pipes/fittings and rubber rings by making them brittle. If these materials are stored in the open, they should be covered to prevent direct exposure to sunlight. Storage of Pipes Before permission is given to stack pipes to a height greater than 2 m, the Contractor should be asked to demonstrate that the stack is stable and that the pipes will not be damaged.

(3) & (5)

GS 5.47 (3)

EXCAVATION
GS 5.52 (1) Excavation Details of utilities are seldom known accurately at the design stage. The alignments of pipelines and the locations of manholes etc., shown on the Drawings are usually approximate only. Before excavation starts, the Engineer should approve the setting out details, after agreeing details of any necessary diversions etc. with the utility companies. The structural design of underground pipes is normally based on narrow trench conditions. The method of measuring the effective trench width for different trench profiles is shown on the DSD Standard Drawings. Effective trench widths not exceeding the figures given in Table 5.9 of the GS will ensure narrow trench conditions.

(2)

5.6

2006 Edition

The Contractors proposals for wider trench widths should not be rejected without checking the structural strength of the pipes being used. Very often, proposals to use higher strength pipes to allow wider trenches are acceptable. A PS clause allowing for wide trench excavations should be added if it is considered that wide trench excavations are likely.

LAYING AND BEDDING PIPES

GS 5.53 (1) Laying Pipes A shorter period of notice may be necessary due to ground conditions, particularly where the trench bottom may be softened by water or where upheaving may occur. Whenever possible, the length of trench to be left open should be agreed with the Contractor before trench excavation is commenced. Factors to be considered are ground conditions, the trench support system, pipe lengths, traffic conditions and the effect on adjacent properties. If the gradient of the pipe is shallow, the requirement of this GS Clause should not be given priority over other practical problems of laying the pipe. If the gradient is steep, the practice stipulated will make pipelaying easier and will normally be preferred by the Contractor.

(6)

(7)

JOINTING PIPES
GS 5.57 (3) Flanged Joints The correct orientation of boltholes in flanges is important as this will affect the orientation of fittings, such as valves and specials, along the pipeline.

THRUST AND ANCHOR BLOCKS

GS 5.66 (1) Thrust and Anchor Blocks Grade 20 concrete is considered adequate for thrust and anchor blocks of mass concrete construction where the blocks distribute the force directly to the soil/rock in contact with the blocks. If blocks are supported on piles, as is required in soft ground with inadequate frictional resistance, the necessary amendments to this GS Clause may be made by a PS clause. The aggregates for the Grade 20 concrete shall be natural stone, crushed rock, crushed concrete, or recycled aggregates. The use of recycle aggregates, which is good for environmental sustainability, is permitted if it is proposed and agreed by the Engineer.

5.7

2006 Edition

(3)

This requirement may be relaxed if the stress on the blocks caused by the internal pressure is small.

BED, HAUNCH AND SURROUND

GS 5.67 (4) Granular Bed Over-compaction may damage the pipes already laid. For small diameter pipes, it will usually be impractical to carry out compaction by means other than manual methods. Concrete Bed, Haunch and Surround The grade of concrete and details of joints shown on the Drawings should be consistent with those specified in this GS Clause. The choice between polythene sheeting and blinding layer will depend on ground conditions and should normally be left to the Contractor. The location and extent of concrete surround should, as far as possible, be shown on the Drawings. If the use of recycle aggregates is proposed by the Contractor and agreed by the Engineer, this will help us achieve sustainability.

GS 5.68 (2) & (4)

(3)

(7)

(8)

TOLERANCES
GS 5.70 Tolerances: Pipelines for Drainage Works The specified tolerances are considered suitable for common application. In poor ground conditions, the specified tolerances on level will be difficult to achieve and relaxation may be necessary. If pipes are required to be laid by jacking or in heading, the tolerances on line and level may require amendment by way of PS clauses. The tolerances on termination pipes should be checked against the tolerances specified by others for subsequent connections. If tighter tolerances are required, these should be shown on the Drawings for each section of pipeline, and this clause is be supplemented by a PS clause.

5.8

2006 Edition

CONNECTIONS
GS 5.71 (2) Connections to Structures The use of two flexible joints adjacent to structures is to accommodate differential settlement or lateral movement between the structure and the pipe. The amount of movement that can be accommodated with joints positioned in accordance with Table 5.10 of the GS, is necessarily limited to the permissible angular deflection and straight-draw of the joints. If significant movement between the pipe and the structure is expected, the adequacy of this design option must be checked. If more precise figures for the joint locations are required, the designer should check the revised figures using the above principles.

MANHOLES, CHAMBERS, GULLIES AND CHANNELS

GS 5.73 (1) to (4) Manholes, Chambers and Gullies The grade of concrete and details shown on the Drawings should be consistent with those specified in this GS Clause. Precast concrete manhole units are normally supplied in several standard lengths. For each manhole, the combination of various types and lengths of units proposed by the Contractor should preferably be approved by the Engineer before the units are ordered.

INSTALLATION OF PENSTOCKS AND VALVES

GS 5.76 (1) Installation of Penstocks and Valves Before installation of penstocks, the line and level of the concrete structure, including the position of boxouts and rebates to which the penstocks are to be fixed, should be checked.

PIPES AND MANHOLES TO BE ABANDONED

GS 5.77 Pipes and Manholes to be Abandoned Pipes, manholes, chambers and gullies which are known to be existing and are required to be abandoned should be indicated on the Drawings and items provided in the BQ to deal with them. If disused pipes, manholes etc. are discovered during construction, the Engineer should give instructions as to the method of removal or filling, in accordance with this clause.

5.9

2006 Edition

CLEANING OF PIPELINES
GS 5.78 (1) Cleaning of Pipelines The method of cleaning will be determined by the diameter and length of the pipeline, and equipment available. The choice of method should be left to the Contractor, provided that a practical method is proposed which will achieve the required result. Please observe the new sub-clauses 5.7(3)(a) and (b) of the GS, 2006 Edition and the essential requirements of disposal of excavated material without causing pollution/ nuisance to the public.

TESTING: PIPES FOR DRAINAGE WORKS

GS 5.81 Batch: Pipes for Drainage Works GS Clause 1.38 is relevant to materials delivered to the Site over a period of time that may in some cases be treated as part of a batch. GS 5.82 Samples: Pipes for Drainage Works If testing is required, this will usually be carried out at the manufacturers plant in the presence of the Engineers Representative or an independent inspection agency. If the product is manufactured overseas and has been approved previously on similar jobs in Hong Kong, witnessing of testing may be waived and a test certificate from the manufacturer showing compliance with the relevant standard may be accepted. GS 5.83 Testing: Pipes for Drainage Works See guidance notes on GS Clauses 5.82 and 1.40.

TESTING: MANHOLE COVERS, GULLY GRATINGS AND KERB OVERFLOW WEIRS

GS 5.95 Testing: Covers, Gratings and Weirs These are simple tests and should normally be carried out on the Site with assistance provided by the Contractor.

5.10

2006 Edition

TESTING: WATERTIGHTNESS OF PENSTOCKS

GS 5.99 (1) Testing: Watertightness of Penstocks In general, all penstocks should be tested for watertightness, unless it is impractical to carry out such a test. The extent of testing should be stated in the PS. It is often very expensive to carry out watertightness testing on individual penstocks as considerable temporary works may be required to isolate each penstock. In such cases, testing of penstocks as a part of the overall commissioning programme of the plant should be considered.

TESTING: GRAVITY PIPELINES FOR DRAINAGE WORKS

GS 5.102 (2) & (3) Testing: Gravity Pipelines for Drainage Works The choice between the water test and the air test should normally be left to the Contractor. The air test is quicker and easier if pipe-sealing plugs of the right sizes are available, but it does not allow faults to be located readily. The length of pipeline that may be tested before haunching and backfilling (sub-clauses (2)(a) and (3)(a)) will be limited by the length of trench allowed to be left open under GS Clause 5.53(6). If it is necessary to backfill the trench immediately after the pipe is laid, Table 5.11 of the GS will need to be amended by way of a PS clause such that the water or air test under GS Clauses 5.102(2)(a) and 5.102(3)(a) is replaced by a simple smoke test. In such cases, compliance will rely on the water test or air test to be carried out after backfilling. It should be noted that this option will mean that any faults exposed in the final water test or air test will be much more difficult to locate or rectify. (4) In general, a branch pipeline of less than 10 m may be considered to be short. Whether a branch pipeline is to be tested separately is normally governed by the degree of difficulty in isolating the branch for testing. Compliance Criteria: Gravity Pipelines for Drainage Works During visual inspections, all joints should be examined for correct joint gap, signs of dislocated joint rings and any damage around the joint, in addition to a general examination of the integrity of the pipeline.

GS 5.103

5.11

2006 Edition

REPAIR OF PIPELINES AND CULVERTS BY INTERNAL LINING

GS 5.108 (1) General Reference may be made to Trenchless Technology Guidelines of the International Society for Trenchless Technology (ISTT) for guidance on linings with cured-in-place pipes (CIPP) and other types of linings. Linings other than cured-in-place pipes that may be suitable include spirally-wound liners and folded liners. Performance Tests on Internal Lining Material The following standards have identical text and are equivalent to each other:BS EN ISO 178: 2003 BS 2782: Part 10: Method 1005: 1977 BS 2782: Part 6: Method 630A: 1994 BS 2782: Part 6: Method 631A: 1993 equivalent to equivalent to equivalent to equivalent to ISO 178: 2001 EN 63: 1977 ISO 4593: 1993 ISO 4591: 1992

GS 5.113 (2)

APPENDIX 5.4 TESTS ON GRAVITY PIPELINES FOR DRAINAGE WORKS

GS 5.4.7 Procedure: Infiltration Test In accordance with BS 8005:Part 1, there is no explicit figure for determining the acceptance criteria for infiltration tests. Normally, pipelines may be considered to be acceptable if the infiltration does not exceed 1 litre per hour per metre diameter per metre of pipe run. However, the final acceptance should depend on the judgement of the Engineer and the extent of exfiltration shown by the water test. To assist in examining the extent of infiltration during the infiltration test, the use of CCTV or a manual inspection of the pipes may be necessary.

5.12

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 6 EARTHWORKS

6.1

2006 Edition

6.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 6 EARTHWORKS
NOTE
Experience has shown that almost all earthwork materials and many artificial hard materials may be utilized for, or left in place as part of, civil engineering earthworks construction if the need arises. However, some materials may require processing or treatment before they can be used, which may make their use uneconomical. The primary aim of earthwork design should generally be to minimize the quantity of materials to be imported and/or disposed of, both for economic and environmental reasons. The materials that will arise from excavation within the Site should be matched to their potential use in the Works, in order to estimate the quantities of imported materials likely to be required. However, the Contractor should generally be left with the choice of where to use the materials arising from the Site, and also where to use the imported fill material. Therefore, the Contract should not indicate from where on the Site fill materials are to be obtained for the various areas of fill, unless there are sound technical reasons to use specific materials in specific areas.

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
GS 6.04 Earthworks Final Surface It should be noted that: (a) If a pavement, structure or utility is to be constructed on the earthworks final surface, then the formation and the earthworks final surface will coincide. (b) If a structure or utility is constructed below the earthworks final surface and a pavement or another structure or utility constructed above it, then there may be two or more formations at the same plan location. GS 6.07 Formation See guidance notes on GS Clause 6.04. GS 6.08 Intermediate Areas of Fill The location of intermediate areas of fill should be shown on the Drawings if it is intended that the relaxation of deposition and compaction requirements for this type of area is to be permitted.

6.3

2006 Edition

MATERIALS
GS 6.09 (1) Fill Material Fill material may include processed material or inert construction and demolition material. This is intended to include either natural soils and rock, inert construction and demolition material or artificial hard material such as concrete, which have been broken down, dried out or wetted, or have been mixed, graded or otherwise treated to put them in a condition to be used as fill material of the type required. However, such treatments are likely to be expensive for the Contractor to carry out, and although included in general terms in the item coverage for excavation in the Bills of Quantities, deposition and compaction, they may nevertheless lead to considerable contractual disputes if the requirement for such work cannot be readily anticipated at the time of tender. Therefore, it is advisable to include in the Contract as much information as possible on specific requirements. Recycled rock fill material is recycled from broken concrete and rock pieces of the construction and demolition material. It is currently being produced at the crushing plant of the Tseung Kwan O Fill Bank. Please refer to the CEDD website (http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/services/recycling/index.htm) for further information.
Amd 3/2009

(3) to (10)

The specified requirements for fill material are intended to provide a selection of material types that are suitable for the majority of projects. These requirements and grading may be amended as necessary for particular projects. However, if the requirements are made more onerous (particularly for general fill material), care should be taken that this does not result in a situation whereby large quantities of material are unnecessarily classified as unacceptable for use in the Works, resulting in the need to dispose of, and import, large quantities of material at what is likely to be significant additional cost. The Specification requires (i.e. permits) the use of general fill material in all locations where there are no particular requirements. Therefore, it is necessary to indicate on the Drawings both the plan location and start/finish levels of all areas of fill, or parts of areas, where other types of fill materials are required. This includes requirements for such items as capping layers and special types of fill such as PFA. If the design of utilities or structures depends on an assumption of the size of excavation and type of backfilling to be used, these should also be shown on the Drawings. The requirements for rock fill material are partially subjective, and the Engineer should exercise as much flexibility as possible to ensure that rock and other types of hard material such as concrete arising from areas within the Site are not unnecessarily excluded from use in the Works. The main criterion should be whether they are acceptable for the purpose for which they are required, bearing in mind that if they are not used, it is likely that significant additional cost be incurred in disposing of the surplus materials off site and importing replacement materials.

6.4

2006 Edition

GENERAL EARTHWORKS REQUIREMENTS

GS 6.12 Ownership of Earthworks Material The Employer has no further right to the material that needs to be disposed of by the Contractor once the material has been removed from the Site, and hence, in effect, the Contractor may sell or otherwise dispose of the material in any way that he chooses. Also, the Engineer no longer has any contractual control over such material once it leaves the Site. Therefore, specific provision should be made in the Contract for the material which cannot be used in the Works (but which may be usable and needed on another project) or for surplus material which the Employer requires elsewhere. Otherwise GS Clause 6.19 will automatically make such material the property of the Contractor. GS Clauses 6.18 and 6.20 allow the Engineer to control the use of all material which is required for the Works, but the Engineer should guard against instructing or requiring the Contractor to remove (or dispose of) such material, even temporarily, and should only permit its removal on the Contractors request, and with adequate assurance that it will be returned or replaced. Replacement with an equivalent material implies that the material meets the requirements for the type of fill material removed, and has those properties that are at least as suitable. GS 6.13 Temporary Works for Earthworks Guidance on acceptable standards for the design of Temporary Works associated with earthworks can be found in the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes (Ref. http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/manuals/manu_em1.htm). GS 6.16 Earthworks Material Allowed to Become Unsuitable or to Deteriorate In general this will apply to material that has been allowed to become too wet, and so the material may be replaced, spread and allowed to dry, or perhaps mixed with drier material. GS 6.17 Additional Excavation and Stabilization This refers to what is generally called the removal of soft spots below areas of fill and on slopes or below formations in cutting. Typical methods of reinstatement are given on which the Contractor can base rates for normal circumstances, but it may be necessary to expand this GS Clause by means of a PS Clause if particular types or large quantities of soft spot are expected to exist. GS 6.18 Removal of Earthworks Material See guidance notes on GS Clause 6.12.

6.5

2006 Edition

EXCAVATION
GS 6.19 Disposal of Excavated Material See guidance notes on GS Clause 6.12. GS 6.20 Use of Excavated Material See guidance notes on GS Clause 6.12. GS 6.21 (2) Obstructions in Excavations Dealt with in this case can mean either removed, and the resulting cavity filled, or cut off flush with the earthworks final surface, as appropriate. The purpose of doing this expeditiously is to avoid the possibility that boulders may fall, and to avoid erosion of softer soil around and below the boulder in the case of heavy rain. If neither of these factors is a problem, the Engineer may permit the boulder to be left until later. Excavations for Structures, Pits and Trenches In considering whether the sides of excavations may be battered, the Engineer should take into account factors such as the type of pit or trench condition for which the utility or structure was designed, and the possible effects of differential settlement if the cavity is not properly backfilled. Permission to batter should be given at the Contractors risk and expense, if requested, and if it is not likely to be detrimental to the permanent works. The length of trench opening that can be permitted will depend on the likelihood of heavy rain, and the location of the trench (see GS Clause 6.15(2) and the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes, Sections 9.4.6 and 9.4.7). The requirement to maintain at least 1 m of cover above the top of the utility only applies where the utility may be damaged by the passage of vehicles etc. if it has inadequate cover, and may be relaxed if the utility is unlikely to suffer that type of damage.

GS 6.24 (1) & (2)

(3)

BLASTING TRIALS
GS 6.25 to GS 6.29 Blasting Trials Changes in Blasting Procedure The use of explosives for blasting is a specialist topic, and those unfamiliar with the subject should consult the Chief Geotechnical Engineer/Mines, Geotechnical Engineering Office.

6.6

2006 Edition

BLASTING
GS 6.30 to GS 6.37 Statutory Requirement for Blasting Controlled Blasting See guidance notes on GS Clauses 6.25 to 6.29.

DEPOSITION OF FILL MATERIAL

GS 6.38 Types of Fill Material See guidance notes on GS Clause 6.09. GS 6.39 Sources of Fill Material See guidance notes on GS Clause 6.09. GS 6.40 Surface Preparation for Fill Material This GS Clause indicates general requirements for surface preparation for fill material, but it is essential that additional information be given in the Contract where there are any substantial soft spots, watercourses, etc. Details of the requirements for benches, sub-soil drains, geotextiles and filling of voids should also be shown on the Drawings. GS 6.41 Commencement of Deposition of Fill Material Permission to start filling should be given by the Engineer when the condition in GS Clause 6.42 is satisfied, and the Engineer is satisfied that all surface preparation has been completed, soft spots etc. have been filled or treated, and all necessary measurement records have been taken. GS 6.43 Deposition of Fill Material There are no specific requirements for filling trials. These can be added if it is considered desirable, but it should be borne in mind that the specification is essentially used for the end-product rather than the method of deposition and compaction, and that in any event, there is nothing to prevent the Engineer from observing the Contractors proposed method over the first one or two layers, comparing this with the compaction results achieved, and judging the effectiveness of the Contractors method accordingly, without the need for a formal trial.

6.7

2006 Edition

GS 6.45 (1)

Deposition of Fill Material Adjacent to Structures and Utilities The type of fill material to be used behind retaining walls should be shown on the Drawings. Generally, this should be special fill material as defined in Table 6.1 of the GS. For reinforced fill structures, refer to Geospec 2 - Model Specification for Reinforced Fill Structures. Fine fill material should only be used if the wall is massive.

COMPACTION OF FILL MATERIAL

GS 6.48 Compaction of Fill Material In general, the Engineer should not give permission for a layer of fill material to be placed until the previous layer has been tested and found to be satisfactory. However, this may need to be reviewed if the Contractor claims that the time taken for obtaining test results is causing unacceptable delay to progress, and if experience has shown that previous test results are generally satisfactory. It should be noted that in accordance with GS Clause 6.81(5), there is more than one method of determining in-situ dry density. The requirement for a relative compaction of 95% should be reviewed in the light of the advice given in the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes and Geoguide 1 - Guide to Retaining Wall Design, and, if appropriate, amended on the Drawings and in the PS. Lower standards of fill material and/or compaction may be acceptable in flat or gently sloping landscape areas, and where areas of fill have a considerable time to settle before subsequent construction will start, in which case details should be included on the Drawings and in the PS. If surcharging is required to increase the rate of consolidation of an area of the fill or underlying ground, the depth of surcharge and the length of time for which it is required should be specified in the Contract.

INTERMEDIATE AREAS OF FILL

GS 6.56 & GS 6.57 Deposition of Fill Material in Intermediate Areas of Fill Compaction of Fill Material in Intermediate Areas of Fill See guidance notes on GS Clause 6.08.

6.8

2006 Edition

EARTHWORKS IN PUBLIC FILLING AREA

GS 6.58 Public filling area Apart from the general requirements stipulated in GS clauses 6.60 to 6.67, other specific or prevailing requirements for the operation of a public filling area, including the requirements from the Secretary of the Public Fill Committee, should be specified by means of a PS clause.

TOLERANCES
GS 6.68 Tolerances: Earthworks Final Surfaces and Formations Tolerances are provided to a large extent for measurement purposes. This means that if the works are carried out within these limits, then the works will be measured as having been carried out to the lines and levels shown on the Drawings. The tolerances can be amended if it is considered appropriate, and reasonable relaxation should be allowed in cases where it will not be detrimental to the function or appearance of the finished works.

6.9

2006 Edition

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 7 GEOTECHNICAL WORK

7.1

2006 Edition

7.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 7 GEOTECHNICAL WORKS

PART 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GENERAL
GS 7.01 General Requirements If the Contractors plant and/or operating procedure are different from those specified, the relevant particulars should be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 28 days prior to their usage (please also refer to GS Clause 7.162). GS 7.06 Prestressed Ground Anchors Refer to Geospec 1 Model Specification for Prestressed Ground Anchors for relevant requirements, which should be included in the PS. GS 7.07 Reinforced Fill Structures Refer to Geospec 2 Model Specification for Reinforced Fill Structures for relevant requirements, which should be included in the PS.

TRIALS
GS 7.08 Trials for Geotechnical Works A PS clause should be included listing out in detail any trials that need to be carried out for geotechnical works.

7.3

2006 Edition

PART 2: GROUND INVESTIGATION NOTE

This set of specifications intends to cover the usual items of ground investigation works involved during construction. As a result, methods or test not usually used or requiring supervision and interpretation by experts, are not included. For guidance on Site Investigation and on Soil and Rock Descriptions, reference should be made to Geoguides 2 and 3 respectively.

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
(A qualification is added under Glossary of Terms to confine the meanings of the terms defined in GS Clauses 7.09 to 7.28 to GS Clauses 7.29 to 7.83 only; otherwise these meanings would also apply to other GS Clauses according to GS Clause 1.03.) GS 7.10 Bulk Sample Adequate quantities of soil should be specified in the PS for the intended laboratory testing. Reference may be made to BS 1377 for guidance on the minimum mass of sample required. GS 7.11 Inspection Pit Inspection pits are for the Engineer to obtain information of existing underground utilities and structures. Trial holes excavated by the Contractor under GS Clause 1.25 are the Contractors responsibility. GS 7.23 to GS 7.26 Definition of Rock, Boulders, Cobbles and Gravel The definition of Rock, Boulders, Cobbles and Gravel has been amended to follow the Glossary of Geoguide 3 Guide to Rock and Soil Descriptions. This amendment has been accepted by CGE/GP of CEDD.

DRILLING FOR GROUND INVESTIGATION

GS 7.43 (b) Drilling Rigs for Ground Investigation The drill-string rotation speed depends on the gear ratio being used. Most drill rigs are provided with 4 gear ratios. The faster speeds associated with the third and fourth gears are usually used for advancing casing and coring rock. The speed should be reduced if the rig starts to vibrate or the pressure on the drilling bit is reduced. The second gear should be used for retractable triple-tube core sampling (GS Clause 7.60) or soil coring.

7.4

2006 Edition

GS 7.44 (1)

Drilling Equipment for Ground Investigation Core barrels are used to recover samples. For rock, this may be in the form of single-tube, double-tube or triple-tube core barrels, in decreasing order of disturbance to the recovered sample including any joint infill material. The single-tube core barrel requires less power for penetration and should only be used where access problems necessitate the use of small rigs. The double-tube core barrel gives a good balance between sample quality, sample size and penetration rate. It should be used in all cases except for very fractured rock. The triple-tube core barrel gives fewer disturbances to samples but is slower in penetration rate and gives smaller cores. The use of a triple-tube core barrel should be supervised by experienced personnel. Retractable triple-tube core barrels are normally used to recover granular samples of decomposed rock. There are two main types of drill bits in use in Hong Kong. Tungsten carbide bits are used on casing shoes and may also be used for drilling and recovering samples on certain weak rock types. Impregnated diamond bits are used with rock core barrels.

(2)

For sizes of commonly used core barrels, casings and drill rods, refer to Table 5 of Geoguide 2. Drilling for Ground Investigation With the usual 35 HP drilling machines, soft materials and boulders can be penetrated to depths of at least 40 metres with 150 mm ID casing. Drilling in rock in P size can be carried out to depths of at least 25 metres. Drilling in rock in H size can be carried out to depths of at least 40 metres. Drilling in rock in N size can be carried out to depths of at least 100 metres. The range of penetration can be extended by the method of telescoping casings, i.e. drill and case the upper part of a hole to a larger diameter to reduce the ground friction on the advancing casing.

GS 7.45

SAMPLING FOR GROUND INVESTIGATION

GS 7.53 Supply of Equipment and Containers Refer to Tables 8 and 9 of Geoguide 2 for the expected sample quality and use from the different sampling procedures.

7.5

2006 Edition

IN-SITU TESTING
GS 7.69 Dynamic Probe Tests The blow counts have to be multiplied by the depth correction factor (Fp) given below to obtain the blow counts corrected against depth effects: Depth Range (m) 0.00 - 0.80 0.80 - 1.80 1.80 - 2.80 2.80 - 3.80 3.80 - 4.80 4.80 - 5.80 5.80 - 6.80 6.80 - 7.80 7.80 - 8.80 8.80 - 9.80 Fp 1.00 0.95 0.89 0.84 0.79 0.75 0.71 0.68 0.66 0.63 Depth Range (m) 9.80 - 10.80 10.80 - 11.80 11.80 - 12.80 12.80 - 13.80 13.80 - 14.80 14.80 - 15.80 15.80 - 16.80 16.80 - 17.80 17.80 - 18.80 18.80 - 19.80 Fp 0.60 0.58 0.55 0.53 0.52 0.50 0.48 0.46 0.45 0.44

GS 7.71

In-situ Density Tests The nuclear densometer method stated in GS Clause 6.81(5)(b), if properly used, has proven to be a reliable and faster alternative to the sand replacement method.

GS 7.72 (1)

Falling or Rising Head Permeability Tests Rising and falling head permeability tests must be carried out with the tested section below the groundwater table. Constant Head Permeability Tests The constant head permeability test can be carried out above the groundwater table. However, the value will reflect the infiltration capacity of the sub-surface materials rather than their permeability.

GS 7.74 (1)

7.6

2006 Edition

PART 3: SLOPE TREATMENT WORKS MATERIALS

GS 7.86 (1) Soil-cement This GS Clause covers soil-cement for filling small voids, depressions and topping layers (< 500 mm thickness) for vegetation on slopes. Where soil-cement fill forms a significant part of the slope works, the Engineer should include specifications to require testing to verify that the soil-cement fill will have the strength required. Otherwise, each layer of soil-cement should be compacted to a thickness not exceeding 300 mm by a method approved by the Engineer. If the slope is to be hydroseeded, proportions of 1:3:40 by mass should be used in order not to impede vegetation growth. Reinforcement for Sprayed Concrete Steel reinforcement is to be employed in situations where sprayed concrete is required to withstand structural or temperature effects. It should be noted that twisted or deformed bars, expanded metal meshes, and heavy concentrations of chicken wire mesh, tend to produce rebound problems. GS 7.90 (1) Rock Bolts Rock bolts include the bolt itself, and accessories such as nuts, washers, bearing plates, rock bolt sleeves and couplers. Rock bolts are generally used to restrain potentially unstable blocks of rocks, or in conjunction with concrete buttresses and pads for areas of fractured rock. They are normally of shorter lengths than rock anchors. Refer to CEDD Standard Drawings for details.

GS 7.88

(2)

The Engineer should, if possible, specify on the Drawings the minimum working loads of the bolts, bolt lengths and inclinations. However, for rock slopes that are to be designed on the Site during the Works, the Engineer will have to make a provisional allowance in the BQ for the likely number, type and length of bolts that may be required. Rock Dowels Dowels are normally used to reinforce jointed rock masses with a protruding section for anchoring buttresses and for suspension of permanent netting or reinforcement. Refer to CEDD Standard Drawings for details.

GS 7.92

7.7

2006 Edition

GS 7.96

Grout for Soil Nails Dependent on the cement brand and admixture used, the acceptable water-cement ratio for cement grout normally ranges from 0.38 to 0.42 with Flow Cone Test results falling within the range of 15 to 30 seconds.

SUBMISSIONS
GS 7.101 (1) Particulars of Sprayed Concrete Only qualified shotcretors should be employed for the sprayed-concrete operation. The Contractor should, therefore, submit the names and details of experience of each qualified shotcretor for approval by the Engineer under the provisions of GCC Clause 18. Soil Nails For soil nails installed into poor quality ground where there is a likelihood that collapse of hole may take place, the details and method to overcome such ground conditions should also be included in the submission. Packers used for sealing of soil nail holes are normally made from foam wrapped around the steel bar. However, this may not form an effective seal and other forms such as mechanical plugs, which can be screwed tight against the face of the drillhole, may need to be used.

GS 7.104 (1)

(a)

PRELIMINARY WORK
GS 7.107 (1) Access to Slopes When a large component of slope works involves the erection, dismantling and re-erection of inspection scaffolding, the Engineer should ensure that the Contractor has made adequate allowance for the scaffolding work in his programme. Protection Fences and Barriers The Engineer should make reference to Section 4 of the GS - Fencing, when assessing the Contractors proposals for the erection of protection fences and barriers. Their locations and extent should be shown on the Drawings, and reference made to the CEDD Standard Drawings for construction details. If there is no separate BQ item for this type of fencing, ensure that it is covered by the item coverage for the slope treatment works.

GS 7.108 (1)

7.8

2006 Edition

GS 7.109 (1)

Preparation for Slope Treatment Works It may be necessary to take effective temporary measures to guard against rainfall damage to the slope surface, depending on the season of the year during which the works are being carried out. Refer to Chapter 9 of the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes for further guidance.

ROCK SLOPE TREATMENT WORKS

GS 7.113 Sealing and Infilling of Rock Joints The extent and depth of the soft materials in rock joints to be excavated prior to sealing and infilling should be as instructed by the Engineer on the Site. The type of material to be used for sealing and infilling should be shown on the Drawings.

SPRAYED CONCRETE
GS 7.117 Trial Panel If different trial panels are required for different inclinations of the slope surface to be sprayed in order to check the percentage of rebound for the calculation of the cement content of the applied concrete, then the required number of trial panels should be stated in the PS and reflected in the BQ. Rebound consists of aggregate which does not adhere to the backform, the reinforcement or the sprayed concrete layer itself, but which bounces back out of the placing area. The initial proportion of rebound is high and so thick sections have a lower rebound percentage than thin sections. The percentage of rebound in any situation depends on the efficiency of hydration, the water:cement ratio, the mix grading, the nozzle velocity, the angle and distance of impact, the thickness of application and the nature of the surface being sprayed. Typical rebound percentages are as follow: (a) Horizontal: (b) Sloping: (c) Overhead: GS 7.118 (2) 5 - 15% 15 - 30% 25 - 50%

Preparation of Slope Surfaces A high temperature and dry soil at the surface to be treated with sprayed concrete will affect the quality of the sprayed concrete. The Contractor should measure the surface temperature and moisture content and submit the results to the Engineer before application of sprayed concrete. Otherwise, the Contractor should spray water onto the slope surface not more than 1 hour before the sprayed-concrete operation.
7.9

2006 Edition

GS 7.123

Curing Sprayed Concrete Curing of structural sprayed concrete (compressive strength at 28 days 30 MPa), is vital, particularly in windy and dry conditions. Keeping the concrete wet by spraying with or ponding of water is still the most effective curing method and should be used wherever possible. It is extremely important that the concrete be kept constantly wet for the required period, and that wetting is started as soon as the shutters are removed from formed surfaces. However, for non-structural sprayed concrete (compressive strength at 28 days 20 MPa) on sloping ground where continuous wetting by spraying with or ponding of water may not be practical, curing of sprayed concrete by periodically wetting should be performed. The wetting should be started as soon as possible.

PROTECTIVE MESH FOR SLOPES

GS 7.126 Fixing Protective Mesh for Slopes Protective mesh may also be fixed in accordance with the details shown on the CEDD Standard Drawings.

ROCK BOLTS
GS7.127 Trials for Rock Bolts The location of pull-out trials should be determined by the Engineer on the Site, with a view to ensuring that representative anchorage zones are tested. GS 7.128 (3) Drilling, Preparing and Testing Rock Bolt Holes Packer tests may not be necessary for a small number of installations, but for large numbers installed in highly fractured rock, the Engineer may specify Packer tests. If specified, an additional item coverage should be added to the preamble to the SMM for rock bolts to cover the cost of carrying out the tests, and of pre-grouting and re-drilling.

7.10

2006 Edition

SOIL NAILS
GS 7.136 (1) Drilling for Soil Nails In order to avoid causing nuisance to the environment, it is important that appropriate measures are implemented to minimize the spread of dust during drilling. Where it is considered likely that bedrock or boulders may be encountered, water sprays and dust traps at the mouth of the drillholes should be provided. Drilling works on working platforms that may be visible to nearby residents should be shielded from view by tarpaulin sheets. Adequate noise reduction measures such as designed noise barriers should also be incorporated when drilling in areas with very sensitive receivers. Where soil nails are to be installed through loose material or there is a high chance that the ground may induce excessive grout loss, the designer should specify casings to be installed within the loose material. In such cases, permanent metal casings should be used which should not be withdrawn during grouting of the hole. Where such casing is specified, the Engineer should ensure that the internal diameter of the casing is not less than the specified diameter of the soil nail. If necessary, the drillhole will need to be reamed by using an ODEX-type drilling method or similar methods to allow insertion of the casing into the hole. Where close spacing and long nails are specified, more care should be taken to ensure that the orientation in both the vertical and horizontal planes are as close as possible to that specified in order to minimize the risk of clashing of nails at depth. For drilling long soil nails, the drill rate should be suitably reduced to minimize the eccentricity produced by the dip of the drill rods, which may unduly enlarge the diameter of the drillhole and cause hole collapse. GS 7.137 (1) Installation and Grouting for Soil Nails Dependent on the size of the soil nail bars, the spacing of the centralizers for supporting the steel bar is generally between 1m and 1.5 m. During insertion of the steel bar, the bar should not be pushed completely into the bottom of the hole. At least 50 mm clearance should be maintained between the end of the bar and the bottom of the drilled hole. Refer to the CEDD Standard Drawings for details. If obstructions are encountered during insertion of steel bar into the drillhole, the bar should be withdrawn, the obstruction removed and the bar reinserted. (7) Where high groundwater level is encountered, the grouting operation should not be carried out until the water level has dropped to an acceptable level. If the level of groundwater persists, raking drains or other form of dewatering will need to be implemented prior to insertion and grouting of the soil nail. The effects of any dewatering should be duly assessed and mitigation measures taken as appropriate. Cases of excessive grout loss should be promptly reported to the designer for a review of the assumed geological model and for determination of any changes to the design required.
7.11

(4)

(5)

(10)

2006 Edition

GS 7.138

Pull-out Tests for Soil Nails In general, the number of pull-out tests to be carried out should be in the region of 2% of the total number of soil nails specified but this can be reduced for slopes with a large number of nails. During drilling, information such as the drill rate, type of material encountered, the presence of groundwater etc. should be collected for the designer to infer the actual ground conditions.

(a)

When setting up the pull-out test apparatus, the steel bearing plate to be used for the test should not be allowed to bear down onto the steel bar as this will deflect the bar thereby giving incorrect readings during the test. Grouting for pull-out tests should be carried out slowly and carefully to prevent over-grouting. During grouting, air can be blown manually through the return pipe as a means to monitor the grout take. Soil-nail Head In general, the first-stage sprayed concrete should be applied to approximately 25mm above the bottom of the steel plate. The bearing plate should then be hammered into place and the nut tightened onto the steel bar before application of the second stage of sprayed concrete. It may be prudent to uncover a small percentage (generally up to 3% with a maximum of 3) of the soil nail heads cast on the same day at any site as a quality check. If inferior workmanship is identified in the uncovered soil-nail heads, the Engineer should take appropriate actions against the Contractor in accordance with the Contract. This would normally take the form of a detailed investigation undertaken by the Contractor on the batch of nail heads constructed on that day and proposals for remedial actions if defective works are uncovered.

(b)

GS 7.139 (4)

(6)

TESTING: OPTIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT AND MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY OF SOIL-CEMENT FILL
GS 7.146 Compliance Criteria: Concrete Cores from Sprayed Concrete It is noted that sample preparation for the core testing in accordance with Construction Standard 1:1990 (CS1) normally takes 6 days. Hence, it is advised to carry out coring of sprayed concrete at least 1 week before the 28th day of concreting.

7.12

2006 Edition

TESTING: PACKER TESTS ON DRILLHOLES FOR ROCK BOLTS

GS 7.148 Testing: Packer Test See guidance notes on GS Clause 7.128(3).

TESTING: ROCK BOLTS

GS 7.152 Compliance Criteria: Rock Bolts For other tests, such as suitability tests prior to approving the rock bolts which require the rock bolts to be test loaded to twice the working load, or other acceptance criteria, such as the use of residual loads as an acceptance criterion, the requirement should be stated in the PS.

7.13

2006 Edition

PART 4: GROUTING FOR GEOTECHNICAL WORKS GLOSSARY OF TERMS

GS 7.156 Grouting The purpose and extent of the required grouting should be shown on the Drawings. Preliminary site investigation results should be provided to the Contractor for information.

MATERIALS
GS 7.160 Grout for Geotechnical Works Grout consisting of water and PC only is acceptable provided the designed grout will satisfy the requirements of GS Clause 7.160(4), (5) & (6). GS 7.161 Standpipes Metal pipes are preferred for pressure grouting. GS 7.162 (1)(e) Particulars of Grouting for Geotechnical Works The method statement should include the Contractors testing methods in accordance with the Contract. Trials for Grouting Details of grouting trials and testing required should be specified by the Engineer. For rock grouting, Packer tests are normally carried out before and after grouting, either in grout holes or additional holes drilled for the purpose. For grouting of soils, continuous sampling of the grouted zone is preferable to allow visual inspection of the grouted zone. Once a trial mix has been successfully carried out, the Contractor should not be allowed to make any change without prior approval and subject to any further successful tests. The Contractor should be instructed to clearly display the mix proportion on or near the grout mixer for workers reference during grouting. It should be borne in mind that wide variations in ambient temperature will affect the acceptability of grout and further grout mix tests should be instructed when such temperature changes occur.

GS 7.163

7.14

2006 Edition

DRILLING FOR GROUTING FOR GEOTECHNICAL WORKS

GS 7.164 (1) Drilling for Grouting for Geotechnical Works Percussion drilling can lead to certain rock types forming thick drill cuttings, which can block fine openings in the rock and prevent effective grouting. Effective cleaning of drillholes is necessary.

GROUTING FOR GEOTECHNICAL WORKS

GS 7.167 (6) Grouting Equipment It is good practice to ensure that the pressure gauge used adequately covers the likely pressure range to be used in grouting. Gauges that cover too large a range, such that the normal grouting pressures are recorded only on the bottom of the gauge scale, should be avoided. Mixing Grout Grout for geotechnical works may also be mixed by weight. The mix proportions should be adjusted according to the results of site trials. The grout should normally have a water:cement ratio not exceeding 0.45. Pressure Grouting The grouting stages and pressures should be specified in the PS and/or on the Drawings.

GS 7.168 (1)

GS 7.169 (4)

TESTING: GROUT - BLEEDING

GS 7.175 (1) Testing: Bleeding of Grout Owing to the long duration of the Bleeding Test, the Contractor may wish to commence the grouting operation before the Bleeding Test is fully completed. He may do so at his own risk. Bleeding test according to ASTM C940-98a is a test standard under laboratory conditions, e.g. test in ambient temperature at 23.02C with a thermometer accurate to 0.5C, use of 1000 ml and 25 ml glass graduate. Flexibility taking due consideration of actual site conditions should be given for tests carried out on site, such as allowing the tests to be performed in a sheltered or indoor condition and use of plastic beaker (100 mm diameter, 1000 ml) and plastic 25 ml syringe.

(2)

7.15

2006 Edition

TESTING: GROUT - FLOW CONE EFFLUX TIME

GS 7.178 Testing: Flow Cone Efflux Time of Grout During the course of grouting, random Flow Cone tests should also be carried out to ensure the consistency of the grout used. A significant change in the results of the Flow Cone could indicate poor control in batching of the materials.

TESTING: GROUT - CRUSHING STRENGTH

GS 7.181 Testing: Crushing Strength of Grout Grout cubes for strength tests should also be taken during the grouting operation on randomly selected batches of grout.

TESTING: PACKER TESTS ON DRILLHOLES FOR GROUTING AND GROUTED DRILLHOLES

GS 7.183 (8) Testing: Packer Tests See Section 21.5.6 of Geoguide 2 for the interpretation of Packer test results. Generally, a value of < 5 Lugeons is the requirement for successful grouting for cut-off design.

7.16

2006 Edition

PART 5: GROUNDWATER DRAINAGE AND CONTROL GLOSSARY OF TERMS

GS 7.191 Prefabricated Band Drain The Contractor and the Engineer may agree on a proprietary brand of drain, which fits the requirements for the particular type of soil and has been used successfully on similar projects. Nevertheless, after this proprietary brand has been agreed, an alternative brand may still be allowed subject to the approval of the Engineer. The grid pattern, spacing and approximate depths will also normally be specified on the Drawings. The GEO has carried out some studies on the performance of various band drains and it would be useful to make reference to GEO Report No. SPR 2/91 entitled Review of Band Drains. GS 7.192 Raking Drain Raking drains are normally installed at an upward inclination of between 5 and 10 to the horizontal. The maximum length of raking drains is normally 50 m. GS7.193 Relief Drain Relief drains are installed over rock joints or cavities behind large areas of concrete and masonry where water seepage persists. GS 7.195 Granular Filter Material During the course of grouting, random Flow Cone tests should also be carried out to ensure the consistency of the grout used. A significant change in the results of the Flow Cone could indicate poor control in batching of the materials. Please note that the particle size distribution should be specified in the PS and/or on the Drawings. GS 7.196 Geotextile Filter The Contractor and the Engineer may agree on a proprietary brand of fabric as shown on the Drawings, which fits the requirements for the particular type of soil and has been used successfully on similar projects. Nevertheless, after this proprietary brand has been agreed, an alternative brand may still be allowed subject to the approval of the Engineer. The alternative methodology is to specify a set of design criteria that must be satisfied by the Contractors proposal, but for filtering purposes, the former is adequate.

7.17

2006 Edition

GS 7.197 (3)

Filter Pipes Where perforated drains are provided within a filter material, the filter should be large enough not to enter the perforations. Reference can be made to the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes (2nd Edition) and GEO Publication No. 1/93 Review of Granular and Geotextile Filters, for some suggested criteria for the grading of filter in relation to pipe openings. The ends of the pipes should be sealed to prevent the filter from entering into the pipes. For perforated pipes to be surrounded with filter fabric, the pipes should be perforated with holes not less than 3 mm or greater than 10 mm in diameter, or with slots not less than 0.6 mm or greater than 3 mm in width. The ratio of slot length to the width should be between 3 and 10. Where the pipe diameter is less than 100 mm, the area of openings should preferably be more than 1000 mm2 per metre run, and where the pipe diameter is equal to or larger than 100 mm, the area of openings should preferably be more than 1500 mm2 per metre run.

GS 7.198 (1)

Raking Drains Type O unlined drains should be used only in jointed rock where the risk of holecollapse and excessive loss of fines is unlikely to occur. There are a number of proprietary brands available in the market, which have been approved and used successfully on local projects as filter pipes for raking drains. However, according to para. 6.3.1 (i) Specification in Terms of Performance in Chapter 5 of the Project Administration Handbook, it is not appropriate to refer to a particular trade name/patent/origin in the PS. Couplers for filter pipes should also have a non-perforated invert and should be tightly fitted to the pipes to prevent leakage.

(5)

(7)

Geotextile filter sheaths should be robust enough to prevent tearing. There are a number of proprietary brands available in the market, which have been approved and used successfully on local projects as geotextile filter sheaths. However, according to para. 6.3.1 (i) Specification in Terms of Performance in Chapter 5 of the Project Administration Handbook, it is not appropriate to refer to a particular trade name/patent/origin in the PS. Also please refer to the CEDD Standard Drawings for details.

GS 7.199

Relief Drains There are a number of proprietary brands available in the markets, which have been approved as synthetic drain material on local projects as relief drains. However, according to para. 6.3.1 (i) Specification in Terms of Performance in Chapter 5 of the Project Administration Handbook, it is not appropriate to refer to a particular trade name/patent/origin in the PS. Also please refer to the CEDD Standard Drawings for details.

7.18

2006 Edition

GS 7.200 (2)

Fill Material for Trench Drains The Engineer should carry out the particle size distribution (PSD) test to determine the percentage passing the 425 m sieve before deciding whether the plastic limit (PL) test is required or not. It is not considered meaningful to test the PL for a sub-base with less than about 10% by mass of particles smaller than 600 m, as such a small amount of fines is unlikely to influence the mass behaviour of the soil. Hence, all Type B and some Type A materials (as specified in Table 7.2 of the GS) need not be tested to check for compliance with this GS Clause (i.e. whether the material is non-plastic). Prefabricated Band Drains For design purposes, most band drains of 100 mm width are assumed to have a nominal diameter of 50 mm to 60 mm on which calculations of spacing are based. The Manufacturers advice and design manuals should be referred to where appropriate.

GS 7.202 (1)

SUBMISSIONS
GS 7.204 (1)(f) Particulars of Geotextile Filter This GS Clause is to emphasize to the Contractor that he must propose an adequate supply to cover the whole of the Works requirements. Particulars of Raking Drains During the installation of raking drains, care should be taken to ensure that pipes and geotextile filter are not damaged. The method of installing raking drains should be submitted to the Engineer for agreement. Samples of Materials The Engineer should state the details of the size and the purpose of the samples required in the PS.

GS 7.206 (1)

GS 7.212

GEOTEXTILE FILTER
GS 7.219 Damage to Geotextile Filter Some data on deterioration due to outdoor exposure (in Hong Kong) of selected geotextiles and guidance on construction practice to minimize damage due to exposure can be found in Brand & Pang (1991) Durability of geotextiles to outdoor exposure in Hong Kong, and Journal of Geotechnical Engineering, American Society of Civil Engineers, volume 117, pages 979-1000.

7.19

2006 Edition

GS 7.222

Records of Geotextile Filter Detailed records of this type will only be required for jobs where large quantities are called for. For minor jobs, there should be no need for such detailed records to be kept.

RAKING DRAINS
GS 7.223 (1) Installation of Raking Drains For monitoring and maintenance of horizontal drains, see Works Branch Technical Circular No. 10/91 entitled Monitoring and Maintenance of Horizontal Drains.

TRENCH DRAINS
GS 7.229 (1) Deposition and Compaction of Fill Material for Trench Drains It is essential to ensure that large stones are not dropped onto the geotextile.

CAISSON DRAINS
GS 7.233 Discharge of Water from Caisson Drains Discharge outlets should also be shown on the Drawings.

PREFABRICATED BAND DRAINS

GS 7.235 (3) Installation of Prefabricated Band Drains The depth of penetration should be specified in the PS and/or shown on the Drawings.

GROUNDWATER CONTROL AND DRAWDOWN

GS 7.239 (1) Monitoring of Groundwater Control and Drawdown Locations of groundwater monitoring should be shown on the Drawings.

7.20

2006 Edition

TESTING: GRANULAR FILTER MATERIAL

GS 7.243 Testing: Granular Filter Material The number of tests that need to be carried out may be indicated in the BQ. For small quantities, e.g. granular filter layer behind retaining walls, it may not be necessary to carry out such tests.

TESTING: FILL MATERIAL FOR TRENCH DRAINS

GS 7.247 (1) Testing: Fill Material for Trench Drains See guidance notes on GS Clause 7.200(2).

7.21

2006 Edition

PART 6: GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS

GS 7.254 (2) Instruments for Geotechnical Instrumentation The Engineer may, if he wishes, specify that the type of instruments used should have been well proven for a certain period. A period of 2 to 5 years has been specified in some contracts. Location and Arrangement of Instruments Adequate allowance should be made in the number of instruments installed to include for accidental damage and malfunctioning during the full-required period of monitoring. The locations and arrangement of instruments should be specified in the PS and/or on the Drawings. The purpose of this GS Clause is to require surveys to check on the locations of the instruments during the progress of the Works. It is expected that such surveys will only be necessary when there is any doubt as to whether an instrument has been displaced during the Works. Installation of Instruments Requirements for trials installation should be specified in the PS if trials are considered necessary. For certain instruments, it may be possible to carry out site checks on their proper functioning prior to installation. Such checks should be performed whenever possible.

GS 7.255 (1)

(2)

GS 7.256 (2)

MONITORING AND RECORDING

GS 7.260 (1) Recording Readings The accuracy of monitoring and recording should be specified by the Engineer for each specific site in consultation with the land surveyor, as appropriate. This GS Clause allows the Engineer to continue taking readings after the Maintenance Period has expired.

(4)

7.22

2006 Edition

SETTLEMENT PLATES
GS 7.261 (1) Installation of Settlement Plates For marine works, where sea level measurements are required, a PS clause is required. Details of the instruments and installation procedures should be included on the Drawings. This GS Clause caters for settlement plates where an optical method is used for settlement monitoring.

TILTMETER SYSTEM
GS 7.262 (1) Installation of Tiltmeter System Monitoring of tilt-plates installed in vertical positions will necessitate the operator to hold the tiltmeter against the tilt-plate. This can introduce human error. Hence, it is desirable to have the tilt-plates installed in horizontal positions so that the tiltmeter can sit on the top of it to avoid such errors.

STANDPIPE PIEZOMETERS
GS 7.264 Standpipe Piezometers This GS Clause specifies the most common type of piezometer used. For marine applications, the Engineer should consider modifying the specifications to suit the anticipated ground conditions and requirements. A PS clause is required if other types of piezometers are used. GS 7.265 Installation of Standpipe Piezometers Please refer to the CEDD Standard Drawings for details.

7.23

2006 Edition

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 8 PILING WORKS

8.1

2006 Edition

8.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 8 PILING WORKS

GENERAL
GS 8.01 General Requirements Designers may like to refer to the Code of Practice for Foundations issued by Buildings Department in 2004 for useful information. (Ref. http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/index_crlist.html) The specification for piling works in this Section has been prepared on the understanding that the Engineer design the piling works. However, the Contractor should be encouraged, through a suitably worded PS clause, to submit an alternative piling design. It would be prudent to do so, as the overall cost of piling works depends very much on the expertise of the Contractor and the availability of his plant. The PS should provide a performance specification to enable the Contractor to produce an alternative design. One of the ways to provide a performance specification is for the Engineer to provide a plan/schedule showing the location and the loads to be carried by the pile foundations, and the maximum allowable movements, but which does not specify the working loads of the piles. If the working load of the individual piles is not specified, specifying the performance requirements becomes more difficult and criteria have to be related to the support of the individual loads which may be carried by individual piles or by pile groups, both in terms of factors of safety and relative settlement at service loads. Irrespective of the type of performance specification, the Engineer should avoid specifying requirements that are unrealistic in terms of the conditions of soil in which the piles are to be constructed. He should take account of the fact that any limitations on settlement of the pile-head must be greater than the elastic response of the pile-shaft, with due regard to shedding of loadings through shaft friction/adhesion. The use of a performance specification may impose a design responsibility on the specialist piling contractor, subject to the terms and conditions of the main contract. However, the Engineer should bear in mind that this may not relieve the Engineer of his ultimate design responsibility for such work and, in particular, the duty to satisfy himself that the type and design of the piling system proposed by the specialist contractor are suitable for construction in the ground conditions and are compatible with the site environment.

8.3

2006 Edition

The Contractor is required to furnish with his tender full details of the type of piles offered, the design layout of the pile foundations, the standards of control intended to use, how the calculations and checking of the load-bearing capacity and settlement of the piles will be carried out, and the tests proposed to undertake on the Site. Reference should be made to the relevant DEVB/ETWB technical circulars for the required experience of the Construction Engineer and the Construction Supervisor to be employed on the Site.

SURFACE TREATMENT OF STEEL PILES

GS 8.25 Epoxy Coatings to Steel Piles Epoxy coating is a suitable corrosion protection for marine piles. The epoxy coating should be applied to the steel piles in the workshop before transportation to the Site, but any damage to the epoxy coating during transport and handling should be repaired on the Site before pile driving starts.

GENERAL PILING WORKS REQUIREMENTS

GS 8.37 Monitoring of Noise, Vibration, Ground Movement and Groundwater Level The ground settlement markers should be installed directly on the ground and be sufficiently isolated from adjacent concrete pavements in order to enable them to settle with the soil. For example, the markers located on concrete pavements will not provide the true settlement of the ground as it may not settle along with the soil below it. Monitoring of ground settlement in recently reclaimed land is important to assess negative skin friction on piles. The details of the piezometer/standpipe for the measurement of groundwater can be found in Section 10.2 of the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes. Monitoring ground movements and groundwater levels is particularly important for caissons, barrettes and bored piling works. Monitoring should be carried out on a daily basis and the reports of the monitoring results should be submitted by the Contractor on a weekly basis. GS 8.40 Pre-drilling for Piles Founded on Rock This is a new requirement in the GS, 2006 Edition for carrying out pre-drilling for each of the large-diameter bored piles, barrettes and the like. The purpose is check the founding strata against design assumptions and if necessary to conduct redesign of piling/substructure to suit the site conditions.

8.4

2006 Edition

GS 8.41

Founding Levels Pile founding levels should be based on the rock decomposition grade supported by Index tests appropriate to the decomposition grade e.g. N Schmidt hammer test, Slake test, SPT N Values (reference, Table 4 of Geoguide 3: Guide to Rock and Soil Descriptions, 1988). If Rock Quality Designation (RQD) is specified, it is important to note that its value may be biased depending on the orientation of the borehole in relation to the dominant discontinuity sets. In the case of closely fractured rock, the intensity of fracture could be an important factor on deciding the founding level (reference, Table 7 of Geoguide 3). It should be noted that the use of percentage core recovery as the sole means of determining the founding level in rock could be misleading as the value depends very much on the effectiveness of the drilling technique used for the core recovery. When percentage core recovery of the grade of rock on which the pile will be founded is used as one of the parameters for deciding on the founding level, the type of coring method should be specified. The contact between the bored piles and the underlying rock at the base could be checked by means of coring. The coring should normally extend about one metre below the base of the excavated pile. If the founding level for the same bored pile is to be proved by drilling, GS Clause 8.41(2) will apply. If the sole purpose is to check the base contact condition or the founding level, the incorporation of a preformed hole in the concrete shaft will greatly reduce the length of coring required.

PRELIMINARY PILES
GS 8.42 Preliminary Piles If possible, and particularly where the ground conditions are unfamiliar, preliminary piles should be installed and tested to check the pile design in the early stages of the Contract. These piles should be constructed in the same manner, using the same equipment and material as the working piles, under close supervision in an area where the geological profile is known, and tested to a specified load of not less than twice design load. Preferably the pile should be instrumented and tested to failure. The information from the preliminary pile or other data gained during the Contract may require the initial pile design to be modified.

8.5

2006 Edition

DRIVEN PILES
GS 8.43 Supports for Driving Piles Where steel piles have to be driven through hard strata to ensure that the piles are founded on a sound bearing stratum (e.g. karst surface), heavy steel H section piles (e.g. 356 x 368 x 174 kg/m, 305 x 305 x 223 kg/m) suitably strengthened at the web/flanges with stiffeners and at the toes to minimize buckling and twisting of flanges. GS 8.44 Use of Diesel Hammer The use of diesel hammer for percussive piling is prohibited so that environmental impact will be minimized. GS 8.52 Measurement of Set of Driven Piles The following factors should be taken into consideration in the estimation and measurement of the set of driven piles: (a) The set depends on the energy transferred to the piles and thus on the performance of the hammers. Depending on the operating mechanism of various hammers, the performance of each type of hammer could be very different. In terms of efficiency, as well as actual energy transferred to the pile, the hydraulic hammer is generally much superior to the diesel hammer. The required set would, therefore, be higher for piles driven to the same penetration resistance by a hydraulic hammer than by a diesel hammer. Although the operation of the hydraulic hammer and that of the drop hammer are similar in principle, the efficiency of the hydraulic hammer is better than that of the drop hammer. However, the efficiency of the drop hammer is higher than that of the diesel hammer. Therefore, for a given resistance, the set is dependent on the type of hammer used. (b) The GEO Publication No. 1/2006 Foundation Design and Construction (2006) is a good reference for project engineers. A soft file is posted on the CEDD website: http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/downloading/index.htm#11 It is stated that in Section 6.4.2 Pile Driving Formulae that various driving formulae have been proposed, such as the Hiley Formula or Dutch Formula, which are based on the principle of conservation of energy. They relate the ultimate bearing capacity of driven piles to the final set (i.e. penetration per blow). The Hiley Formula has been widely used for design of driven piles in Hong Kong, but it has fundamental deficiencies. Project engineers need to select the formula (e) to suit the site conditions. If a reference beam is used for the measurement of set of driven piles, the beam should be long enough for it to be supported at points well away from the disturbance caused by driving of the piles (i.e. at least 1.2 m from the edge of the pile).
8.6

2006 Edition

HAND-DUG CAISSONS
GS 8.54 Excavation for Hand-dug Caissons PS Clause should be added to draw the attention of the contractor for compliance with the following regulations in the hand-dug excavation:Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Confined Space) Regulation; Code of Safe Working Practices for Hand-Dug Caissons published by the Occupational Safety and Health Council; and Code of Practice for Safety Precautions in the Construction of Large Diameter Boreholes for Piling and Other Purposes (BS 5573)

For a summary of good practice on excavation for hand-dug caissons, reference should be made to Guidance Notes on Hand-dug Caissons, HKIE 1981. Also, in accordance with the WBTC No. 9/94 Restrictions on the Use of Hand-dug Caissons for foundations and Geotechnical Works, approval from the Head of the Department should be sought for use of hand-dug caissons.

BARRETTES
GS 8.56 Excavation for Barrettes To ensure stability of the excavation there should be an adequate excess slurry pressure. Insufficient excess slurry pressure could cause the sides of the excavation to collapse and settlement of the adjacent ground. The use of chiselling to overcome obstructions may cause difficulty in maintaining the stability of the trench and it is an item to be treated with caution.

CONSTRUCTION USING BENTONITE SLURRY

GS 8.59 (2) Excavation Using Bentonite Slurry Man-made polymer may be preferred to natural bentonite in large diameter bored piles as it is much more environmentally friendly and much cleaner on site. It also saves time, as there is no need to desand as much after drilling prior to pouring concrete. The Contractor should work with a product that has a good list of references. Because the polymer works in a different way to bentonite, no thick filter cake is built up on the pile walls, and thus skin friction is not downgraded as much. The resident site staff will need to keep a close eye on polymer viscosity and pH. The pH is critical, as is the mixing of the polymer to ensure creating long chain lengths of polymer. The soil conditions should be checked as to whether polymer slurry could be used, e.g. very permeable soils. If bentonite has to be added to polymer to help formation of the cake, the necessary precautions/processes should be agreed with the Engineer.

8.7

2006 Edition

FIXING REINFORCEMENT FOR PILES

GS 8.63 Fixing Reinforcement for Piles It is stressed that lowering of the steel cages into the drilled hole shall be carried out in the daytime when it is less possible for frauds to occur. The Engineers Representative should check and ensure that the reinforcement cages are properly connected/fixed so that no cage will become dislodged, deformed, or lifted during the course of placement or concreting. The spacer blocks should also be fixed properly to the cage so that they will provide adequate cover to the reinforcement bars after concreting.

PLACING CONCRETE IN PILES

GS 8.66 Placing Concrete in Piles Prior to placing concrete in excavation for piles/barrettes in bentonite slurry, the Contractor should ensure that the heavily contaminated bentonite suspension, which could impair the free flow of concrete, has not accumulated at the bottom of the excavation. If the bentonite suspension is found to exhibit properties outside the agreed appropriate range, then it should be modified or replaced until the required condition is achieved. In the case of cast-in-situ piles, caissons and barrettes, the concrete is normally placed by tremie, and particular attention needs to be given to special concrete requirements, such as high workability and coherence, in order to ensure the integrity of a pile shaft. The concrete mix should also be designed to be highly workable and cohesive (slump values of 150 mm to 200 mm are generally adequate) and should be in this workable state during the period of concreting. For bored piles mainly resisting axial loads, 20 MPa concrete is adequate for a pile with a maximum bearing pressure of 5 MPa. However, contractors tend to use 25 MPa concrete to ensure quality when concreting piles in the dry (e.g. caissons). For concreting of bored piles underwater, 30 MPa concrete is generally specified. When a bearing pressure higher than 5 MPa is adopted, or the pile has to resist a substantial bending moment, it may be necessary to increase the characteristic concrete strength to a level higher than that mentioned above. High characteristic concrete strength requirements can exacerbate thermal cracking (shrinkage) of the pile shaft which may be revealed by integrity testing. To resist the thermal cracking, it may be necessary to introduce sufficient reinforcement in the pile or, alternatively, the heat of hydration of the cement should be reduced by the addition of pulverised fly ash (PFA) or by the use of low heat cements. For bored piles with 20 MPa concrete, it is common practice to provide nominal reinforcement only to the top third of the pile unless the piles are subjected to tension or to high bending moments when the reinforcement is extended to the full length of the pile.

8.8

2006 Edition

INSPECTION OF PILING WORKS

GS 8.69 Inspection of Excavation for Piles The clause here stresses that the Engineers Representative (ER) should check the full depth of the drilled hole in person and shall not rely on the Contractor in order to prevent any fraud. Cleaning of the base is very important before concreting.

RECORDS OF PILING WORKS

GS 8.81 Record of Piling Works The ER shall demand the Contractor to submit full piling records not later than 14 days after completion of piling works and shall ensure that these records are authentic with proper checking and signatures. The objective is to prevent any fraud from occurring.

TESTING: LOAD TESTS ON PILES

GS 8.82 Testing: Load Tests on Piles

(a) Static Load Testing: Pile testing may be carried out for purposes associated with the pile design (preliminary pile test) or for pile verification within the Contract. The bearing capacity of a driven pile is to some extent time dependent. For example, the bearing capacity of piles installed in a clayey soil has been shown to increase with time due to the dissipation of pore water pressure. This feature is not normally relied upon for design purposes. In general, the worst representation of the pile performance is obtained by load testing piles within a week or two of installation. For piles in reclaimed land undergoing settlement, negative skin friction (downdrag) may not be present in the short term and may contribute to positive pile capacity during a test, whereas in the long term, it will reduce the bearing capacity and increase stresses in the pile. Test loads should be measured by a calibrated load-measuring device and also by a calibrated pressure gauge in the hydraulic system. The load-measuring device may consist of a load column, pressure cell or other appropriate system, and should be calibrated before and after each series of tests, whenever adjustments are made to the device, or at any time intervals appropriate to the type of equipment. The pressure gauge and the hydraulic system should be calibrated together as a complete system.

8.9

2006 Edition

Public Works Central Laboratory (PWCL) has a Proving Device (which is a Load Column of Grade 2.0 to BS 1610:Part2: 1985 with a calibrated range of 500 kN-10 000 kN) which may be obtained on loan for calibration of the load measuring device. PWCL can also provide a calibration service on request. It is necessary for the PWCL to send this Proving Device overseas for recalibration at an interval of about 2 years. Therefore, enquiries should be made with Senior Geotechnical Engineer/Laboratory, well in advance of the pile test, regarding the availability of the Proving Device for calibration. The number of piles that need to be tested should be based on the knowledge of the geology of the Site and the method of pile installation. On sites where the geology is complex and potential difficulties are expected, as many piles as possible should be tested. Where the geological conditions are well known and incidence of construction problem is low, it may be sufficient to test only a certain percentage (say, 2%) of the piles subject to the agreement of the Engineer. (b) Dynamic Pile Testing: It is possible to make reliable measurements of the stress waves in piles during driving. Measurements of strains and accelerations near the pile head during driving are carried out using a Pile Driving Analyzer (PDA). Analysis of these measurements using Case, Capwap or Weap methods gives estimates of: (i) The static load capacity,

(ii) The energy delivered by the pile hammer, (iii) The magnitude of maximum driving stresses (both tension and compression), and (iv) The location and extent of any structural damage. For (i) above, the results must be correlated with static load tests for each Site in the early stage of the piling programme. The Case method of analysis assumes a soil damping constant jc which is soil type dependent. The Capwap method of analysis computes a force/time curve, which is then compared and adjusted to fit the recorded data. This gives a better estimate of the bearing capacity and distribution of resistance, together with the predicted static load settlement curve; a better estimate of jc is also obtained. Interpretation of the results requires experience and special expertise.

8.10

2006 Edition

TESTING: INTEGRITY TESTS

GS 8.92 Testing: Integrity Tests on Piles and Non-destructive Integrity Testing Integrity testing entails the measurements of a property of a pile that can be related to its soundness, but does not provide the assurance that the pile is capable of safely supporting the specified working load. Although the tests are intrinsically indirect, they are useful in acting as comparative tests and can act as a means of screening large numbers of nominally similar piles. These tests also assist in the selection of piles for load tests. Methods which are commonly used to investigate the integrity of concrete piles are as follows: (a) Sonic Echo Method: The pile head is impacted by a relatively small hammer, and the response is measured and processed in such a way that most major discontinuities should be apparent. This is a very rapid and inexpensive test suitable for checking the continuity of single lengths of precast or permanently cased piles. The maximum depth of test depends on the length/diameter ratio of the pile and soil conditions. (b) Vibration/Transient Dynamic Method: Basically, this involves attaching an electrodynamic vibrator to the pile head or using an impulse hammer, and measuring the response of the pile to a sinusoidal force of constant amplitude. By varying the frequency of vibration, resonance peaks are produced, which may be used to interpret the effective length of the pile and to identify most major defects. The maximum depth of test depends on the length/diameter ratio and soil conditions. (c) Sonic Logging: This requires tubes to be cast into the pile to allow the passage of a sonic pulse from a transmitter to a receiver through the material of the pile. The usual procedure is to measure the elapsed time between the sending and receiving of a signal between the tubes. Tubes should be installed, as far as practicable, from the toe of the pile. In general, GI pipes will give better results than uPVC pipes. If the latter are used, PFA concrete will also give better results than normal PC concrete. This method is suitable for use on hand-dug caissons, large-diameter bored piles and barrettes. The method of reinstatement of holes formed for integrity testing should be stated on the Drawings. It must be emphasized that the results of integrity testing need to be interpreted by engineers with the requisite specialist experience, and all methods have limitations.

8.11

2006 Edition

GS 8.94

Sonic Tests on Bored Cast-in-situ Piles The ER should check and ensure that the sonic test tubes are properly fixed so that they will not be dislodged during the course of lowering into the hole and concreting.

TESTING: BENTONITE SLURRY

GS 8.96 Testing: Bentonite Slurry Tests on samples of bentonite slurry to determine the density, viscosity, shear strength and pH value should be carried out initially until a consistent working pattern has been established, taking into account the mixing process, any blending and any process which may be employed to remove impurities from previously used bentonite suspension. When the results show consistent behaviour, the tests for shear strength and the pH value may be discontinued and only tests to determine the density and viscosity need be carried out.

8.12

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 9 CARRIAGEWAYS: SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

9.1

2006 Edition

9.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 9 CARRIAGEWAYS: SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

MATERIALS
GS 9.02 Sub-base Material Using Virgin Material The requirement for 10% fines crushing value is, in general, easily met by Hong Kong aggregates. The test should be instructed only if there is doubt about the quality of the parent rock. GS 9.04 Aggregates for Bituminous Materials Aggregates should be checked for conformity with Table 9.2 of the GS when they are obtained from a new source and testing data are not readily available. If the Contractor finds it necessary to change his aggregate source during the Works, he should notify the Engineer in advance, and further mix designs and trials will be required accordingly. In general, normal variations in flakiness index, water absorption value and relative density of the aggregates do not necessitate new mix designs and trials. Under the present Centralized Mix Design Vetting System of Highways Department, new mix designs should be referred to the Research and Development (R&D) Division of the Highways Department for evaluation. Details of the mix design evaluation procedure are described in Highways Department Technical Circular 22/97 Procedures for Approval of Mix Design for Bituminous Materials. GS 9.05 Filler for Bituminous Materials Many of the aggregates produced in Hong Kong contain sufficient fines to supply the mineral filler required for normal mixes. In this case, added fillers, such as cement or lime, would only be used if required for specific technical reasons. Where a mix design using cement or lime filler has been approved, mineral dust should not be used as a substitute unless further mix designs and trials are conducted. As far as mix design is concerned, the most important properties of mineral fillers are particle size distribution and relative density and tests for these properties are the only ones required. The particle size distribution should comply with the relevant standards specified in this GS clause whilst the relative density values are to be used in deriving some of the mix design parameters, such as the relative density of the combined aggregate, the percent voids in mineral aggregate, etc.

9.3

2006 Edition

GS 9.06

Bitumen The specified penetration Grade 60-70 has been selected as the most appropriate for Hong Kong conditions. It is essential to ensure control of the bitumen temperature during blending and storage. The bitumen storage tank and the bitumen feed line located near the discharge valve of the mixer unit should be equipped with recording thermometers. Bitumen, if heated to a high enough temperature, will release fumes that will flash in the presence of a spark or open flame, but the temperature at which this occurs is well above the temperatures normally used in paving operations.

GS 9.07

Bituminous Emulsion Both anionic and cationic bituminous emulsions are widely used for tack coating purposes and are acceptable. Cationic bituminous emulsion is sometimes preferred because it has slightly better adhesion under wet conditions.

GS 9.08

Bituminous Priming Material While priming is an established practice in many other countries, it has not been common practice to require priming in Hong Kong except when the sub-base has to be maintained in a prepared condition for an extended period of time. Bituminous priming material normally takes some time to cure and its use is not encouraged for environmental reasons.

DESIGN OF SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

GS 9.09 (1) Design Procedure for Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials The proposed grading of sub-base material must lie within the recipe envelopes specified in Table 9.1 of the GS. The grading of material subsequently supplied throughout the Contract is required to lie within the same envelope. Mix designs approved under the Highways Department Centralized Mix Design Vetting System should be acceptable for use. If the Engineer has any doubts as to the suitability of the proposed design, he should refer to the R&D Division of the Highways Department. Bituminous materials scarified from road maintenance, commonly known as Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP), are generally disposed of as construction and demolition waste. It is a well-established practice overseas to recycle RAP into asphalt production. In Hong Kong since 2003, similar practice of recycling RAP has been adopted with a view to reducing demolition waste and protecting the environment. The incorporation of up to 15% RAP in the roadbase material has been established according to the overseas experience.

(2)

(3)

9.4

2006 Edition

GS 9.10 (2)

Design of Bituminous Materials Findings of a research study conducted by a local university indicated that the performance of bituminous wearing course and base course materials incorporating 15% RAP is comparable with that of virgin materials. In this connection, it is allowed to incorporate up to 15% RAP in the wearing course and base course materials. The Marshall design procedure is required to be generally in accordance with The Asphalt Institute Handbook MS-2. Some minor variations in method and some analytical strategies have been developed locally, as follows: (a) Local experience has indicated that the use of mechanical hammers conforming to MS-2 dimensions produces satisfactory mix designs. (b) The Marshall design method is used in general although MS-2 states that it is applicable only to bituminous mixtures containing aggregates of maximum size of 25 mm. In adopting the method to large-stone bituminous mixes, the possibility of test results being affected by the presence of coarse particles each of size larger than 25 mm should be recognized, but if doubt exists, further check specimens need to be prepared. (c) It has been found that in most cases with local bituminous materials other than friction course material, a simple adoption of the optimum bitumen content as defined in MS-2 as the design bitumen content, will produce material with an air void content very close to, or below, the lower limit of the specified range of 3% to 5%. The current method is to select the bitumen content that produces air voids near the midpoint of the specified range and use this as the design bitumen content, provided the Marshall properties conform with the Specification. This method has been found to produce mixes that perform satisfactorily in practice. (d) As the compositions of recycled wearing course and base course materials are different from those of virgin materials, a full set of mix design for the recycled materials in accordance with the Marshall design procedure should be carried out. Requirements for Marshall test results of recycled materials are identical to those for virgin materials.

(4)

(5)

Bituminous friction course material requires lower mixing and compaction temperatures due to its open-graded nature. Higher temperatures will cause the bitumen to drain through the mix. Susceptibility to bitumen drainage is relevant to the performance of the friction course and should be assessed during the design process although it is not specified in the GS.

9.5

2006 Edition

SUBMISSIONS
GS 9.11 (1)(a) Particulars of Filler and Bitumen for Bituminous Materials Crushed rock filler and hydrated lime in the local market normally do not have the requisite manufacturers certificate and if these fillers are used, relevant test certificates showing particulars of the filler can be accepted. In practice, particulars of the proposed fillers are normally included as part of the mix design submission. Details of the bitumen should be supplied whenever a new design is required or the source of the bitumen is changed. A further submission of details may be required when there is a change in the source of one of the constituent materials, or there is evidence to suggest that the properties of one of the materials have altered significantly. Particulars of Mixes for Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials A period of 21 days is considered realistic for the Engineer to assess the relevant mix particulars. However, the time period may be reduced for mixes that have been previously approved for use. In general, the Contractor should be advised of the outcome of the Engineers assessment not less than 3 days before the proposed trials are conducted. Mix designs approved under the Centralized Mix Design Vetting System by the R&D Division of the Highways Department are normally acceptable. If the Engineer has any doubts about the suitability of these mixes, he should refer to the R&D Division. Trial areas may be requested at the beginning of the Contract. However, if the Engineer has evidence that the mixes and the laying methods proposed are in current use, the requirement for separate trial areas may be waived. GS 9.15 Particulars of Methods of Laying and Compacting Sub-bases and Bituminous Materials The objective is to produce a pavement that fully complies with the Specification. The Contractor should be allowed to vary his methods if changes in site conditions make this necessary.

(1)(b)

(3)

GS 9.12 (3)

9.6

2006 Edition

TRIALS
GS 9.17 (1) Trial Areas In order to meet the prime objective of demonstrating that the proposed mixes, methods of production and methods of construction will produce a carriageway which complies with the specified requirements throughout the whole of the Works, the trial areas should be chosen with care, with the following guidelines kept in mind: (a) Areas chosen should, as far as possible, be representative of the Works. Cul-de-sacs, or constricted areas where level control is complicated or compaction is unusually difficult, should be avoided. (b) For the purposes of the trial, each mix should generally be laid at its designed level in the pavement section. It may be more suitable to have a separate trial location for each mix. (5) The progress of work may be affected if the Engineer takes a long time to determine whether the specified requirements have been met. The Engineer should notify the Contractor of his findings as soon as possible. This should normally take no more than 7 days. Samples: Trial Areas Sampling is as important as testing and every precaution should be taken to obtain samples that will yield an acceptable estimate of the nature and condition of the material that it represents. Segregation during sampling, which is more prevalent in mixes having larger nominal aggregate sizes, must be avoided as this will adversely affect the test results and will, therefore, provide an inaccurate representation of the whole batch. GS 9.20 Compliance Criteria: Trial Areas All compliance criteria are the same as those for the permanent works in the Contract. GS 9.21 (1) Non-compliance: Trial Areas The normal causes of non-compliance are most likely to be excessive variances in production, sampling and testing errors, over or under-compaction etc., and accordingly, further trials may be required. However, such non-compliance of trial areas may not necessitate further mix design unless the Contractor wishes to change the mix. In such cases, the relevant details should be referred to the R&D Division of the Highways Department for evaluation. If initial testing indicates non-compliance, the Contractor may propose to retest non-conforming areas to verify the initial results. If so, the Engineer is encouraged to concur with and supervise any retesting. Thereafter, if the results of retesting also show non-compliance with the Specification, the trial areas should then be deemed unacceptable.

GS 9.18

(2)

9.7

2006 Edition

Non-complying areas in trial areas should be removed and rectified by the Contractor. Guidelines for rectification are given in Appendix 9-C of the Guidance Notes. GS 9.22 Approved Mix for Bituminous Materials other than Bituminous Roadbase Material The grading envelope for the approved mix is different from the designed grading envelope specified in Table 9.3 of the GS. The latter is applicable only in the mix design stage and has no further relevance to routine compliance testing. The approved mix is that which on analysis falls within the approved gradation and binder envelope. It should be expected that future test analysis will produce results of normal distribution and any trend that deviates from the target values should be investigated. Commencement of Placing Bituminous Materials The progress of work may be affected if the Engineer takes a long time to determine whether the specified requirements have been met. The Engineer should notify the Contractor of the approval status of the mix as soon as possible. This should normally take no more than 7 days. GS 9.24 Changes in Materials and Methods of Construction The principle is that any proposed changes are to be referred to the Engineer before implementation. In practice, formal submissions should be limited to variations of practical significance. For example, the replacement of a particular item of laying equipment by another similar item should not constitute a variation, whereas a change in approved target binder content would. Similarly, the Contractor may need to amend the proportions of aggregates in the manufacturing plant in order to meet the target grading of the approved mix. This again should not constitute a significant change provided the approved targets are being maintained.

(1)

(2) & (3)

GS 9.23

HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT OF MATERIALS

GS 9.25 (3) Handling and Storage of Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials The restriction on storage time is to minimize oxidation of the bitumen and to maintain an adequate temperature for laying and compaction. If bituminous materials for lower courses (bituminous roadbase or base course) are stored beyond the time limits specified, approval may be given to their use, provided that the nominated laying temperature is maintained. The restriction on storage time for friction course material is to avoid possible bitumen drainage. The production of friction course material should be carefully planned to minimize the time between production and laying.
9.8

(4)

2006 Edition

GS 9.26 (3)

Transport of Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials The use of any release agent on the truck body should be discretionary. The intention is to ensure that trucks are emptied cleanly, whilst ensuring that use of the release agent does not contaminate the mix. This is particularly important for friction course materials that are likely to be subject to bitumen drainage during transport.

MIXING OF SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

GS 9.27 Mixing of Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials The requirement of mixing before delivery to the Site is intended to prevent the use of unsatisfactory site mixing methods. Normal practice is for all materials to be produced off Site. If the Contractor proposes to establish mixing facilities on the Site, this should be subject to the Engineers approval. GS 9.28 Mixing Plant for Bituminous Materials The intention is to outline a minimum standard of plant to ensure that the supplier is capable of maintaining adequate control of his production process. It is not intended to prohibit the use of any new developments in mixing technology, and if a Contractor proposes the use of an alternative mixing procedure, his proposal should be referred to the Research & Development (R&D) Division of the Highways Department for evaluation. The requirement for regular calibration of weighing equipment can be regarded as being satisfied if the Contractor can produce current calibration certificates. GS 9.29 (1) Mixing Bituminous Materials The 0.4% limit on aggregate moisture content after drying is intended to ensure that the bitumen will adhere satisfactorily to the aggregates. When drying at the specified aggregate temperatures, this level of drying should easily be attained. If considered necessary, the Engineer may ask the supplier to provide proof of routine checks on aggregate moisture content.

LAYING AND COMPACTION OF BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

GS 9.33 (1) Laying and Compaction of Bituminous Materials It is a general principle that bituminous materials should not be laid in wet conditions. This requirement should be interpreted with discretion. The laying of bituminous materials shall be avoided during periods of heavy rain and be suspended when free standing water is present on the surface.

9.9

2006 Edition

(2)

In prolonged cold weather, bituminous materials may be cooled too rapidly so that they may not be laid or compacted properly. Indeed, apart from ambient temperature, the rate of cooling is very much dependent upon the thickness to be laid and the ambient wind conditions. If, when working to a tight programme, the Contractor elects to carry out laying and compaction during cold and windy weather, such work may be permitted if the Engineer considers it appropriate to do so. In such cases, the mixture temperatures of the materials at laying and at the start of compaction should be rigorously monitored. Reference can be made to the temperature requirements specified for friction course material in Table 9.8 of the GS. Tack coat promotes bonding between layers of bituminous materials. Vertical surfaces against which bituminous material is to be placed should be similarly treated with a tack coat. For the finished sub-base, the application of a tack coat is not necessary before placing of the overlay but rather a priming coat as stated in GS Clause 9.38 may be used, if required by the Engineer. Tack coat should be applied with reasonable uniformity by sprayer and allowed to cure before the laying process commences. Only plant and vehicles essential to the laying of bituminous materials should be permitted to run on tack-coated surfaces.

(4)

(5)

Existing surfaces on which friction course is to be laid may require regulation with suitable material if any level correction is required. Whilst 10 mm wearing course material is generally used and specified, alternative fine material may be more appropriate, depending on the depth of regulation required. Reference can be made to the 6 mm size dense wearing course material specified in BS 4987:Part 1. Friction course material should not be laid directly over a milled surface. The underlying surface must be smooth and dense to allow drainage of rainwater. Lower layers may be milled to produce the required upper layer thickness, provided that the underlying pavement thickness is within the specified limits.

(6)

The minimum mixture temperature at the start of compaction should be 80C for roadbase material and 85C for base course and wearing course materials. Laying Bituminous Materials by Paving Machine Laying other than by paving machine should only be permitted in areas of restricted access, or where the use of a paving machine is not practical. Surface texture and freedom from segregation etc. are subjective issues. A reasonably good standard of workmanship should generally be expected, with sections of the pavements being assessed as a whole rather than as small individual areas. Manual placement of material locally to correct levels and to improve surface texture may be preferable in order to maintain paving continuity. This is unlikely to have a detrimental effect on the pavement and, notwithstanding, the criteria for surface regularity should still be achieved.

GS 9.34 (1) (2)

(6)

9.10

2006 Edition

GS 9.35

Laying Bituminous Materials by Manual Methods In areas where manual placement is necessary, pre-compaction by the paver will not have taken place and smaller compaction plant may have to be employed. In such cases, the specified relative compaction requirements could be relaxed. However, in no circumstances should any core taken from such areas have an air void content exceeding 9.0%.

GS 9.37 (6)

Joints in Bituminous Materials Joints in friction course should neither be cut nor coated with bituminous emulsion so as not to reduce the water permeability across the joint.

PROTECTION OF SURFACES OF SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

GS 9.38 (1) Protection of Surfaces of Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials Priming with bituminous prime coat may be required when the sub-base needs to be maintained in a prepared condition for an extended period of time. After priming, traffic should be restricted in order to minimize damage to the primed surface. An application of bitumen emulsion is not effective as a prime coat, because the emulsion will not penetrate the granular sub-base to provide a bond. The primer not only maintains surface condition but also provides a relatively impermeable surface. (3) Traffic should be kept off freshly laid bituminous material until the material is able to withstand the loading without deformation. When necessary, it would be acceptable for subsequent layers to be placed in less than the 6-hour period specified, provided that a fully conforming pavement is ultimately achieved. Construction plant and other vehicles travelling from unsurfaced areas should be kept off friction course.

TOLERANCES
GS 9.40 (2) Tolerances: Level of Carriageway The tolerances given in Table 9.9 of the GS apply to the total course thicknesses as specified in the Contract, not the layer thicknesses. Guidelines and recommendations on layer thicknesses are given in Appendix 9-A of the Guidance Notes.

9.11

2006 Edition

TESTING: SURFACE REGULARITY

GS 9.42 Testing: Surface Regularity Surface regularity is a measure of the riding quality of a finished pavement. It is intended to achieve similar riding quality on both concrete and flexible pavements, and thus the relevant testing methods and compliance criteria should be the same for concrete and flexible pavements.

TESTING: SUB-BASE MATERIAL

GS 9.45 Samples: Sub-base Material A sampling frequency of one sample per 250 m3 is suggested to ensure the consistency of the material. This frequency should be used during the early stages of the Contract, after which it could be reduced if the material consistently complies with the requirements of the Specification. GS 9.46 (1) Testing: Sub-base Material Using Virgin Material The requirement for 10% fines crushing value is, in general, easily met by Hong Kong aggregates. The test should be instructed only if there are doubts about the weathering condition of the aggregates or the quality of the parent rock. For testing of maximum dry density and optimum moisture content, the Engineer should decide on a testing frequency which he considers to be adequate for checking the relative compaction of the sub-base. Wet sieving is mandatory. Wet sieving is mandatory to prepare the sample. The resultant slurry should not be dried in the oven at a temperature greater than 50C to reduce the water content.

(2) (4)

TESTING: RELATIVE COMPACTION OF SUB-BASE

GS 9.48 (3) Testing: Relative Compaction of Sub-base The location of test holes should be chosen randomly. Some form of regular pattern is a fair way of ensuring a truly random selection process.

9.12

2006 Edition

TESTING: AGGREGATES, FILLER AND BITUMEN FOR BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

GS 9.52 Samples: Aggregates, Filler and Bitumen for Bituminous Materials It should not normally be necessary to require samples of constituent materials to be taken at fixed intervals, unless there is any reason to doubt the suitability of the materials being used. GS 9.53 Testing: Aggregates, Filler and Bitumen for Bituminous Materials It should not normally be necessary to require testing of constituent materials at fixed intervals unless there is any reason to doubt the suitability of the materials being used. Some of the material properties listed in Table 9.11 of the GS do not have compliance criteria but are necessary and useful in assessing acceptability of the bituminous mixtures. The relative density values of aggregates, filler and bitumen are required for determining critical mix design parameters, such as the percentage voids in mineral aggregate. The viscosity value of bitumen is required for determining the mixing and compaction temperatures of the bituminous mixtures, whilst test results of loss on heating, like the thin film oven test, give an indication of the resistance of the bitumen to change under hardening conditions, similar to those expected in the actual application processes.

TESTING: BITUMINOUS MATERIALS OTHER BITUMINOUS FRICTION COURSE MATERIAL

GS 9.55 (1)

THAN

Samples: Bituminous Materials other than Bituminous Friction Course Material Sampling is as important as testing and every precaution should be taken to obtain samples that will yield an acceptable estimate of the nature and condition of the material that it represents. Segregation during sampling, which is more prevalent in mixes having larger nominal aggregate sizes, must be avoided as this will adversely affect the test results and will therefore provide an inaccurate representation of the material being sampled. The objective in the sampling method is to ensure that the bulk sample is representative of the quantity as a whole and that it is taken in a safe manner. The Contractor may propose an alternative method of sampling, provided it complies with the requirements of Clause 9.55(4) of the GS. Testing: Bituminous Materials other than Bituminous Friction Course Material In some situations, particularly for minor works, the Engineer may not wish to carry out a separate programme of testing and he may require the Contractor to carry out the testing on his behalf and to make the results routinely available for the Engineers use for compliance control.

(3)

GS 9.56 (1)

9.13

2006 Edition

(2)

If agreed by the Engineer, other approved national testing standards may be used. The Research and Development (R&D) Division of the Highways Department may be consulted in this regard. To generate lesser hazardous impact to the environment and enhance safe operation, the use of ignition test method according to ASTM D6307 is allowed to determine the bitumen content as an alternative to the conventional solvent method specified in ASTM D2172. However, the ignition method is not applicable to the friction course material because of the presence of lime, which adversely affect the accuracy of the method.

GS 9.57

Compliance Criteria: Bituminous Materials other than Bituminous Friction Course Material See Appendix 9-B of the Guidance Notes.

TESTING: BITUMINOUS FRICTION COURSE MATERIAL

GS 9.59 Samples: Bituminous Friction Course Material See guidance notes on GS Clause 9.55(1). GS 9.60 (1) Testing: Bituminous Friction Course Material Samples are normally forwarded to the Public Works Laboratories of the Geotechnical Engineering Office for compliance testing. In some situations, particularly for minor works, the Engineer may reduce his testing frequency and use the Contractors quality control test records as supplementary information in assessing the acceptability of the materials supplied. Notwithstanding this, it is encouraged that the Contractors test results should be used for reference purposes only. See guidance notes on GS Clause 9.56(2). Compliance Criteria: Bituminous Friction Course Material See Appendix 9-B of the Guidance Notes.

(2) GS 9.61

TESTING: BITUMINOUS MATERIAL CORES

GS 9.62 (1) Samples: Bituminous Material Cores There is a good probability that satisfactory compaction of the bituminous roadbase will be achieved. Consequently, core testing is in general not required for roadbase material. If the Engineer is in doubt about the quality of the compacted material, cores can be taken for testing at the rate specified in Table 9.14 of the GS.

9.14

2006 Edition

(2)

Samples of compacted bituminous material, although selected randomly, should be representative of the area or sub-area as a whole. It is not usual for cores to be taken near ironware or joints. Should cores be required near these locations for specific reasons, the relevant test results should be taken in isolation to those of the remaining area so as not to affect the overall compliance. If agreed by the Engineer, the Contractor may take cores of 150 mm diameter regardless of the layer thickness. In periods of high ambient temperatures, it may be necessary to delay coring to allow the bituminous material to cool sufficiently; otherwise, both coring and extraction of the cores may adversely affect the air void content determination. Cores awaiting testing must be stored in the shade and must not be stacked on each other nor stored adjacent to any heat source to prevent degradation.

(3)

(5)

(6)

GS 9.63 (1)

Testing: Bituminous Material Cores Tests on bituminous cores should be conducted as soon as possible after they have been taken, and in most instances not later than 3 days after extraction, to ensure an accurate representation of the compacted material. For multi-layer cores, the Engineer should measure the layer thicknesses first for compliance checking and then split the cores into separate layers of different materials for testing of the air void content by the Public Works Laboratories. Cores with non-complying layer thicknesses should not be taken for the air void content test.

GS 9.65 (2)

Non-Compliance: Bituminous Material Cores For roadbase material, values of air void content less than 3% do not represent a significant failure. Thus, if the mean of the air void content of the four additional cores is not less than 3%, the sub-area from which the cores were taken can still be considered acceptable.

9.15

2006 Edition

APPENDIX 9-A LAYER THICKNESS

It is generally accepted that the thickness of individual layers of asphalt should be within the range of about 1.5 to 3 times the nominal maximum aggregate particle size, although there is no definitive rule. Thinner layers make the mix hard to compact because of mechanical interlocking of the large aggregate, while thicker layers may be too plastic and prone to deformation during compaction etc. Nominal single layer thicknesses are recommended in the following table: Nominal Layer Thickness Material Minimum (mm) Friction Course (10 mm) Wearing Course (10 mm) Wearing Course (20 mm) Base Course Base Course (28 mm) (37.5 mm) 30 20 40 55 60 70 Maximum (mm) 35 35 50 65 80 120

Bituminous Roadbase

Where a layer thickness and a course thickness are the same, the nominal layer thickness specified should take into account the level tolerances specified in Table 9.9 of the GS such that the possible actual layer thickness is within the limits listed above.

9.16

2006 Edition

APPENDIX 9-B COMPLIANCE CRITERIA

The following extract from BS 4987:Part 1:1988 is especially relevant: The tolerances and ranges specified are intended to provide for errors in sampling and testing when carried out by a skilled operator, as well as for variations in the macadam due to plant inconsistencies and fluctuations in the grading of the aggregates. Attention is drawn to the difficulties inherent in obtaining representative samples of coated macadam for analysis and to the further (usually smaller) errors in the reduction of the sample and its analysis in the laboratory. It should be realized that when any sampling and testing procedure is used, complete compliance with the specification may not always be achieved with every sample tested, even when the material is satisfactory. Where non-compliance is indicated on the initial testing schedule, the Contractor may propose to retest the non-conforming entity. Tests results from such re-sampling, carried out in accordance with ASTM D 979, should be analysed in conjunction with those obtained from the original samples for determining the acceptability of materials which may have initially been deemed unsatisfactory due to possible errors in sampling, sub-sampling and/or testing. The Contractors quality control testing and production records should be evaluated in conjunction with the Engineers results to determine acceptance, especially in instances of marginal or infrequent non- compliance where the overall trend is satisfactory. In comparing test results obtained in different laboratories, it should be kept in mind that for each measured property there is a level of variability inherent in the sampling and testing processes themselves, particularly between different operators in different laboratories, which means that an identical mix could be expected to yield different results. Even the mean of the test results obtained in two laboratories is likely to vary due to minor but systematic differences in the testing processes. If added to this is the normal variability due to the production and laying processes, then it should be expected that on a well controlled job, with good sampling and testing techniques, the various properties measured will vary around their means with standard deviations (SDs) of the general order indicated in the following table: Property Grading Point % Passing Grading Point % Passing Grading Point % Passing Bitumen Content Rices Specific Gravity Marshall Flow Marshall Stability Air Void Content ( >5 mm) (1-5 mm) ( <1 mm) (% mass) Standard Deviation 3% - 5% 2% - 4% 1% - 2% 0.2% - 0.35% 0.015 - 0.020 0.5 mm 1 - 2 KN 1.5% - 2.0%

[Note: The above SDs are quoted as ranges since the actual test results will obviously vary from job to job. They are based on overseas experience that has been confirmed by test results obtained on numerous contracts in Hong Kong.]
9.17

2006 Edition

Assuming test results for each measured property are normally distributed, then by definition it can be expected that approximately 95% of measured results should lie within a range defined by the mean 2 SDs. Assuming a well-controlled job, results from a well-controlled laboratory could be expected to show standard deviations in the order of the figures given in the preceding table. Significantly higher deviations might suggest either poorly controlled production (which should be evidenced by higher SDs from both laboratories) or poor laboratory control (evidenced by higher SDs from one laboratory). Where there is a significant difference between the measured bitumen content and the target value, this may be an indication of segregated samples. This possibility should be investigated by checking for a correlation between bitumen content and grading. If a material tested as being generally on the coarse side of the target grading and the bitumen content is low, this is a prima facie indication of a coarse sample. Similarly, if samples that are too fine have high bitumen contents, segregation should be suspected. A more sophisticated check can be made by calculating the implied bitumen content for each measured grading (by assuming that the bitumen will be distributed in proportion to the surface area) and checking the correlation between the measured and implied contents. However, in most situations a rough correlation as described in the previous paragraph should be sufficient to indicate whether there is a possible sampling or sub-sampling problem, in which case the sampling procedures should be investigated and changed if necessary. When the above analysis indicates that sample failures are most likely due to segregation of the sample, and this is confirmed by both visual checks and satisfactory core results, the material should be deemed acceptable. If there is any other reason to doubt its suitability, then a block sample should be taken from the pavement to check grading and bitumen content, in which case the results obtained should replace the results obtained from the segregated samples.

9.18

2006 Edition

APPENDIX 9-C RECTIFICATION

Any sub-base or pavement course in trial areas or permanent works which is not in accordance with the requirements of this Specification in respect of surface regularity, surface level tolerance, thickness, material property or air void content should be rectified by the Contractor. The material in the defective areas should be removed completely down to the next layer of construction, or as the Engineer directs. The material may be removed by means of pneumatic spades, scarifying, cold milling, or similar techniques approved by the Engineer. The Engineer should determine the extent of works, which is unsatisfactory, for subsequent rectification by the Contractor. Rectification of sub-base and other bituminous pavement courses is recommended as follows: Sub-base Where the surface of the sub-base layer is outside the specified tolerance, the top 75 mm should be scarified and reshaped, with material added or removed as necessary, and the surface then reshaped and recompacted. When the material is outside the specified requirements, it should be completely removed and replaced with material that complies with the Specification. The area so treated should be not less than 2 m wide and 5 m long. Roadbase, Base Course, Wearing Course and Friction Course Where the surface of a bituminous layer is outside tolerance on the high side, it may be corrected by milling off the excess material, provided that the remaining layer thickness is within tolerance. Where the surface is too low, it may generally be made up by either laying the next layer thicker within reasonable limits or, alternatively, an appropriate regulating course may be laid. Any rectification is subject to the requirements of GS Clause 9.40(4). Where the material is unsatisfactory, it should be completely removed and replaced with material that complies with the Specification. Areas to be rectified should be the width laid by the paving machine or one traffic lane wide, whichever is greater, and should be at least 5 m long for roadbase and base course, and 15 m long for wearing course and friction course. Areas of any pavement courses other than friction course requiring rectification should be defined by straight saw cuts not less than 20 mm deep. In cases of manual laying, the area to be rectified should be at least one traffic lane width. Where the number of surface irregularities exceeds the limits specified, the area to be rectified should be in multiples of 75 m in length, and across the full width of the lanes affected, or such lesser area to be determined by the Engineer as is necessary to make the surface regularity conform with the limits.

9.19

2006 Edition

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 10 CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAYS

10.1

2006 Edition

10.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 10 CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAYS

MATERIALS
GS 10.09 Fine Aggregates With the cessation of exportation of river-deposited sand from Mainland China to Hong Kong, the fine aggregates for concrete could be clean, hard and durable crushed rock in accordance with Section 16. GS 10.12 (1) Joint Sealant One of the main causes of compression failure and damage to joints is the ingress and build-up of solids or water-borne silt in the joint over a long period of time preventing or limiting proper movement at the joint. The requirements of a pavement joint sealant are: (a) It should prevent the ingress of any solid matter into the joint, (b) It should form a waterproof seal and prevent most of the surface water from entering the joint gap, and (c) It should be robust, have high extensibility, be resilient, be resistant to tearing, have a good bond to concrete and be resistant to ageing and weathering. (2) Other types of joint sealant, e.g. silicone-based sealant, may also be used subject to a satisfactory field trial. Engineers are requested to liaise with the Research and Development (R&D) Division of the Highways Department for any trials.

TRIALS
GS 10.23 (3) Trial Length Unless there are special reasons for constructing the trial length in a separate location, the trial length should, as far as possible, be part of the permanent carriageway. When a trial length has been found to comply with the specified requirements and is to form part of the permanent carriageway, the core holes should be properly reinstated using the approved concrete mix described in GS Clause 10.62(4). The sides of the core holes should be roughened and the holes thoroughly cleaned before filling with concrete.

(6)

10.3

2006 Edition

GS 10.24 (2)

Testing: Trial Length For a trial length that is to form part of the permanent carriageway, coring through dowel bars and tie bars should be avoided. Unless the construction method involves continuous concreting across transverse joints, it is usually possible to determine whether dowel bars and tie bars comply with the specified requirements without resorting to coring by checking the location and alignment of the bars before concreting and, similarly, the protruding half of the bars after concreting. Cores taken at joints are to check the lateral and vertical location of joint grooves and bottom crack inducers.

GS 10.25 (a)

Compliance Criteria: Trial Length The structural strength of the concrete slab will be reduced if the thickness of the slab is less than the designed value. The surface regularity reflects the riding quality of the road surface. The texture depth is a measure of the skid resistance characteristic of the road surface. Fabric reinforcement in concrete road slabs serves to control thermal cracking but contributes little to the structural strength of the slabs. Therefore, the tolerance for the cover to the fabric reinforcement is not as critical as that for other reinforced concrete works. Misaligned dowels or other joint components may result in undesirable stresses building up in the concrete road slabs owing to changes in temperature and may cause serious maintenance problems. It is important to ensure that the joint components are installed within the allowable tolerances.

(b) (c) (d)

(e)

Segregation of the constituents and the presence of voids will affect the strength of the concrete and, therefore, the structural strength of the road slab. Non-compliance: Trial Length Trial lengths which do not comply with the specified requirements, other than the surface regularity requirements, may be allowed to remain as part of the permanent carriageway if the structural strength of the slab and the skid resistance characteristics of the slab surface are not substantially below the required standard, taking into account the factor of safety in respect of the designed traffic load on the slabs concerned. This factor of safety varies from one carriageway to another and it relates to the percentage distribution of the designed traffic load amongst the lanes of the carriageway. It can be expected that the slow lanes are subject to a relatively larger traffic load in terms of standard axles due to the larger percentage of heavy vehicles using these lanes. If necessary, reference can be made to the dynamic weighbridge data that are monitored by the R&D Division of the Highways Department.

GS 10.26 (2)

10.4

2006 Edition

Concrete slabs in trial lengths or permanent works should be rectified by the Contractor where the number of surface irregularities exceeds the limits specified. The area to be rectified should be in multiples of 75 m in length, and across the full width of the lanes affected, or such lesser area determined by the Engineer, which is necessary to make the surface regularity conform with the limits. Grinding is often not an appropriate rectification method as the overall regularity of the road surface may be made worse despite the removal of some local surface irregularities. Rectification by cutting out the road surface and regulating it by a thin bonded surface can be adopted subject to the Engineers approval. Reference can be made to the Manual for the Maintenance and Repair of Concrete Roads produced by the Cement and Concrete Association.

FORMING JOINTS
GS 10.34 (3) Forming Joints Wet concrete may find its way into gaps around joint filler boards and may subsequently prevent expansion of the slabs. It is, therefore, important to ensure that joint filler boards are securely fixed and that there are no such gaps. Longitudinal Joints Longitudinal joints should be situated at or near lane lines or in the centre of a lane, but should not be located near the wheel track, especially in heavily trafficked lanes. GS 10.37 Isolation Joints Isolation joints are joints across which no dowel bars or tie bars are installed for load transfer. Isolation joints should also be formed around gullies. GS 10.38 (1) Forming Grooves The joint groove must form complete discontinuity across the slab. It is necessary to ensure that the groove is continuous across the longitudinal joint and is extended to the edge of the slab by sawing after forms have been removed. Where the construction method involves continuous concreting across contraction joints, crack-inducing grooves should be sawn as soon as practicable to reduce the risk of random cracking. Method 1 is, therefore, preferred as it would ensure earlier formation of grooves, in particular when a number of contraction joints are involved. Sealing Joints In normal circumstances, caulking material should not be required. One of the main reasons for joint sealant failure under traffic load is detachment from the sides of the groove. It is important to ensure that primer for joint sealant is properly applied according to the manufacturers recommendations.
10.5

GS 10.36

(3)

GS 10.40 (3) (5)

2006 Edition

(8)

It is important to keep the top of the sealant below the surface at transverse joints to prevent damage by traffic. In this respect, attention should be given to the squeezing effect on the sealant due to compression of the joints during warm periods and in summer. When longitudinal joints are sealed, the seal should be just below the surface.

PLACING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE

GS 10.41 (2) Placing and Compacting Concrete Concrete should be placed as close as practicable to its final position and should not be moved into place by vibration.

CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
GS 10.42 (2) Construction Joints For an unplanned construction joint, it is important to break back the unformed edge when removing a section of concrete slab where the concrete has not been adequately compacted, or where other specified requirements have not been attained.

SURFACE FINISH
GS 10.44 (3) Surface Texturing The texture depth achieved will depend on the ambient conditions and the workability of the concrete at the time of brushing and on the pressure applied on the wire broom. The intensity of the noise produced from traffic on the road surface relates to the texture depth achieved. Therefore, in noise sensitive areas, the trial length should be closely monitored, and if the texture depth is likely to be excessive, adjustments should be made to the pressure on the wire broom, or to the time when brushing is carried out after compaction.

CURING CONCRETE
GS 10.45 Curing Concrete Curing of the edges or the vertical sides of a concrete slab is as important as curing to the top surface. If formwork is removed before the end of the specified curing period, curing compound should be applied to the vertical sides immediately after its removal.

10.6

2006 Edition

PROTECTION OF CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY

GS 10.46 (1) Protection of Concrete Carriageway Protective sheeting will avoid the risk of damage by rainfall and the consequent cost of rectification by surface grinding, retexturing or relaying. Construction traffic running on concrete slabs more than 7 days after completion of concreting may still cause a reduction in the texture depth. The Engineer should take additional measurements of the texture depth in areas where he considers it necessary. These measurements should be carried out in sufficient time before opening carriageways to general traffic to allow the Contractor to complete any remedial works, but not so soon that construction traffic will cause further damage.

(2)

TOLERANCES
GS 10.50 (2) Tolerances: Dowel Bars and Tie Bars In general, parallelism within 3 mm per 300 mm length of the dowel bar is considered acceptable. Tolerances: Alignment of Concrete Carriageway The best-fit straight or curved lines are to be determined after construction of the respective straight or curved joints, or edges, and their determination should be agreed between the Engineer and the Contractor. The best-fit lines so determined, straight or curved, should be used as the reference to check the undulation of the lines of joints or edges formed, as well as the relative displacement of the lines of joints or edges formed from the lines specified on the Drawings. Tolerances: Level of Concrete Carriageway Normally, the stipulated measurement grid at 10 m centres longitudinally and 2 m centres transversely is adequate. Where a greater degree of level control is required at locations such as junctions of the carriageway with side roads, slip roads and roundabouts (but not at joints in the carriageway), the grid points should be at some lesser spacing. Measurement of the surface levels at points on grid lines does not mean that the surface can be outside the permitted tolerances at other points between the grid lines.

GS 10.53 (1) & (2)

GS 10.54 (1)

10.7

2006 Edition

TESTING: SURFACE REGULARITY

GS 10.55 (2) Testing: Surface Regularity The rolling straightedge should be moved at a speed of about 2 km/hour. Some coarse textures can lead to incorrect readings if the surface is traversed too quickly. A 3 m straightedge should be used where use of a rolling straightedge is impracticable. (3) The surface should be thoroughly cleaned of loose or extraneous matter before measurements are taken. Measurements should be taken early and any deficiencies in the pavement should be identified as soon as possible to allow the Contractor enough time to complete all remedial work, and to allow the remedial concrete to gain sufficient strength and to cure properly before opening the road to traffic. Areas proven to be out of specification should be rectified as soon as possible by the Contractor and subsequently checked by a 3 m straightedge or, for longer lengths, by the rolling straight-edge. Compliance Criteria: Surface Regularity Two categories of road are given in Table 10.1. The Engineer should specify the category for each different section of road on the Drawings.

(4)

GS 10.56

TESTING: TEXTURE DEPTH

GS 10.58 Compliance Criteria: Texture Depth There will be a considerable reduction of texture depth in the early stages of trafficking as a result of the removal of the weaker surface concrete mortar. To ensure that the minimum texture depth requirements are achieved prior to opening roads to the public, a texture depth deeper than that required might be necessary initially, but a depth not exceeding 1.3 mm is recommended otherwise excessive noise may be produced from interaction between the tyres and the road surface.

TESTING: CONCRETE CORES FROM TRIAL LENGTHS

GS 10.62 (1) Samples: Concrete Cores from Trial Lengths To prevent undue damage to the slabs, cores should not be taken at points susceptible to high stress, such as corners of slabs. Desirable positions for taking cores are between quarter points along the length of slabs.

10.8

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 11 MISCELLANEOUS ROADWORKS

11.1

2006 Edition

11.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 11 MISCELLANEOUS ROADWORKS PART 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

MATERIALS
GS 11.09 Cement Mortar If cement mortar is used as a grout, it is important to ensure that the material has flow characteristics sufficient for it to completely occupy all the spaces to be filled/grouted. Dry-packing mortar beneath precast units should only be allowed in exceptional circumstances. Requirements for thin bedding layers should be shown on the Drawings. Mortar with high-cement content is susceptible to alkali silica reaction. It is, therefore, necessary to ensure that either aggregates are non-reactive or that the amount of soluble alkali is limited. The minimum thickness of flowable bedding mortar should be 10 mm. This will allow sufficient space to enable filling yet reducing creep and shrinkage effects. The nominal thickness, with tolerances, should be shown on the Drawings. If it is proposed to amend the mix proportions, the Engineer should decide which additional tests are necessary to determine the proportions. For flowable mortar, it is a common practice to add the dry material to the water in the mixer. If the resulting mortar does not flow correctly, the addition of extra water or dry mortar to the sample is not permissible. In order to accurately control the amount of water, it is a good practice to use a suitably designed container. A bucket with a mark is not suitable.

11.3

2006 Edition

PART 2: CONCRETE PROFILE BARRIERS MATERIALS

GS 11.11 Concrete Mix As far as the various constituents of concrete, the mixing, transportation, trial mixes and compliance of the concrete for the concrete profile barriers are concerned, the relevant guidance notes on Sections 10 and 16 of the GS also apply.

SUBMISSIONS
GS 11.12 (1) Particulars of Concrete Profile Barriers Contract drafters should prepare a PS clause to the effect that formwork should be made of steel unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, and the submission should contain the structural calculations, if instructed by the Engineer. This is because steel can be reused for many times throughout its life cycle and, therefore, will result in minimising the use of timber and protection of the environment.

11.4

2006 Edition

PART 3: PEDESTRIAN GUARD-RAILING GENERAL

GS 11.27 Design of Pedestrian Guard-railing The Specification allows an alternative design for pedestrian guard-railing. This is to enable the adoption of the proprietary construction for temporary use, which is now available in the local market.

11.5

2006 Edition

PART 4: UNTENSIONED BEAM BARRIERS MATERIALS

GS 11.39 Beams The principal system of safety fencing should be limited to untensioned corrugated beams for uniformity and consistency. Welding should not be permitted under any circumstances other than where indicated on the HyD Standard Drawings. Under no circumstances should flame-cutting equipment be used for cutting beams and forming holes on the Site. Where doubt exists about the adequacy of the tensile strength of beams supplied, a site test may be carried out as follows: A tensioned corrugated beam is freely supported over a span of 3 m with the traffic face upper-most and a 10 kN vertical force is applied uniformly through a 100 mm wide plate across the centre line of the span. The resulting maximum deflection should not exceed 40 mm. If this fails, further tests should be carried out by an approved laboratory of the HOKLAS. Some corrugated beams may have slightly different section details. As such, non-standard sections may not be readily available in the local market, replacing defective or damaged units may be difficult. The Engineer should ensure that only those beams complying with the HyD Standard Drawings are accepted. The Engineer should, where appropriate, direct the Contractor to replace all existing non-standard corrugated beams with those complying with the HyD Standard Drawings. GS 11.40 Posts Channel sections or other sections with exposed sharp corners which may be potentially harmful to pedestrians, should not be used as posts for untensioned beam barriers installed on footways. For posts fabricated from hollow sections, the top sealing plate should be rounded at all edges and corners.

CONSTRUCTION OF UNTENSIONED BEAM BARRIERS

GS 11.47 Installation of Untensioned Beam Barriers The approach end of all single sided untensioned beam barriers should normally be flared away from the carriageway by a minimum flare offset of 1 m over a length of 20 m, as shown on the HyD Standard Drawings. Where this flare offset cannot be achieved, the maximum possible offset should be described and the flare length should be at least 10 times the flare-offset dimension.

11.6

2006 Edition

The ends of safety fences should terminate in either: (a) A section which should be ramped down to an anchorage, and where practicable, should be flared away from the line of the fence and the carriageway, or (b) A connection to another type of safety fence by means of a transition piece, or (c) A full height anchorage, or (d) Attachment to a bridge parapet by means of a connection as shown on the HyD Standard Drawings. Where permanent shims are used underneath base plates to align or support parapet posts etc., they should take the form of either central packing or slotted washers placed around the shanks of the holding down bolts. Packers and washers should be either of corrosion resistant materials or be treated to resist corrosion. Adequate bedding cover should also be provided to the packers and washers to ensure that they are fully protected from the weather and any road and traffic contaminants. Shims and washers should be compatible with the materials used in the base plates or bolts. The Engineer should ensure that the lapping arrangements for the beams are specified on the Drawings. GS 11.49 Concrete Footings Posts with concrete footings should be used for the first post nearest an anchorage in poor ground, or if the clearance between the traffic face of the fence and the face of an obstruction is less than 1 m. Concrete footing to posts should be either 350 mm in diameter, or 310 mm x 310 mm, and should be 950 mm deep overall. The footing should not protrude more than 75 mm above the surrounding ground. Where, in locally low ground, more than 75 mm of concrete has been exposed, the concrete footing should be lowered and a longer post installed (ensuring that the length of post in the footing is not reduced to less than 320 mm) in order to maintain the line of the fence. The exposed concrete should be sloped from the post to ground level by about 1 in 10. Where these conditions cannot be met, the ground level may be raised. Where there is a risk of driven posts or standard concrete footings interfering with cables, ducts and drains, and the alignment of the fence cannot be adjusted to avoid the underground obstruction, or the depth of the pavement construction is such that the standard driven post or concrete footing would not penetrate into the subgrade, special footings may be required, such as concrete ground beams or slab foundation on which post base plates can be bolted. These should be shown on the Drawings and designed to ensure the post will yield before movement of the foundation takes place. The foundation for the posts should be able to resist an overturning moment of 6,000 Nm with a deflection of 100 mm. Where there is doubt as to the adequacy of the post foundations, the ground where the posts are to be installed should be tested on the Site. Testing of posts already installed is not recommended due to the difficulty in ensuring that the load is applied perpendicularly, but where posts are set in concrete or where it is not possible to drive the tee-section test post, tests on installed posts may be carried out by the use of a sleeve placed over the posts.
11.7

2006 Edition

The test to determine the suitability of post foundations is as follows: (a) A 102 mm x 102 mm x 14.53 Kg/m mild steel tee-section test post should be used. The distribution plate is welded onto the tee flange of the driver post and the post is driven vertically into the ground. For concrete footings, the post should be either mounted in a socket or bolted to the top of the footing using the standard bridge deck post fixings. (b) When a horizontal load is applied at a convenient height and at right angles to the tee flange, a bending moment of 6,000 Nm should be achieved at ground level before deflection of the post exceeds 100 mm measured at a distance 600 mm above ground level. Where this criterion cannot be achieved, a long driver post will be required, unless it is considered that the deflection requirement would still not be met because of poor ground conditions, in which case, concrete foundations should be used. Concrete footings should be used for untensioned beam barriers installed on footways.

11.8

2006 Edition

PART 5: KERBS, EDGINGS AND QUADRANTS MATERIALS

GS 11.52 Granite Kerbs, Edgings and Quadrants Old granite kerbs taken up from road reconstruction projects or road realignment works should be re-used as far as possible. However, mixed use of granite and precast concrete kerbs in the same section of a carriageway should be avoided.

11.9

2006 Edition

PART 6: FOOTWAYS, CYCLETRACKS AND PAVED AREAS CONSTRUCTION OF FOOTWAYS, CYCLETRACKS AND PAVED AREAS
GS 11.57 In-situ Concrete Footways, Cycle-tracks and Paved Areas The Engineer should ensure that all required jointing details are specified on the Drawings or in the PS.

11.10

2006 Edition

PART 7: PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS FOR PAVING GLOSSARY OF TERMS

GS 11.60 Unit Two types of precast concrete units of Grade A and Grade B units respectively are used. Grade A units are considered as high-quality concrete pavers which shall have some additional properties that are not required for Grade B units. These additional properties include abrasion resistance and the use of UV-stable colour pigments as stated in GS Clause 11.66, and dimensional deviations, slip/skid resistance, and water absorption as stated in GS Clause 11.69. Both Grade A and Grade B units shall be tested for bending strength and compressive strength in accordance with GS Clauses 11.84 and 11.85 respectively. The additional testing requirements for Grade A units are stated in GS Clauses 11.86 to 11.88 inclusive.

MATERIALS
GS 11.67 Sand Two types of sand are used, namely sand for bedding and sand for filling joints. Sand for bedding should be of a coarse grade to provide a good foundation for the units. Sand for filling joints should be of a finer grading to ensure that the joints are properly filled up for load transfer from unit to unit. However, sand with a silt content (percentage passing the 75 m sieve) of less than 5%, but complying with the other grading requirements stated in Table 11.2 of the GS, may also be used at the discretion of the Engineer. In such cases, the compaction procedure described in GS Clause 11.78(3) should be followed to ensure complete filling of the joints.

LAYING UNITS
GS 11.74 Laying Units Edge restraints are of prime importance to prevent units from migrating outwards and joints from opening, and to ensure successful interlocking. It is therefore essential to make sure that the kerbs or edgings that are to provide the edge restraints, are adequately installed and have attained the required strength before units are laid.

11.11

2006 Edition

REINSTATEMENT OF UNITS
GS 11.80 Reinstatement of Units Besides units taken up to facilitate the excavation works, those units adjoining the excavation which have been loosened or dislocated should also be taken up and re-laid as part of the reinstatement works.

11.12

2006 Edition

APPENDIX 11.1 DETERMINATION OF CHARACTERISTIC COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF INTERLOCKING BLOCKS

GS 11.1.4 (3) Calculation For compliance checking of the characteristic compressive strength of most structural elements, it is usual to determine the characteristic strength (Cc) by adopting a 90% confidence level that not more than 5 percent of the element strength falls below the Cc value. However, paving blocks are not considered as critical structural elements and it is considered appropriate for characteristic strengths of a lower confidence level as determined by the equation Cc = Cm - 1.65s.

11.13

2006 Edition

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 12 TRAFFIC SIGNS, ROAD MARKINGS AND ROAD STUDS

12.1

2006 Edition

12.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 12 TRAFFIC SIGNS, ROAD MARKINGS AND ROAD STUDS

PART 1: TRAFFIC SIGNS FABRICATION OF TRAFFIC SIGNS
GS 12.10 Posts for Traffic Signs The Engineer should calculate the number, type and size, and material of posts required to satisfy the structural requirements of BS 873:Part 7. GS 12.13 (1) Faces for Traffic Signs Only vertical and horizontal joints should be permitted and all joints in plastic sheeting should overlap by not less than 6 mm. The overlap in the horizontal joints should be from the top. Butt joint in plastics sheeting should not be used except between individual planks.

CONSTRUCTION AND ASSEMBLY OF TRAFFIC SIGNS

GS 12.18 Construction and Assembly of Traffic Signs It has been assumed that all individual traffic signs or directional signs will be supported by means of a reinforced concrete foundation block. The relevant details are given in the HyD Standard Drawings. The surfaces of rivets and bolts on the faces of traffic signs or directional signs shall be painted to match the colour of the sign-face as far as possible with which they are in contact.

12.3

2006 Edition

PART 2: ROAD MARKINGS GLOSSARY OF TERMS

GS 12.22 Road Markings It should be stated in the PS, cross-referenced to the appropriate Drawing, whether thermoplastic material, paint or other special materials are required and where they are to be applied, and if thermoplastic material is required, whether it should be screed or spray applied. If a special material is required, full requirements should be included in the PS.

MATERIALS
GS 12.23 (1) Hot Applied Thermoplastic Material Hot applied thermoplastic material, either screed-applied or spray-applied, is recommended for use on all types of roads, except for specific road sections where the use of road-marking paints is considered more appropriate by the Engineer, e.g. for roads inside tunnels. Dusty conditions inside tunnels will lead to dirt and grease contamination of the road markings rapidly, so road markings inside tunnels need to be replaced at relatively short intervals. Road-marking paint is considered more suitable for being used in this condition because it is easier to be removed and re-applied than thermoplastic material. It is generally observed that synthetic hydrocarbon resin-based thermoplastic material is more susceptible to staining which is hard to remove. This material is, therefore, not recommended for use at locations that are subject to frequent wheel passes, e.g. centre lane lines. Alkyd-resin based thermoplastic material is more suitable for use at heavily trafficked locations. The binder for this material should consist of maleic-modified glycerol ester of wood resin and should not contain petroleum-based hydrocarbon resins, tall oil resins, blends of tall oil resins, and wood rosin or similar derivatives. GS 12.24 (1) Cold Applied Preformed Material Cold applied preformed material should only be permitted for use as temporary road markings on carriageways. The Engineer should include in the PS limitations as to where the proprietary type approved materials will be acceptable. For example, materials that are only available in 100 mm and 150 mm wide strips should not be used to form warning arrows, etc. Others should not be used on particularly rough surfaces, such as a surface-dressed finish.

(3)

12.4

2006 Edition

LAYING ROAD MARKINGS

GS 12.33 (3) Preparation of Surfaces Thermoplastic material normally penetrates into bituminous friction courses causing difficulties in removal of the corresponding road markings. Neither high-pressure water jetting, shot blasting, nor rotary grinding is a suitable method for removing thermoplastic road markings on friction courses because of possible silting of the friction course material. When required, it is recommended to remove the markings by milling off the affected areas in strips of 300 mm minimum width and resurfacing them with friction course material by manual placement. However, before resurfacing, the milled surface should be reasonably regulated. The regulated surface should not be lower than the surfaces of the adjacent impermeable layers in order to avoid the possibility of ponding water. Other alternative removal methods that do not jeopardise the draining behaviour of friction course material could be accepted subject to a satisfactory trial. Engineers are requested to liaise with the Research and Development Division of Highways Department for any trials. Existing road markings of thermoplastic materials or paints that are to be overlaid with bituminous surfacing materials do not need to be removed. However, the relevant markings should be tack-coated before laying the surfacing materials. The purpose of this GS Clause is to avoid damaging the joints. The longitudinal or transverse joints should include those joints around manholes and utility pits. Use of Road Marking Paint Road marking paints shall only be used to cope with the particular site conditions under the specific approval of the Engineer. GS 12.39 Skid Resistance Level A figure of 55 for skid resistance of road markings may be specified in the particular specifications for potentially hazardous locations, e.g. where braking or turning is likely to occur on large areas of road surface covered by the road marking materials, if considered necessary by the Engineer.

(5)

(6)

GS 12.36

REMOVING ROAD MARKINGS

GS 12.41 Shot-blasting Machine This specification is only applicable where the existing road marking is directed by the Engineer to be removed by using steel shot-blasting. In normal circumstances, road markings can be removed by using a grinding machine.

12.5

2006 Edition

PART 3: ROAD STUDS MATERIALS

GS 12.42 (2) Road Studs Only those road studs approved by the Highways Department are permitted for use on public roads. The types and limitations of use of the approved road studs should be included in the PS. A detailed list giving the above particulars of the currently approved road studs and the relevant specification for reflecting road studs are available at the Research and Development Division of the Highways Department. The attachment of traffic cylinders to road studs is undertaken mainly for traffic diversions. However, for the sake of safety, traffic cones together with traffic cylinders, are often used during traffic diversions. Thus, the benefits of attaching traffic cylinders to the studs are not so obvious in most cases. When assessing the acceptability of road studs as lane line markers on dual carriageway trunk roads and primary distributors, the officer should place the emphasis on the road studs performance with regard to their resistance to displacement and wear, photometric behaviour and adhesive system. Road studs that are only bonded to the road surface and are not anchored into the road should not be used as lane line markers on dual carriageway trunk roads and primary distributors. They may, however, be used on structures that might be detrimentally affected by anchored road studs. (4) Temporary reflecting road studs are used for temporary traffic demarcation over a short period of time (up to 4 months). The road studs are designed to be removable without damaging the road surface and should, therefore, be fixed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. These types of road studs should not be reused.

(3)

12.6

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 13 WORK FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

13.1

2006 Edition

13.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 13 WORK FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

ELECTRICAL EARTHING SYSTEMS
GS 13.22 (1) & (2) Electrical Earthing Systems PS clauses stipulating any specific requirements, such as for the earthing system for security fences, are to be included, where appropriate.

GROUTING FOR INSTALLATIONS

GS 13.23 (2) & (3)

ELECTRICAL

AND

MECHANICAL

Grouting for Electrical and Mechanical Installations As grouting affects the electrical and mechanical installation work, the Engineer should liaise with the Electrical and Mechanical Services Department (EMSD) or a relevant party responsible for the electrical and mechanical installation work regarding the timing for the grouting work.

COMPLETION AND PROTECTION OF WORK ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

GS 13.24 (8) Completion of Work for Electrical and Mechanical Installations

FOR

A PS clause stating the period of the temporary power supply for the installation of electrical and mechanical equipment should be included. Prior consultation and agreement with EMSD or a relevant party for responsible for the electrical and mechanical installation work on the required period is necessary.

TOLERANCES
GS 13.26 Tolerances: Floors of Switchgear Rooms The Engineer should satisfy himself that the switchgear rooms can be designed to meet the tolerance specified in this GS Clause. If necessary, he should consult EMSD or a relevant party for responsible for the electrical and mechanical installation work for a relaxation of the specification and amend it accordingly with a PS clause. The specified tolerance may be difficult to achieve, particularly when a structure not founded on piles has to be erected in a newly reclaimed area, where significant differential settlements may occur.
13.3

2006 Edition

INSPECTION OF WORK FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

GS 13.28 (1) & (2)

ELECTRICAL

AND

Inspection of Work for Electrical and Mechanical Installations Inspection of work for electrical and mechanical installations is usually carried out together with the electrical/mechanical staff, and close liaison with EMSD or a relevant party responsible for the electrical and mechanical installation work is therefore essential.

TESTING: EARTHING CONTINUITY

GS 13.29 (1) Testing: Earthing Continuity See guidance notes on GS Clause 13.28(1) & (2).

TESTING: LOAD TESTS ON BEAMS AND JOISTS

GS 13.31 Testing: Load Tests on Beams and Joists See guidance notes on GS Clause 13.28(1) & (2).

13.4

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 14 FORMWORK AND FINISHES TO CONCRETE

14.1

2006 Edition

14.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 14 FORMWORK AND FINISHES TO CONCRETE

NOTE
It is important to consider exactly what sort of end result is required when specifying formwork. It is uneconomic to specify a higher grade of finish than is justified. It is also important to realise that it is extremely difficult to achieve a high degree of consistency of texture and colour in a plain flat surface. Many factors affect the appearance of the finished concrete. These may include the surface of the formwork, the length of time before stripping, the release agents used, and the mix proportions and constituents. In many instances, a decorative finish may be required. Where paints are used to serve a purpose more than decoration, such as offering protection against carbonation, chloride ingress etc., reference should be made to the manufacturers manual for protective coatings for concrete and their references of applications. A particular specification clause may be drafted for the special paint. Use of tropical hardwood is strictly prohibited under GS Clause 14.01.

MATERIALS
GS 14.14 Formwork Reference should be made to Works Branch Technical Circular No. 32/92 about alternatives to tropical hardwood. If the plywood sheathing is proposed for re-use, the criteria under GS Clause 14.14(2) should be followed. GS 14.16 Release Agents For high-class finishes, the release agent is very important and should be tested on the trial panel. Some release agents could be washed off by rain, or scuffed off by pedestrian traffic (e.g. on bridge soffit). In these circumstances GS, Clause 14.16(6) applies. It should also be remembered that rusty reinforcement might generate a considerable amount of rust particles that may appear on soffit if the wrong type of release agent is used. As far as self-consolidating/self-compacting concrete (SCC) is concerned, it places explicit demands on type and application rate of mould release agents because of its ability to achieve a very high quality of surface finish. Much formwork used for SCC will be steel or resin surfaced plywood. These are either non-absorbent or have very low absorbency. Excess release agent at the form face and concrete interface can result in staining, retention of air bubbles and other imperfections.

14.3

2006 Edition

Vegetable, mineral or water based mould release agents need to be applied extremely thinly, almost to the point that they are just wiped on with a piece of cloth. It is also imperative that the mould release agents have not been diluted or adulterated in any way. SCC will normally allow entrapped air to escape between the concrete and the formwork. Consequently, the release agent must also be of a type that that allows air to migrate in a controlled manner and escape from the concrete. Certain release agents, when used in combination with impermeable formwork, are too viscous to allow air to escape effectively and this can result in air voids adhering to the surface of the formwork, resulting in blowholes in the concrete. Without pre-evaluation, release agents should only be used with permeable or semi-permeable formwork in order to ensure a reliable surface finish. (Ref. The European Guidelines for Self Compacting Concrete, May 2005: http//www.efnarc.org)

SUBMISSIONS
GS 14.21 Particulars of Formwork and Finishes to Concrete and Samples of Materials Submission of formwork drawings is required for Class F4, F5 and T finishes. Joints between panels of plywood will always show on the finished concrete and it is, therefore, important that their location is carefully considered. It should be remembered that plywood is normally supplied in imperial dimensions (8 ft x 4 ft, 6 ft x 3 ft etc.). The positions of formwork ties should also be carefully considered. GS Clause 14.30 should also be noted. If the sheathing is timber plywood and subject to re-use, the methodology of identifying and recording number of uses shall be submitted. GS Clause 14.14(2) and 14.36(4) should also be noted.

TRIAL PANELS
GS 14.22 Trial Panels Trial panels are indispensable, but trial panels of 2 m square will not necessarily indicate what will happen in the permanent works where higher lifts are likely. Where it is envisaged that high lifts with special finishes will be a part of the permanent works, a PS clause requiring larger trial panels should be specified. The movement of formwork during concreting is a major problem, so particular attention should be paid to the design and construction of walings, struts, ties, etc.

14.4

2006 Edition

GS 14.25

Changes in Materials and Methods of Construction A change in virtually any aspect of the operation will affect the appearance of the finished work. If changes are unavoidable, it may be prudent to order a new trial panel to assess these effects when the finished appearance is an important consideration.

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK

GS 14.28 Design and Construction of Falsework and Formwork Allowance should be made for the elastic deformation of falsework and ground supports under the weight of fresh concrete, particularly when casting up against hardened concrete. Consideration should also be given to the loadings due to asymmetrical placement of concrete and uplift. Self-consolidating/compacting concrete (SCC) is nowadays commonly used because it needs practically little compaction inside formwork of congested reinforcement. However, there is a high uncertainty about the magnitude of pressure exerted on the formwork. There are no proven formulae for accurate assessment of the lateral pressure due to SCC. In view of uncertainty and complex variables in connection with SCC, a full hydrostatic pressure may be assumed. A prototype should be set up on site to measure the actual pressure on the formwork due to the SCC used on that project. On many projects, the initial cost of setting up prototypes can be mitigated effectively by the cost savings achieved through consideration of realistic concrete pressures. Under-designed formwork would bend or break during the concrete-filling process (especially if filled with a high-pressure concrete pump). Designers may refer to the design recommendations at Appendix 14-A Lateral pressure for formwork design and Appendix 14-B Summary of ACI formulae on lateral pressure for formwork design. GS 14.29 Construction of Formwork If self-consolidating/compacting concrete (SCC) is pumped from the bottom then locally, pressure can be above hydrostatic close to the pump entry point, especially on restart if there is an interruption in pumping. Trials have shown that, with an appropriate level of thixotropy, formwork pressure below hydrostatic can be achieved when casting from the top but should only be used on the basis of verification trials and agreement between the contractor, producer and formwork supplier. The high flowability of SCC can result in flotation of any buoyant formwork units, stop ends or detailing that is not securely fixed. Particular attention should be paid to fixing and sealing the formwork to the base where uplift could be a problem. Leakage at joints can occur and reduce an otherwise high quality of finish. However, SCC generally leaks less than concrete that has to be vibrated.
14.5

2006 Edition

Because full hydrostatic concrete pressure is to be assumed when using SCC, particular attention should be paid to both the outer supports and the tie-rod system and spacing to ensure that the formwork cannot deform during placing of concrete. Preparation of formwork for SCC SCC normally produces a very high quality finish giving a mirror copy of the formwork. This gives opportunity for enhanced design but if care is not taken, SCC shows up any deficiencies in the formwork material, finish or the release agent and this will detract from the final appearance. Movement at joints or bending of the formwork under pressure from the concrete may also be more noticeable with SCC. Good formwork preparation as detailed below applies to all types of concrete but is essential if the surface finish of SCC is to be optimised. (Ref. The European Guidelines for Self Compacting Concrete, May 2005: http//www.efnarc.org) GS 14.32 Built-in Components Water frequently finds its way into voids in structures. should, therefore, always be provided. Adequate drain outlets

APPLICATION OF RELEASE AGENTS

GS 14.33 Application of Release Agents The uniform application of release agent is essential if a uniform appearance of the concrete is required.

INSPECTION OF FORMWORK AND REINFORCEMENT

GS 14.34 Inspection of Formwork and Reinforcement Particular attention should be paid to the cover to reinforcement in profiled sections when carrying out final inspections. Useful guidelines are given in Guide to Formwork for Concrete, ACI Committee 347.

14.6

2006 Edition

TREATED FINISHES
GS 14.38 Treated Finishes It is important to ensure that the surface layer of concrete is not contaminated, for example, by tying wires that may be exposed by the applied treatment. GS 14.39 Class T1 Finish The use of surface retarders needs particular care. The appropriate application rate and optimum stripping time should be determined by trials. These may be done initially on small panels. GS 14.41 Class T4 Finish The direction of hammer blows to produce a broken rib finish has a pronounced effect on the finished appearance. Pleasing effects can be produced by using both left-hand and right-hand blows in a pattern. If this is required, a PS clause will be needed.

WORK ON CONCRETE SURFACES

GS 14.45 Remedial and Repair Work on Concrete Surfaces Surface-applied remedial work should be limited to correcting minor blemishes. Honeycombing and other major faults should be cut out entirely and replaced.

14.7

2006 Edition

APPENDIX 14-A LATERAL PRESSURE FOR FORMWORK DESIGN

1. For the design of formwork for normal concrete, designers may refer to the paper Lateral Pressure for Formwork Design by M. K. Hurd published in Concrete International, June 2007. This paper states that as early as 1958, the American Concrete Institute (ACI) Committee 347 (the then Committee 622), Formwork for Concrete, had studied available field measurements of lateral pressures on formwork and used the data to develop pressure formulae that could be used safely for form design. These formulae were carried forward through successive ACI standards until 2001, when accumulating data on lateral pressures enabled the committee to introduce new coefficients for unit weight and chemistry of the mixture, expanding coverage of the formulae to mixtures with cement replacements, admixtures, or both. A summary of the M. K. Hurds paper listing the ACI formulae on lateral pressure for formwork design is tabled at Appendix 14-B. 2. Self-consolidating concrete (SCC) is becoming more commonly used. The following two articles published in the Concrete International in October 2004 and October 2005 respectively may be useful for assessment of form pressures generated by SCC. (i) Formwork for Self-Consolidating Concrete by David Fedroff and Robert J. Frosch (October 2004/Concrete International).

(ii) Form Pressures Generated by Self-Consolidating Concrete by Peter Billberg, Johan Silfwerbrand and Thomas Osterberg (October 2005/Concrete International) 3. In the first paper Formwork for Self-Consolidating Concrete, the last sentence of the paragraph with heading Comparison to Traditional Concrete is cited here: ACI Committee 347 continues to recommend the full liquid head for SCC, however, indicating that there is still great uncertainty in the lateral pressure created by SCC. Contractors are concerned about the costs involved in designing for full liquid pressure since formwork costs are a considerable percentage of the total cost of concrete construction. In the last paragraph with heading Prototype Placements Recommended, the authors stated that based on the results of their study, there existed a potential for formwork to be designed for pressures lower than the full liquid head. They recommended that a prototype wall segment be constructed and the concrete pressures measured for the selected mixture proportions. Alternatively, a prototype could be constructed based on the pressures estimated using ACI SP-4 to verify that the formwork strength and deflections are adequate. The reason is that on many projects, the initial cost of setting up prototype could be mitigated effectively by the cost savings achieved through consideration of realistic concrete pressures. 4. In the second paper Form Pressures Generated by Self-Consolidating Concrete, the study on the 8 numbers of walls tested showed that all maximum form pressures were less than the full liquid pressure and that the form pressure would equal the hydrostatic pressure at casting rates around 3 to 3.5 m/hour. This paper concluded that the influence of casting rate on form pressures was obvious with increased rate giving an increased pressure. 5. It is recommended by these Guidance Notes that care should be taken to assess the pressures on the formwork due to the SCC since underestimation could lead to formwork collapse and possible fatal injuries. It is of great importance to predict and control the form pressure due to SCC. It is advisable to set up a prototype on site to collect the data from actual measurements and verify the assumptions used in the calculations. The rate of concrete placement should also be controlled.
14.8

2006 Edition

6. The above papers only deal with the hydrostatic pressure due to concrete. If pumped concrete is used, designers should pay attention to the extra pressure on the formwork due to the pressure exerted by the pump on the concrete at the piston head. This situation is very common in installation of tunnel linings, or structural elements of building projects where the high-pressure concrete pump has to be used. Designers should get the information of pumping from the Contractor for assessment of the extra pressure. If the formwork is not designed to cater for the extra pressure due to the high-pressure concrete pump, the formwork might bend or even break during the concrete-filling process.

14.9

2006 Edition

APPENDIX 14-B SUMMARY OF ACI FORMULAE ON LATERAL PRESSURE FOR FORMWORK DESIGN
Type of structural element Maximum plan dimension of element, w (m) Workability, slump (mm) Compaction vibration intensity Internal vibration to a depth (m) Depth of plastic concrete from the top of a placement to the point under consideration in the form, h (m) Rate of concrete placement, R (m/hour) Maximum lateral pressure, pmax (kPa) < 2.1 Column 2.0 175 Normal 1.2 4.2 2.1 - 4.5 >4.2 <2.2 > 4.5 (Rapid) pmax=gh Wall >2.0 All types >175 Intensive

Concrete density coefficient, Cw

Lower limit for maximum lateral pressure, pmax, lower (kPa) Upper limit for maximum lateral pressure, pmax, upper (kPa) < 2240 kg/m3

pmax = CwCc[7.2+785R/(T+17.8)] pmax = CwCc[7.2+ See Remark 3 (1156+ 244R)/(T+17.8)] (Applies to Walls) See Remark 4. 30Cw

gh
0.5[1+( / 2320)] or 0.80, whichever is greater 1.0

=2240 - 2400 kg/m3 > 2400 kg/m3

Type I, II, and III cements without retarders Type I, II and III cements with a retarder Other types or blends containing less than 70% slag or 40% fly ash without retarders Other types or blends containing less than 70% slag or 40% fly ash with a retarder Blends containing more than 70% slag or 40% fly ash

/ 2320
1.0 1.2 -

Chemistry coefficient, Cc

1.4

Remarks: 1. Symbols:

- concrete density, in kg/m3

g - the gravitational constant of 9.81 N/kg T - Concrete temperature during placement, in C 2. ASTM C150-02a Type I, II and III cements are ordinary, sulphate resistant, high early strength Portland cements, respectively. 3. The first equation pmax = CwCc[7.2+785R/(T+17.8)] applies for concrete with a slump of 175 mm or less placed in (a) column forms with normal internal vibration to a depth of 1.2m or less, and (b) in walls with a rate of placement less than 2.1 m/hour and a placement height of 4.2m or less. 4. The second equation (pmax = CwCc[7.2+ (1156+ 244R)/(T+17.8)] applies for concrete with a slump of 175 mm or less to all walls with a placement rate of 2.1 to 4.5 m/hour, and to walls placed at less than 2.2 m/hour, but having a placement height greater than 4.2m. Reference: 1. M.K. Murd, Lateral Pressures for Formwork Design, Concrete International, June 2007, pp.31- 33. 2. ACI Committee 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete (ACI 347-04). 14.10

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 15 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

15.1

2006 Edition

15.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 15 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

MATERIALS
GS 15.03 Bar Reinforcement and Fabric Reinforcement If large-diameter high strength bars are needed, say in very heavily loaded structural elements, they can be specified in the PS, but it would be advisable to give suppliers sufficient notice of this requirement. Advice can be obtained from the Public Works Central Laboratory. GS 15.04 Stainless Steel Reinforcement With reference to para. 2.2 in Chapter 4 (Project Design and Estimates) of the Project Administrating Handbook, project offices need to carry out in the preliminary design stage comparison of the order of costs for alternative schemes in order that the most suitable scheme is selected. The Handbooks is posted on the CEDD website: http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/standards_handbooks/stan_pah.htm. Comparison should be conducted by using the concept of life cycle costing. Where structures need to achieve a long design life (e.g. 120 years for highway structures) and account for the life cycle costing (including the costs incurred in the future maintenance stage), stainless steel reinforcement in good-quality concrete may be a good solution. This option has been adopted in large bridge structures built in marine conditions. GS 15.05 Epoxy Coatings to Reinforcement Epoxy-coated steel should be considered at locations where the exposure conditions are particularly severe and where the design life requirement would be difficult to meet with ordinary steel. In general, epoxy-coated steel should not be mixed with plain steel. Epoxy-coated steel is likely to cost more than plain steel, and will require considerably more supervision from both the Contractor and the Engineer if it is to be used properly. Designers are recommended to check the current literature/manufacturers instructions on the epoxy material that is to be included in the PS clauses. GS 15.06 Hot Dip Galvanizing to Reinforcement Hot dip galvanization (HDG) is now to comply with the new European code adopted by the British Standards (BS EN ISO 1461:1999). Designers should consider the use of HDG in order to combat the exposure conditions and achieve the design life particular to that structure. HDG as a corrosion-prevention measure is mature at present and its inclusion in good-quality concrete to minimize maintenance, enhance the durability of concrete and prolong the working life of reinforced concrete is well practised and documented. Designers have to assess the effectiveness and life-cycle costing to meet the requirement laid down in Chapter 4 of the Project Administration Handbook.
15.3

2006 Edition

To draw the international experience, designers are recommended to refer to the material of the seminar delivered by Professor Stephen Yeomans in the Annual Concrete Seminar 2005 conducted in Hong Kong by the SCCT (Ref. Archives of the CEDD website: http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/archives/concrete_seminar05/index.htm) The seminar revealed the following merits of using HDG on steel reinforcement:

Zinc alloys afford protection and sacrifices protection to the base metal Zinc coating provides pH reduction of concrete Zinc coating provides higher tolerance to chlorides than black steel, thus Increases service life 4 to 5 times over black steel

Professor Yeomans estimated that whilst black steel in concrete would initiate corrosion due to chlorides after 15 years, hot dip galvanized steel would initiate corrosion in 44 years on the zinc coating, which inferred a three times life extension compared with black steel. Ongoing protection would be offered to the steel by the zinc coating. Chlorides would attack the base metal only after when the coating is dissolved. The additional cost of using HDG in protecting the reinforcement is only small percentage of the project cost and even smaller in terms of the life cycle cost. Examples showing applications of HDG to reinforcement:

Precast claddings and architectural elements Surface exposed structural elements Prefabricated building modules Immersed or buried structures or elements Coastal, marine and industrial structures Transport infrastructure High-risk structures and prestigious construction

Galvanized reinforcement should not be mixed with plain bars in structural elements. Attention should be paid to the need for obtaining the original certificate from the manufacturer as stated in GS Clause 15.14. GS 15.08 Cover Spacers Cover spacers should not indent formwork, and if made of concrete or mortar, should be of the same colour and surface texture as the parent concrete when finish is an important consideration. See also the Guidance Notes on Section l4 of the GS.

15.4

2006 Edition

GS 15.10

Tying Wire The ends of wire ties should not protrude into the cover concrete. It is also important that offcuts are not allowed to accumulate in the bottom of shutters. Designers should consider whether stainless steel tying wire should be specified in areas other than those covered in this GS Clause. The electro-potential difference between stainless and mild steel is negligible.

SUBMISSIONS
GS 15.12 Particulars of Bar Reinforcement and Fabric Reinforcement The Public Works Central Laboratory issues regular bulletins on reinforcement that should be referred to when considering submitted details. GS 15.14 (b) Particulars of Galvanized Coatings to Reinforcement The results of tests to the new code BS EN ISO 1461:1999 include thickness of coating instead of weight and uniformity of coating as required by the old code BS 729.

HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

GS 15.19 (1) Storage of Reinforcement This is a new green sub-clause in the GS, 2006 Edition aiming to minimize the rusting of steel bars, which used to be found in technical audits. Since it is difficult and time-consuming to remove loose rust from steel bars, it would be better to adopt preventive measures of requiring the Contractor to provide a proper storage to protect the bars from being affected by the weather and rusting.

CUTTING AND BENDING REINFORCEMENT

GS 15.20 (3) Cutting and Bending Reinforcement Sometimes, it is unavoidable to rebend the reinforcement, for example, where temporary openings in reinforced concrete elements have to be formed. However, Grade 460/425 reinforcement bars shall not be rebent and straightened out after bending. In these circumstances, consideration should be given to the use of threaded connectors or a revision of reinforcement details.

15.5

2006 Edition

SURFACE CONDITION OF REINFORCEMENT

GS 15.21 Surface Condition of Reinforcement It is difficult to define the allowable degree of rust on reinforcement. CIRIA report 7l (l977) is a useful reference. The photographs at Appendix 15-A show a range of surface condition. Although an objective standard cannot be set, the Standing Committee on Concrete Technology considers that the examples numbered 1-6 would not be acceptable, and 7-18 would. It is sometimes feasible to clean rusty reinforcement that would otherwise be unacceptable. A lot of loose rust and scale can be removed by simply lifting and dropping the steel bars onto a hard surface.

FIXING REINFORCEMENT
GS 15.25 Welding of Reinforcement The weldability of reinforcement is governed by the maximum carbon equivalent value of the steel as given in BS 4449. Bars with a carbon equivalent value greater than the maximum allowable value are marked, in accordance with BS 4449, with a pair of dashes parallel to the bar at not more than 1.3 m centres.

TOLERANCES
GS 15.28 (2) Tolerances: Reinforcement It is extremely important to ensure that adequate cover to the outermost layer of reinforcement is provided for achieving durability of the structure, and should be checked rigorously. If there is any doubt about the requirement of minimum cover shown on the drawings, clarification should be sought from the Designer. The cover should thus be not less than the minimum cover plus a 5 mm tolerance for fixing precision. Designers should note that closely spaced bars with smaller cover would give narrower cracks than widely spaced bars with larger cover. Therefore, excessive concrete cover will result in increase of crack width, which is undesirable.

15.6

2006 Edition

INSPECTION OF REINFORCEMENT
GS 15.29 Inspection of Reinforcement All reinforcement should be carefully checked in place before the Contractor is permitted to pour the concrete. Reinforcement bars should be checked for diameter, spacing, adequacy of fixing, surface condition, adequacy of spacers and chairs, cover and general cleanliness. There have been situations where the main reinforcement bars were placed on the wrong side (e.g. retaining walls), so the Engineers Representative (ER) should check the bars with drawings taken to site. When checking the reinforcement drawings, the ER may find that the bars are too congested with inadequate clearance for concrete to pass through. This issue should be referred to the designer for an effective solution, which may involve adjusting the size of bars or using high-workability concrete. The issue should be resolved as early as possible to avoid any delay to progress of works. The safety/stability of the reinforcement should be checked carefully as well, because there have been cases of collapse of reinforcement cage for columns before formwork is erected around the cage. The ER should pay particular attention to any potential risk during site inspections.

15.7

2006 Edition

15.8

2006 Edition

15.9

2006 Edition

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 16 CONCRETE AND JOINTS IN CONCRETE

16.1

2006 Edition

16.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 16 CONCRETE AND JOINTS IN CONCRETE

PART 1: CONCRETE WORKS NOTE
In modern concrete construction, emphasis is placed on the durability of the finished product. The life of a reinforced concrete structure (that is the time before repairs become uneconomical) depends in most cases on the quality of concrete and thickness of the cover to the reinforcement. Unfortunately, protection provided by the concrete cover is most susceptible to the effects of poor mix design and poor workmanship. Inadequately-fixed reinforcement, an insufficient number of spacers and movement of formwork can lead to reduced cover. Poor mix design, inadequate compaction and curing, and poor detailing (such as heavily congested areas of reinforcement), can lead to poor quality of the cover concrete. High water:cement ratios may lead to cracking and concrete with a high permeability which reduces the durability of concrete. High concrete temperatures may lead to shrinkage cracking, and in extreme cases, to extensive internal micro-cracking. A durable concrete mix requires a suitable mix design with sufficient workability at low water content. It frequently requires the use of superplasticizer and suitable supplementary ingredient such as PFA and in special occasions, ground granulated blastfurnace slag (GGBS) and microsilica. PFA is relatively cheap as it is a bi-product of coal-fired station and is produced locally. GGBS and microsilica are imported materials. Microsilica is much finer than cement and will enhance the packing of concrete. It must be emphasized that the GS is suitable for general concrete works, but needs to be amplified or modified by suitable PS clauses when concrete is subject to other than general performance requirements. For example, special requirements for road pavement concrete in Section l0 of the GS. Concrete in marine structures, in massive sections, such as pile caps, of unusually high strength etc., should be carefully considered and suitable PS clauses are written to cover special requirements, such as temperature control, high PFA content, density, high early strength, etc. Designers of concrete structures should bear in mind that ease of construction and maintainability of finished products are to be achieved as far as possible. Supervisors should pay special attention to reinforcement fixing, formwork erection, the quality of the concrete, its placing and compaction, and particularly curing of concrete. Alkali silica reaction (ASR) can cause concrete to expand and crack. ASR can occur if the aggregate in the concrete is reactive and if unfavourable factors such as high active alkali content of the concrete mix are present. An interim measure to control ASR was given in WBTC No. 5/94. The control measure aims at limiting the alkali content of concrete to 3 kg/m3. For concrete adjacent to seawater, the Recommended specification for reinforced concrete in marine environment provides additional control against ASR. A more comprehensive ASR control framework endorsed by
16.3

2006 Edition

the Standing Committee on Concrete Technology (SCCT) for use in Hong Kong is given in GEO Report No 167. (Ref. http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/geo_reports/index.htm)

GENERAL
GS 16.02 (3) Designation of Concrete Mixes The Drawings may specify, say, Grade 30/20 concrete in a variety of locations and a range of workability may be required for satisfactory placing. Mix designs should be submitted by the Contractor for these different mixes and they should be identified accordingly, e.g. Grade 30/20/75 (75 mm slump).

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
GS 16.05 Grade Strength British Standards refer to characteristic strength. This is the strength that 5% of samples fail to reach if there is a normal distribution of sample strengths, and is, therefore, a function of the variability and mean strength of the concrete supplied. Since characteristic strength can only be determined in retrospect, it is not considered appropriate to specify it. Concrete that satisfies the acceptance criteria stated in the GS will have a characteristic strength at least equal to the grade strength specified, and for design purposes, the grade strength can be used as equivalent to characteristic strength.

MATERIALS
GS 16.06 (1) Cement Since the GS was first issued in 1992, the SCCT has reviewed the 1989, 1991, 1996 editions of BS 12 and BS EN 197-1:2000 and has recommended the adoption of BS EN 197-1:2000 for Portland cement (PC) and Portland fly ash cement (PFAC). The SCCT also agreed on requiring the auto-control system mentioned in BS EN 197-1:2000 but not the third-party certification requirement of BS EN 197-2:2000. Sulphate-resisting Portland cement (SRPC) is not included in BS EN 197-1:2000, and it is noted that BS 4027:1980 has been withdrawn and superseded by BS 4027:1996. The SCCT has agreed to refer BS 4027:1996 in respect of SRPC. SRPC should rarely be used. PFA concrete will normally provide better and cheaper resistance to sulphate attack. (See BRE Report No. 250, Concrete in sulphate-bearing soils and ground waters).

16.4

2006 Edition

(2)

The accuracy of the test currently available for determining the PFA content of PPFAC is 4%. Engineers will, therefore, have to use their professional judgement if a test result is reported at the limits specified in this GS Clause. If testing shows the PFA content of the cement to be regularly near the limits, the manufacturer may be queried. The Public Works Central Laboratory (PWCL) maintains a register of the commonly used brands of PC, PFA and PFAC used in Government contracts. Based on the register, PWCL conducts tests regularly. A bi-monthly report on the test results is compiled by PWCL and uploaded to CEDD website for general reference. The reports can be used for approval of a contractors proposal to use a certain brand of PC, PFA or PFAC; and monitoring of the continuous compliance with the specifications of the brands of PC, PFA and PFAC being used in their contracts.

(3)

GS 16.07

Pulverized Fly Ash (PFA) Because of the nature of the coal and the type of furnaces in the local power stations, the water requirement and lime content of local PFA may exceed the requirements of BS 3892. The water requirement of local PFA as determined in accordance with BS 3892 is generally about 100% compared with the BS requirement of 95% maximum. The lime content may sometimes exceed the BS requirement of 10% but as long as the lime content does not exceed 20% and the soundness value not more than 10 mm, this high-lime PFA may still be used. However, the use of local PFA may still lead to a reduction in the water demand of concrete for the same workability as an equivalent OPC mix.

GS 16.08

Aggregates Rock crushing plants are not normally considered as a source of producing aggregates of consistent quality and special care should be exercised when accepting aggregates from these plants for use in structural concrete. Recycled aggregates may be suitable for reuse in minor structures. Further advice can be obtained from the Geotechnical Engineering Office. Natural sand is mainly imported from Mainland China and the continued availability of which is not guaranteed in the future. Crushed rock fines can be used in lieu of natural sand with suitable adjustment of mix compositions.

(4)

The best measure to prevent the occurrence of Alkali-Silica Reaction (ASR) in concrete structures is to use inert aggregates. However, other measures supported with a suitable control framework may also achieve the same purpose. GEO Report No. 167 the 2004 Review on Prevention of Alkali Silica Reaction in concrete (ref. http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/geo_reports/index.htm) has depicted a comprehensive ASR control framework based on practicality and need. In Chapter 5 of the Project Administration Handbook (PAH) for Civil Engineering Works, Appendix 5.9 also provides coverage on a Particular Specification (PS) for control of ASR in Concrete. PS Clause 1.01(1) covers measures to prevent ASR in accordance with the framework in GEO Report 167, and states that alternative measures may be submitted to the Engineer for approval, but the Engineer is not obliged to accept any alternative measures, especially if a measure could limit the
16.5

2006 Edition

performance or use of the structure, or necessitate follow-up actions such as monitoring. Where control measures less or more stringent than those specified at Annex 1 of Appendix 5.9 are to be used in accordance with the control framework, an alternative set of particular specification should be worked out for inclusion in the contract documents. Before accepting the Contractors proposed measures to use reactive aggregates in the permanent structures, the Engineer must ensure that the Employer is well aware of and is willing to accept the obligations of taking up any follow-up actions such as monitoring and the limitations to the performance or use of the structures. Amd 2/2009 GS 16.09 Water Amd 2/2009 (2) When recycled water is proposed for use in concrete mix design already approved by the Engineer, additional trial mixes are generally not necessary. However, the Contractor will need to submit calculations to demonstrate that the 3 kg/m limit on alkali content of concrete is not exceeded. Curing Compound Because of environmental concerns, resin based curing compounds are not permitted. Although the Specification requires the compound to degrade within three weeks after application, this will not normally be essential. The important criterion is that curing should be effective.

GS 16.11 (2)

16.6

2006 Edition

CONCRETE
GS 16.12 Concrete Mix Standard mix concrete should rarely be used, except at the commencement of the Contract when the concrete mixing plant or designed concrete mix has not been approved. Designed mix concrete should be used as soon as approval is given by the Engineer. The standard mix concrete is specified by mix proportions and by limiting the cement type and the extent of use of an admixture (see GS Clause 16.15). The specified mix proportions given will result in concrete strengths in the order of 50% above the designated grade strength and will be less economic in terms of cost than would a similar grade designed mix concrete. The design slump value of 75 mm is considered a minimum at locations where reinforcement is congested. The object is to provide a workable concrete mix on Site to avoid operatives adding extra water before placing. (4) & (5) Although there are no technical reasons why the addition of PFA to a blended cement is not possible, for control purposes this practice is prohibited. A study on the strength development of high PFA content concrete was given in GEO Report No. 48 posted on the CEDD website: http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/geo_reports/index.htm. The study indicated that there is superior strength development of PFA concrete over the PC concrete in a high-temperature curing environment (75C over a 7-day period). It is thus considered that PFA concrete is most suitable for thick concrete elements where early application of design loading would not be expected. The mandatory use of PFA in both thick concrete pile caps and substructures was promulgated in the former Works Branch TC No. 2/97, which was deleted in 2007 upon incorporation of the requirement here. The TC also specified that the PFA must constitute at least 25% of the total cementitious content in such concrete. Chloride Content of Concrete The chloride content limits specified are based on those given in BS 8110, with some modification. With these limits, marine sand will not be acceptable for any concrete with embedded metal, unless it is thoroughly washed, which is unlikely. Also, the river sand available may not be acceptable for prestressed or steam-cured concrete, unless it is washed or mixed with quarry fines in the proportions of about 1:1. Laboratory tests have shown that typical values of chloride ion concentration of currently available materials are: Percentage by mass 0.002 0.02 0.015 0.01 to 0.1 0.5
16.7

(6)

GS 16.13

Mains water Cement Granite aggregates River Sand Marine Sand

2006 Edition

The chloride content of river sand should always be checked. Thus, for concrete with an aggregate:cement ratio shown in the following table, the chloride ion concentrations for various types of fine aggregate would be as shown in the last column. Aggregate: cement ratio 6 6 6 4 4 GS 16.14 Water: cement ratio 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.4 Fine aggregate type Granite fines River sand Marine sand Granite fines River sand Chloride ion as % of cement, about 0.1 0.3 1.3 0.07 0.2

Cementitious Content of Designed Mix Concrete For a properly-designed concrete mix, its strength will depend mainly on the water:cement ratio used. The lower the ratio, the higher the resulting strength provided that the required workability is achieved. Too high a cementitious content will lead to concern about heat of hydration and shrinkage, which may lead to premature mirocracking of the concrete. Too low a cementitious content may also lead to concern about strength and durability. It is, therefore, common to specify both the minimum and maximum cementitious content as well as the maximum water:cement ratio to ensure that the resulting concrete has sufficient strength and durability. In marine concrete, a maximum water:cement ratio of 0.38 is to be specified. The minimum cementitious contents stated in Table 16.2 of the GS are those with which the corresponding grade of concrete can be made only with a low water:cement ratio and very good quality control. Thus, if the designer wants a minimum cementitious content of, say, 350 kg/m3, for durability purposes, he should specify Grade 40. This will virtually guarantee the minimum cementitious content he requires, and ensure good quality concrete. One should not specify low grade with a high cementitious content as this is wasteful and may allow the contractor to use more water resulting in less durable concrete while meeting the strength requirement.

(4)

The maximum amount of PFA that can contribute to the strength of the concrete is about 60% of the cementitious content, but the maximum strength will not be achieved for a considerable period (12 months or more). The GS, therefore, allowed a 35% replacement in 1998. Standard Mix Concrete Care should be exercised when using the proportions specified in Tables 16.3 and 16.4 of the GS. Concrete of poor quality will be produced if the wrong end of the ranges is used, depending on the grading adopted.

GS 16.15

GS 16.16

No-fines Concrete It is normally not necessary to specify a strength for no-fines concrete.
16.8

2006 Edition

SUBMISSIONS
GS 16.18 (1) Particulars of Concrete Mix A new feature of the Specification is the requirement to submit required tolerances on aggregate contents to allow for variations in gradings etc. The actual weighed quantities of aggregate in a batch of concrete will also vary with the free moisture content of the aggregate. When checking the Contractors mix designs, it is important to make sure the designed workability is compatible with the location and method of placing. Contractors frequently fail to give this information to ready-mixed concrete suppliers and ask for minimum slump mixes, which are generally cheaper, but may be impossible to place and compact properly. If in doubt, the Contractor should be asked to justify his selection of workability. (See also GS Clause 16.12(2)).

TRIALS
GS 16.23 Trial Mix Concrete A great deal of time, effort and materials have been wasted in the past through unnecessary trial mixes. Historical data on the production of concrete are of much more value than trial mixes, which should only be required when an unknown plant or an unusual mix is being considered. Every effort should, therefore, be made to base approval of mix designs on reliable historical data. A central concrete mix database is developed by PWCL to keep historical data of concrete mixes for project engineers consideration and project engineers should contact PWCL for assistance in providing historical data. If data are submitted for a mix with essentially similar constituents and proportions but, say, different brands of cement, it would be sensible to check the regular cement test reports issued by the PWCL before demanding a trial mix.

HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

GS 16.34 Handling and Storage of Aggregates A major source of variation in the properties of concrete is the failure to provide adequate separation between the various types and sizes of aggregates at the batching plant. It is essential to have good physical separation between the bins or stockpiles and to ensure that aggregate is properly contained in them and not allowed to spread beyond the ends of the dividing walls.

16.9

2006 Edition

BATCHING AND MIXING CONCRETE

GS 16.38 (3) Mixing Concrete Mixing concrete takes time and energy (fuel) and is often not done sufficiently, particularly with truck mixers. If there is any doubt about the consistency of a batch of concrete due to inadequate mixing, a simple check is to do a slump test at various stages of the discharge. The variation in slump should not exceed 20% of the mean value.

PLACING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE

GS 16.41 (2) Placing Concrete A temperature control is added in the GS to prevent extensive cracking of the concrete. This is applicable to general concreting works except in construction of concrete carriageways where the temperature requirements in GS Section 10 shall apply. Amd 2/2009 Placing Concrete by Pumping Pumping is an increasingly popular method of transporting and placing concrete. Not all concrete is pumpable. The grading and quantity of the fine aggregate are particularly important, and the mix must be designed for pumping. Minor variations in the grading can render an otherwise pumpable mix unpumpable. Consequently, careful attention needs to be paid to the properties of the concrete in the design of the mix if it is to be pumped easily. Attempting to pump unpumpable concrete is a common cause for the breakdown of pumps, which causes delay and results in poor quality work. A constant supply of fresh, plastic, well-proportioned concrete is essential for the satisfactory operation of the pump. A useful reference is Concrete Digest No. 1 Pumping Concrete. GS 16.43 Placing Concrete by Tremie Attention should be paid to initial setting time or slump retention. The tremie concrete placed, which serves as a blanket separating the concrete from the water or bentonite, should remain workable until the placing of concrete is completed. (3) There may be an emergency situation when the tremie pipe becomes blocked or removed from the concrete. It is therefore necessary to carry out a comprehensive planning at the commencement of contract to cater for any emergency incidents, but at the same time allow the contractor to have flexibility to handle such emergency incidents. The contractor is required to include a contingency plan in his method statement to cater for any emergency incidents such as blocking of tremie pipes, accidental removal of the tremie pipes from the concrete, or difficulty encountered in removing the temporary casing in the case of concreting a bored pile, etc. The contingency plan should clearly indicate the following measures: -

GS 16.42

16.10

2006 Edition

(a) Plant and equipment that must be readily available on site in case of the emergency incidents; (b) The conditions and timing for resuming the concreting if concreting has to be stopped; (c) The tests to be carried out to prove the integrity of the tremie concrete (including the concrete cast after the incident has occurred), if required by the Engineer. All the above elements of the contingency plan shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to concreting. Amd 2/2009

CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
GS 16.45 (4) Construction Joints Spraying with water is an effective method for removal of laitance and cement matrix, provided it is done early enough. However, care must be taken not to use such high pressures as would remove formwork release agents. It is also possible that spraying large quantities of cold water onto thick sections could result in thermal shock and cracking. Heavy working of surfaces should be avoided unless there is no risk of cracking the concrete.

16.11

2006 Edition

CURING CONCRETE
GS 16.46 Curing Concrete Despite the recommendations in BS 8110, curing is vital, particularly in windy and dry conditions, if strong, durable concrete is to be achieved. CIRIA Report No. 43(l973) is a useful reference. The covering rate recommended by the manufacturer for a liquid curing compound is normally based on flat surface coverage. Textured surfaces may well have 30% more surface area so that the recommended rate will not give adequate protection. Therefore, care should be taken to ensure that full covering is achieved. Covering adjoining reinforcement or formwork should be avoided. Keeping the concrete wet by spraying or ponding with water is still the most effective curing method and should be used wherever possible, but it is extremely important that the concrete is kept constantly wet for the required period, and that wetting is started as soon as the shutters are removed from formed surfaces.

TESTING: CEMENT, PFA, AGGREGATE, ADMIXTURE, CURING COMPOUND

GS 16.49 to GS 16.51 Batch: Cement, PFA, Aggregate, Admixture, Curing Compound Testing: Cement, PFA, Aggregate, Admixture, Curing Compound, Recycled Water These GS Clauses refer to sampling and testing of materials when they are first submitted for approval. Routine testing during the Contract is covered by the GCC.

TESTING: CONCRETE - WORKABILITY

GS 16.54 (1) Samples: Workability of Concrete The slump test can give a good indication of the consistency of concrete and should be performed regularly. It is important to sample correctly for the slump test. Construction Standard 1:1990 (CS1) allows an alternative method of sampling for the slump test (CSl Clause 1.4.2) and it is essential not to test the first 0.3 m discharged from the mixer. The measured slump values are the values actually obtained on site and the designed values are those targeted by designers. The measured slump values shall be within the required tolerance of the designed slump value. Amd 2/2009

(3)

16.12

2006 Edition

GS 16.55 (1)

Testing: Workability of Concrete The flow table test may not be applicable for concrete of very high workability, such as self-compacting concrete. There exists other forms of slump flow test mainly cater for self-compacting concrete. If flow table tests are to be carried out, please follow Section 22, Volume 2 of CS1 (the continuously updated version with amendments). The soft files are posted on the CEDD website:(Ref. http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/standards_handbooks/stan_cs1.htm)

GS 16.57

Non-compliance: Workability of Concrete Concrete that exhibits a slump in excess of the maximum allowed (designed value plus tolerance) should not be placed in the permanent works. Concrete that has a low slump may be difficult to place and compact satisfactorily. Slump values outside the allowable range may indicate that the wrong mix has been supplied, or the concrete has been in the truck mixer for too long, or that the sampling or testing have been done incorrectly, etc.

TESTING: CONCRETE - COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

GS 16.58 (1) Samples: Compressive Strength of Concrete Sampling of concrete for strength testing should be done at random, and is to be carried out in accordance with CS1. The importance of correct sampling cannot be overstressed. Test results will be of no value if the correct procedure has not been followed. When the Engineer has confidence in the level of quality control being exercised, he may reduce the frequency of sampling, particularly for large pours. 7 days, or other early age tests, have no contractual significance but can give an early warning that something is amiss. Good contractors and concrete suppliers will arrange for their own early age testing. However, if early strength measurements are required, for example, in prestressing works, appropriate PS clauses should be included.

(2)

16.13

2006 Edition

GS 16.59

Testing: Compressive Strength of Concrete CS1 departs somewhat from BS 1881 in that it specifies cube dimensions and does not insist on moulds being to certain tolerances. However, satisfactory cubes are unlikely to result from moulds other than cast steel ones specifically made for this purpose. Since the flatness of cube sides is critical, it is advisable to check the moulds if low cube strengths are reported. Advice should be sought from the PWCL on how best to do this. Proper sampling, casting and curing cubes on the Site are vitally important. Non-standard sampling, casting and curing procedures will significantly affect the cube strengths obtained. Special Project Report (SPR) 3/96 demonstrated that 100 mm cubes can be used instead of 150 mm cubes for control testing of concrete strength. Smaller cubes are more environmentally friendly because of less materials to be disposed of, and of practical necessity for very high-strength concrete for which normal testing machine would not be able to crush 150 mm cubes.

GS 16.61

Compliance Criteria: Compressive Strength of Designed Mix Concrete The compliance criteria for cube strength are based on the outdated BS 5328 and are considered to give an equitable balance of risk sharing. However, should the suppliers standard deviation rise above 8.0 MPa for 150 mm test cubes or 8.5 MPa for 100 mm test cubes, there would be too high a risk of accepting non-complying concrete, and this level of standard deviation indicates extremely poor quality control.

TESTING: HARDENED CONCRETE

GS 16.63 Samples: Hardened Concrete and Concrete Cores If coring is necessary, it is important to cut a sufficient number of samples with the test lengths with adequate depth with respect to the lift direction of concrete placing. Reference should be made to BS 6089 and the Concrete Society Technical Report No. 11.

16.14

2006 Edition

PART 2: JOINTS IN CONCRETE NOTE

Joints in concrete are unfortunately inevitable, and are frequently the source of problems, such as leakage, cracking and spalling, ingress of deleterious substances and planes of weakness. It is therefore very important that joints are treated properly and that they are suitably maintained.

MATERIALS
GS 16.75 Joint Filler Where the joint filler is in contact with, or close to, the ground, it would be sensible to specify in the PS a material which is resistant to pests, such as termites. GS 16.77 Joint Sealant Joint sealant frequently fails either because the wrong material has been used, or it has not been properly treated, or there has been inadequate surface preparation. In general, the simpler the material the better. Cold applied one-component sealants are obviously not subject to problems with temperature control and inadequate or incorrect mixing. Primers must be compatible with the sealant to be used. GS 16.80 Waterstops Waterstops should only be specified where absolutely necessary. They are often difficult to fix properly and make concreting difficult. A waterstop which deviates from its designed position and leads to poorly compacted concrete, may result in a worse joint than one without a waterstop. Where joints are not designed for movement but are required to be watertight, a hydrophilic joint sealer could be specified in the PS and/or on the Drawings.

FORMING JOINTS
GS 16.85 Forming Grooves Saws are now available to cut grooves of depths up to 25 mm in a single pass. It is important that the surfaces of formed grooves are not contaminated with the remains of timber formers, etc.

16.15

2006 Edition

GS 16.87

Sealing Joints The correct preparation of grooves prior to sealing is vital to the subsequent performance of the seal. The surfaces to which the sealant is to adhere must be cleaned thoroughly and roughened. High pressure water jetting is a good method, but care must be taken not to damage the underlying joint filler. Primers should be applied, where required, strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Two-part sealants are to be proportioned accurately. Generally, complete containers-full should be used. Mixing should be done mechanically. For hot-applied material, an oil or water bath maintained at the correct temperature is essential. It is not sensible to expect a hi-technology sealant to perform properly if it has been heated over a fire of scrap timber in a wheelbarrow. Bond-breakers at the bottom of grooves are essential. If the sealant adheres to the bottom of the groove, it cannot be expected to work as designed. Final sealing, particularly of expansion joints, should be left as late as practical, and preferably done in cool weather, to minimize subsequent tension of the sealant.

TESTING: MATERIALS FOR JOINTS

GS 16.91 (1) Testing: Joint Filler, Joint Sealant, Waterstops It is not normally necessary to test joint fillers for disintegration and shrinkage. The test includes a freeze-thaw regime that is not appropriate to Hong Kong conditions. The method for this test has been omitted from Appendix 16.3. If the test is considered desirable, a suitable PS clause will be needed. Compliance Criteria: Joint Filler See Guidance Notes on GS Clause 16.91(1) concerning the weathering test. Specimens tested for compression and recovery should be inspected for mechanical damage. Although not specifically mentioned in the GS, a material that suffered such damage in the test would obviously be suspect.

GS 16.92

16.16

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 17 PRESTRESSING

17.1

2006 Edition

17.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 17 PRESTRESSING

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
GS 17.04 Prestressing Tendon Although single wires and strands are not normally referred to as tendons, for simplicity, this term is used throughout this Section of the GS.

MATERIALS
GS 17.06 (2) Prestressing Tendons There is no reason why short lengths of tendon cannot be delivered in straight sections, provided they can be identified as being from a single batch. This GS Clause is to ensure that, if tendons are coiled, the diameter of the coils are sufficiently large. Grout for Prestressing Systems Admixtures will normally be needed to reduce bleeding, water demand and shrinkage, and to maintain pumpability. They shall be checked for chloride content and past performance. Sand will usually be used only when large voids need to be filled. PFA will result in gain of slower strength at early ages. Non-shrink grouts are not normally necessary when mechanical bond is provided by corrugated ducts. For PC grouts, a crushing strength of 25 MPa at 7 days will usually ensure a 28-day strength in excess of 30 MPa. If a higher strength is needed, or if a particular bond strength is required, this should be specified by means of a PS clause. The test methods are given in GS Clause 17.60. In the 2006 Edition of the GS, there is a limit for the water/cement ratio of the grout at 0.40. The Engineer should ensure that the limit is not exceeded.

GS 17.10 (1)

(2)

(3) & (4) (6)

SUBMISSIONS
GS 17.11 Particulars of Prestressing Systems Guidance on these topics is to be found in BS 5400 and the Structures Design Manual for Highways and Railways issued by Highways Department. (Ref. http://www.hyd.gov.hk/eng/public/publications/SDM/index.htm).
17.3

2006 Edition

GS 17.12

Particulars of Prestressing Tendons Compliance with the requirements in the relevant BS (4486 or 5896) should be checked.

GS 17.13 (1)(a)

Particulars of Grout Mix and Grouting Procedure The water: cement ratio by mass should not normally exceed 0.4 as stated in GS Clause 17.10(6) The requirements stated in GS Clause 17.44 should be met. The working pressure of grout pumps should be sufficient to meet the particular requirement of the job in hand.

(1)(b)

TRIALS
GS 17.19 (1) Grouting Trials Advice on the appropriate number and details of trials may be obtained from Structures Division, Highways Department, for in-house projects. Testing: Grouting Trials The sections of grouted ducts to be examined should include, where appropriate, points of sharp curvature, high points, areas of down-slope grouting and points furthest from vents.

GS 17.20

HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

GS 17.26 Handling of Prestressing Tendons Tendons shall be inspected for notches and indentations. Damaged tendons shall be rejected.

SURFACE CONDITION OF MATERIALS FOR PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

GS 17.29 (2) Surface Condition of Materials for Prestressing Systems If the surface condition of tendons, prestressing components or sheaths has deteriorated to an extent that cleaning would be ineffective, the material in question shall be rejected. However, tendons with surface pitting shall never be accepted. Consideration should be given to the effect of surface rust on assumed duct friction values. The method of testing to determine duct friction is described in GS Clause 17.55.
17.4

2006 Edition

INSTALLATION OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

GS 17.30 (1) Installation of Prestressing Systems A tendon that breaks during stressing can be an extremely dangerous projectile. The Contractor and the Engineer should agree on safe and effective protective measures shielding the prestressing operations so that any risk of damage to the surroundings and life will be minimized. Joints in Prestressing Tendons Joints in tendons should only be permitted at locations indicated on the Drawings. Couplers must be of the same proprietary make as the prestressing system adopted.

GS 17.33

TENSIONING OF PRESTRESSING TENDONS

GS 17.38 (6) Tensioning of Prestressing Tendons The loading devices should be re-calibrated if there is a significant mismatch between the measured extension and calculated extension. Routine calibration of devices to be carried out overseas should be undertaken at 12-month intervals; carrying out calibrations locally at 6-month intervals is reasonable. Post-tensioning If post-tensioning operations are delayed, it is important to protect the tendons from corrosion. Protection of External Prestressing Tendons and Anchorages If external prestressing tendons and anchorages are used, the details of the corrosion protection system should be stated in a PS clause.

GS 17.40 (5)

GS 17.41

INSPECTION OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

GS 17.43 Inspection of Prestressing Systems It is important for the senior members of the resident sit staff to check the systems for any damage to ducts and sheaths, their correct profile, the absence of kinks and the sufficiency of supports. The profile must be smooth and supports must be adequate to prevent displacement during concreting. The allowable tolerance on position is given in GS Clause 17.48. Anchorages and couplers must be assembled and positioned with great care and accuracy.

17.5

2006 Edition

GROUTING OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

GS 17.46 (3) (10) Grouting Injection Effective grouting is very important for protecting the prestressing tendons inside the ducts from corrosion and serves to ensure that the tendons transfer the forces to the concrete to be prestressed. The Engineer should ensure that the procedures and requirement in these sub-clauses of the 2006 Edition of the GS are met.

TESTING: DUCT FRICTION

GS 17.55 Testing: Duct Friction As noted under the guidance on GS Clause 17.29 above, the surface condition of tendons and ducts shall be carefully considered. Tests other them those stated in the Contract may need to be carried out if there are doubts about the surface condition.

17.6

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 18 STEELWORK

18.1

2006 Edition

18.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 18 STEELWORK
NOTE
The Specification assumes that the design of steelwork is completely specified in the Contract, including details and locations of splices. If the Contractor is allowed to alter splice locations or introduce additional splices, the additional requirements governing splice details and locations should be stated in the PS or on the Drawings. Designers may like to refer to the Code of Practice for the Structural use of Steel 2005 and the Explanatory Materials to this Code of Practice issued by Buildings Department (Ref. http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/index_crlist.html).

GENERAL
GS 18.01 (1) Steelwork Steelwork designed to BS 5400:Part 3 shall comply with BS 5400:Part 6. Steelwork designed to BS 5950:Part 1 should comply with BS 5950:Part 2. For steelwork designed to BS 449, as with some existing designs, the workmanship standards of BS 5950:Part 2 are deemed appropriate. Either BS 5400:Part 6 or BS 5950:Part 2 should be stated on the Drawings. If this is not stated, BS 5950:Part 2 will apply by default. Specifying the appropriate BS on the Drawings is to indicate which of BS 5400:Part 6 or BS 5950:Part 2 is the appropriate standard to follow under GS Clauses 18.04(1), 18.08(3), 18.43, 18.85, 18.96(2) and Table 18.4. In a given contract, there may be steel bridges designed to BS 5400:Part 3 and ancillary steel structures designed to BS 5950:Part 1. In such cases, the BS appropriate to each steel structure may be stated on the Drawings of that steel structure. GS Clauses 18.03, 18.23, 18.97(2) and 18.99(1) refer to steelwork required to comply with BS 5400:Part 6. They are applicable only to steelwork for which BS 5400:Part 6 has been specified in the PS or shown on the Drawings. BS 5950:Part 2 does not cover stud welding and rivets and has no specific requirements on flame cutting and shearing procedures. GS Clauses 18.05, 18.29(4), 18.29(5), 18.98, items (d) and (e) under GS Clause 18.18(1), and the relevant provisions in GS Clauses 18.29(1), 18.30 to 18.34 and 18.35(2) concerning stud welding, flame cutting and shearing procedures are applicable only to steelwork for which BS 5400:Part 6 has been specified on the Drawings or in the PS.

18.3

2006 Edition

(2)

GS Clause 18.01(2) is based on the DoT Specification. Clause 6.3.1 of BS 5400:Part 6 concerns allowances to be made for permanent deformations. It is amended in Part 6, Series 1800 of the DoT Specification for Highway Works. Under the DoT Specification, and hence GS Clause 18.01(2), the onus is on the Contractor to determine the deformations due to the permanent loads. In many cases, particularly with steelwork analysed by plastic methods or checked as compact sections, the method of erection, including the site jointing sequence, is not crucial to the sizing of the principal components. It may thus be assumed in the analysis that the permanent loads are applied to the entire steelwork after all site connections are completed. While this is acceptable based on strength considerations, the sequence of making the site connections may have significant effects on the deformations of the steelwork. The deflections obtained from such simplified analysis are not suitable for inclusion in contract documents to enable the Contractor to make allowance for deformation due to permanent loads. Determining such allowances will thus have to be left to the Contractor who alone is in the position to take full account of the effects on the deformations due to his own sequence of erection and making site connections. In some cases, the staged build-up of stresses in the steelwork due to the sequence of erection and making site connections may be critical to its ability to withstand the design imposed loads. This happens with sections whose strength is determined by the elastic modulus or buckling considerations, e.g. slender sections as defined in BS 5400:Part 3 or BS 5950:Part 1. See Clause 9.9.5.2 in BS 5400:Part 3. In such cases, the steelwork has to be designed for specific erection and site jointing sequence. The design erection and site jointing sequence should then be specified in the Contract. The permanent load deflections obtained during analysis may be stated in the Contract. If so, GS Clause 18.01(2) should be amended in the PS so as to waive the requirement placed on the Contractor to determine the deformations due to permanent loads. The tolerances given under GS Clause 18.87 do not cover the tolerances on soffit levels and deflections. These should be stated in the PS or on the Drawings.

GS 18.02

Protection of Steelwork The conventional protection to steelwork relies on provision of a coating such as painting acting as a protective barrier to prevent the metal surface from getting in contact with oxygen and moisture in the atmosphere. When the painting disintegrates with time, the rust layers formed on most conventional structural steel detach from the metal surface after a critical time and new painting has to be applied. In some circumstances where repainting of steel structures such as bridges at a later date for maintenance would have been logistically difficult, the use of weathering steel to BS EN 10025-5:2004 could be considered by designers as an option. With weathering steel, the rusting process is initiated in the same way, but specific alloying elements in the steel produce a stable rust layer that adheres to the base metal, and is much less porous. This rust patina develops under conditions of alternate wetting and drying to produce a protective barrier, which impedes further access of oxygen and moisture.

18.4

2006 Edition

This website shows examples and advantages/limitations of using weathering steel in bridge construction: http://www.npl.co.uk/lmm/docs/corus_construction_corrosion_prevention_guides/wea thering_steel_bridges.pdf It is expected that the corrosion rate is so low that bridges fabricated from unpainted weathering steel can achieve a 120-year design life with only nominal maintenance. Hence, a well detailed weathering steel bridge in an appropriate environment can provide an attractive, very low maintenance, economic solution in many locations. However, as with other forms of construction, there are certain environments that can lead to durability problems. The performance of weathering steel in such extreme environments will not be satisfactory, and these should be avoided. Examples are marine environment with exposure to high concentrations of chloride ions, originating from sea-water spray, salt fogs or coastal airborne salts, is detrimental. In continuously wet/damp conditions, alternate wet/dry cycles that are required for the adherent patina to form, cannot occur. Owing to continuously wet or damp conditions, a corrosion rate similar to that of conventional carbon steel may be expected. Examples include weathering steel elements immersed in water, buried in soil or covered by vegetation. GS 18.03 Amendments to BS 5400:Part 6 Items (b), (c), (d), (f), (h), (i) and (k) are based on Clause 1803 in Part 6 of the DoT Specification for Highway Works. The same clause in the DoT Specification covers weather resistant steels, which are not suitable for exposure to severe marine conditions or severe industrial fumes. Since most of the built-up areas in Hong Kong belong to the category of a polluted coastal environment as defined in Table 1 of BS 5493, the application of weather resistant steels is limited. The provisions concerning weathering steels are thus not included in this GS Clause. Under item (g), Type B camber is the type allowed under Clause 4.14 of BS 5400:Part 6. With plate girders, Type A camber is preferred and will be the type to follow by default. For rolled beams, GS Section 18 does not limit the way camber is formed. If rolled sections have to be cambered to comply with the specified tolerances, Type B camber would be acceptable.

18.5

2006 Edition

MATERIALS
GS 18.04 (1) Structural Steel GS Section 18 was drafted before the publication of the 1990 edition of BS 4360. It is thus based on the earlier BS 4360:1986. The appropriate steel grades to BS 4360 should be stated on the Drawings. The suffix to the grade designation of the steel, A, B, C etc., gives an indication of the resistance against brittle fracture under the action of suddenly applied tensile stresses, such as those arising from impact. It can be determined from the design minimum temperature, and from Table 3 of BS 5400:Part 3 or Table 4 of BS 5950:Part 1 for the thicknesses covered by those tables. For thicker materials, the grade suffix cannot be determined from the two tables nor from those given in Sections 4 to 7 of BS 4360. Instead, Clause 6.5 of BS 5400:Part 3 and Clause 2.4.4 of BS 5950:Part 1 requires the Charpy V-notch impact test value to be determined for such materials. The design Charpy V-notch impact test value should then be stated on the Drawings instead of a grade suffix. For such materials, the grade designation notation will have to depart from BS 4360. The notation to be used should be stated on the Drawings. For grade 40B and 43B steels and hollow sections of grade 40C steel, the supplier is not required to verify the Charpy V-notch impact test values unless Option B.39 of BS 4360 is specified. This Option should be stipulated on the Drawings for steels that are required to comply with the Charpy V-notch impact test values stated on the Drawings. The carbon equivalent value (CEV) of steel is one of the factors affecting the need for preheat treatment. Both BS 5400:Part 6 and BS 5950:Part 2 leave it up to the Engineer to decide if it is necessary to limit the CEV. GS Clause 18.04(1) makes it mandatory to observe limits on the CEV according to Option B.7 of BS 4360. This requirement may be relaxed for grades 40 and 43 steels up to 50 mm thick and grade 50 steels up to 30 mm thick, in which case, GS Clause 18.04(1) should be amended in the PS. Results of ladle analysis of the steel material supplied will always have to be provided under Clause 7.1 of BS 4360. Option B.9 of BS 4360 concerns product analysis, which is more costly to carry out than ladle analysis, and should not normally be specified. Clause 1803 of the DoT Specification contains amendments and additions to BS 4360:1979 regarding the correction of defects in steel materials. In this regard, BS 4360:1986 has more specific provisions than the DoT Specification. The respective provisions under the DoT Specification have therefore not been adopted. With regard to the removal of surface defects on steel materials by grinding, Clause 9.2.3 of BS 4360:1986 allows a local reduction in thickness of up to 7% below the minimum otherwise allowed under BS 4:Part 1 and BS 4848:Parts 4 and 5. This way of correcting defects is not allowed under the DoT Specification. Hence, for steelwork required to comply with BS 5400:Part 6, it should be stated on the Drawings that the steel material is required to comply with Option B.12 of BS 4360. The Engineer should decide whether Option B.12 of BS 4360 is to be specified for steelwork required to comply with BS 5950:Part 2 having regard to the importance of the member and the location in which the defect occurs.
18.6

2006 Edition

The repair of surface defects on steel materials by welding is generally permissible under Clause 9.2.4 of BS 4360 without having to seek the approval of the Engineer. If, because of fatigue or brittle fracture considerations, the repair of surface defects is not acceptable for certain areas of the steelwork, such areas should comply with Option B.11 of BS 4360 and be marked accordingly on the Drawings. Dimensional tolerances of steel materials are given in Section 2 of BS 4360. If the alternative dimensional tolerances given as Options B.14 to B.27 of BS 4360 are to be used, the options required should be specified on the Drawings. Options B.28 to B.36 of BS 4360 concern testing of steel materials. Option B.28 is covered by GS Clause 18.89. Option B.36 concerns bend tests, which should not normally be required for steelwork not involving cold forming. Note should also be taken of Option B.34 concerning additional tensile tests on hollow sections. Clause 3.1.2 of BS 5400:Part 6 effectively states that the weldability and mechanical properties of steel materials specified to comply with specifications other than BS 4360 will still have to comply with those specified in BS 4360. This requirement is questionable in itself. Further, the guidance clauses of BS 5400:Part 6 seem to suggest that the above requirement only applies to steels offered as a substitute for BS 4360 steels specified in the Contract, but not to steels specified to other standards. Consequently, if the design calls for the use of steel materials which have to comply with requirements other than those of BS 4360, Clause 3.1.2 of BS 5400:Part 6 may have to be amended in the PS. Regarding steels not complying with BS 4360, Clauses 2.1.2 and 2.1.3 of BS 5950:Part 2 are sufficiently clear. For steelwork required to comply with BS 5400:Part 6, there may be areas in the steelwork where tension stresses are to be transmitted in the through thickness direction of steel, or where laminations could prejudice the buckling behaviour under compression stresses, or where the presence of laminations could prejudice structural integrity in addition to those given in Clause 3.1.4.1 of BS 5400:Part 6. The extent of the additional areas and their quality grades should be marked on the Drawings. For steelwork required to comply with BS 5950:Part 2, the extent of all areas susceptible to lamellar tearing and the quality grades applicable should always be marked on the Drawings. Any material found to be defective due to laminations might be used at the discretion of the Engineer. In areas which have to be quality graded, such as at cruciform joints, T-joints and corner joints, consideration should additionally be given to specifying Option B.29 of BS 4360 (through thickness testing) where the thickness is 16 mm or more or where the total throat thickness of weld deposited on the steel surface exceeds 30 mm. The areas in question and the acceptance class to BS 6780:1986 (Z15, Z25 or Z35) applicable should be shown on the Drawings. If through thickness testing is specified, the quality grade applicable to the area in question shall be LC3 to BS 5996. A PS clause may be required to override the less onerous Clause 3.1.4 of BS 5400:Part 6 as amended by GS Clause 18.03. Section 1 of BS 6780:1986 should be consulted for further guidance as to when through thickness testing is required. A PS clause should always be provided to the effect that all additional markings of steel shall comply with Option B.13 of BS 4360.
18.7

2006 Edition

(2)

Hot-rolled sections complying with other standards may be approved, such as when the Contractor offers a slightly larger section for steel H piles. Watch out for dimensional compatibility. Stainless Steel Designers may obtain information about stainless steel on this website (http://www.aalco.co.uk/technical/stainless.html). The reason for choosing stainless steel is normally due to advantages given by physical properties such as corrosion resistance. In addition to corrosion resistance, the advantageous physical properties of stainless steel may include: - High and low temperature resistance - Low magnetic permeability - Ease of fabrication - High Strength - Aesthetic appeal - Hygiene and ease of cleaning - Long-life cycle - Recyclable With reference to para. 2.2 of Chapter 4 (Project Design and Estimates) of the Project Administrating Handbook, project offices need to carry out in the preliminary design stage comparison of the order of costs for alternative schemes in order that the most suitable scheme is selected. The Handbooks is posted on the CEDD website: http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/standards_handbooks/stan_pah.htm. Comparison should be conducted by using the concept of life cycle costing. The durability and corrosion resistance of stainless steel means it will outlast many competing products. The low maintenance characteristics also add to stainless steel often being the lowest cost choice in a life cycle cost comparison.

GS 18.12

(1)

For outdoor applications, Grade 316 S 16 should be amended to Grade 316 S 31 by means of a PS clause. Grade 316 S 16 has been taken from the guidance clauses of BS 5400:Part 6 and that grade is no longer included in BS 970:Part 1:1983. For indoor applications, consideration should be given to amending Grade 316 S 16 to Grade 304 S 15 in the PS. Grade 304 S 15 does not contain molybdenum and is less expensive than Grade 316 S 16. It complies with Clause 3.9 of BS 5400:Part 6 and has been used on Mass Transit Railway Corporation jobs for indoor applications.

18.8

2006 Edition

(2)

Similar guidance to that given on GS Clause 18.12(1) applies, i.e. amend Grade 316 S 16 to Grade 316 S 31 for outdoor applications and consider the use of Grade 304 S 15 for indoor applications. Specify the surface finish required for each face of the material on the Drawings. Select the finish number for the mill finish and the mechanically polished finish required from Table 1 of BS 1449:Part 2.

(3)

The designation LW 23 GZF(S) specifies only the delivery condition. Any special surface finishes required should be stipulated on the Drawings. (See Clause 4.2 of BS 6323:Part 8). If polished finishing is desired, the mechanically polished finishes given in Table 1 of BS 1449:Part 2 may be specified. Cast Iron The grades of any malleable, spheroidal or nodular cast iron should be selected from BS 6681 or BS 2789 and specified on the Drawings.

GS 18.13

GS 18.14

Grout for Column Bases As with Clause 2.6 of BS 5950:Part 2, grout in GS Clause 18.14 can mean mixes of pouring consistency, mortars, dry packed mortars and fine concrete. Mix refers to concrete mix. The mix should have a sufficiently high workability to ensure that the void left in the pocket base is completely filled.

GS 18.15

Lubricant for Nut Threads of HSFG Bolts Tallow has been used as a lubricant on the nut threads of HSFG bolts since the early days of friction grip bolting. In some 1.125" diameter V grade bolts, tallow can reduce the torque required to tighten the bolts by over 20%. If a lubricant is desired, the use of tallow is recommended.

GS 18.16 (3)

Paint for Steelwork Volatile Organic Compounds are organic chemical compounds that have high enough vapour pressures under normal conditions to significantly vaporize and enter the atmosphere. The VOC Regulation, effective from 1 April 2007 under the Air Pollution Control Ordinance, also controls the VOC content in architectural paints, printing inks and six selected consumer products - air fresheners, hairsprays, multipurpose lubricants, floor wax strippers, insecticides and insect repellents. The VOC Regulation sets limits on the VOC content of 51 types of architectural paints/coatings, 7 types of printing inks and 6 broad categories of consumer products, which will be implemented in phases between 1 April 2007 and 1 January 2010. No person shall import to or manufacture in Hong Kong for local sale or use any of the regulated products containing VOCs in excess of the prescribed limits in the Regulation. Please check the following links for details of the VOC limits on the EPD website: (http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/air/prob_solutions/voc_reg.html).
18.9

2006 Edition

SUBMISSIONS
GS 18.18 (1) Particulars of Workshop Drawings The Specification assumes that the weld types and sizes of welds will have been specified on the Drawings usually using the weld symbols of BS 499:Part 2. Whatever standard has been used for the weld symbols on the Drawings, it is expected that the same symbols would also be used on the drawings submitted by the Contractor. All he would need to do is to add the identification markings of welding procedures, cutting procedures and hot working processes on the Engineers steelwork drawings. GS Clause 18.18(1)(b) requires the submission of the details of joints and non-standard welds proposed by the Contractor. These refer to butt welds proposed by the Contractor for joining plates in built-up assemblies in addition to the butt welds specified by the Engineer. (2) The minimum lead time for submissions of workshop drawings is 6 weeks before fabrication starts, and that for submission of welding procedures under GS Clauses 18.21 and 18.22 is 4 weeks. During the two weeks before welding procedures are submitted, procedures for plate cutting and shearing may be first examined. This is in line with the normal fabrication sequence of plate cutting or shearing followed by welding. Particulars of Welding Procedure Minor welds may be made by welders approved in accordance with BS 4871:Part 1. More important welds should be made by welders approved in accordance with BS 4872:Part 2, using approved welding procedures. GS Table 18.2 draws the line as to when the submission of welding procedures is required. The limiting weld size for fillet welds shown in the table is somewhat conservative and the limiting size for either type of weld may be amended in the as seen fit. Particulars of Inspecting Authority and Testing Consultant There is not yet a list of approved inspecting authorities for approving welders or welding procedures employed on Government jobs. The Engineer has to exercise his judgment in determining whether or not the particular inspecting authority proposed is acceptable. The same applies to the testing consultant. The expression inspecting authority is a key term in the relevant BS, such as BS 4871 etc. It can be the same firm or establishment as the testing consultant. GS 18.28 Samples of Materials The requirements on paint samples to be submitted by the Contractor are given in Appendix 18-A, and have been based on Clause 1910 of the DoT Specification. These requirements should be specified in the PS, if considered necessary. It is intended that tests on the paint samples be carried out by the Government Chemist under the direction of the Engineer. Consequently, it is unnecessary to specify testing requirements on paint materials in the Contract.
18.10

GS 18.22 (1)

GS 18.26 (1)

2006 Edition

The Engineer may arrange for tests to BS 3900 but the paint samples are mainly intended for chemical analysis. By analysing the A samples, the compositions of the paint materials can be checked against the information provided by the manufacturer. Chemical analysis on the B samples can enable any unauthorized changes in the paint formulation to be detected. The chemical analysis of paint samples has proved useful in tracking down the causes of paint failures on local projects. To facilitate the scheduling of resources in the Government Laboratory, the Government Chemist should be consulted at the earliest time possible concerning the testing requirements for paint materials. If resource constraints are identified, alternative arrangements should be specified in the PS. (1) It may be thought that compliance of blast cleaning to steel surfaces in production is to be checked directly against GS Clause 18.56(1) rather than against the sample. For practical reasons, direct comparison to the specified standard is difficult. For the purpose of site control, it is easier to follow the steps below: (a) Prepare samples using steel and blasting methods which are representative of production conditions, (b) Take the samples to a place where they can be compared with the pictorial standards shown in SIS 05 59 00 under brightly lit conditions by personnel with adequate experience, and (c) Pass the approved samples to the less experienced staff for site control. The use of samples as a subsidiary standard is inevitable and it is thus important to have approved samples for control purposes. Therefore, it should be specified in the PS that samples are to be submitted for approval by the Engineer.

TRIALS
GS 18.29 Procedure Trials for Welding, Flame Cutting and Shearing The factors which define a procedure, e.g. those defining a welding procedure in Clause 20 of BS 5135, are objective variables independent of the operators/welders skills. Hence, once a procedure is approved and documented, it may be used repeatedly in different contracts unless there is a change in standards, e.g. a tightening of weld quality requirements in procedure tests under BS 4870:Part 1. In this respect, the approval of procedures is distinct from the approval of welders, who may be required to repeat the approval tests from time to time. GS Clauses 18.22, 18.23 and 18.29 were written with a view to avoiding unnecessary repetition of procedure trials. As GS Clause 18.29 states, a procedure trial is required only when there is no satisfactory evidence to show that the proposed procedure has previously complied with this GS Clause. (2) Reference should be made to guidance clauses 5.4.1.1 and 5.4.1.2 in BS 5400:Part 6.

18.11

2006 Edition

HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT OF MATERIALS

GS 18.41 (7) Storage of Steelwork While an enclosed workshop for painting steelwork and curing the paint coatings should be able to shelter the steelwork from contaminating agents, it must be well ventilated to prevent the formation of explosive gaseous mixtures due to the volatile solvents in the paints. Consideration should always be given to providing forced ventilation within the workshop.

FABRICATION OF STEELWORK
GS 18.43 Fabrication of Steelwork Reference should be made to the guidance clauses under the heading of Workmanship in BS 5400:Part 6. Under Clause 4.7.1 of BS 5400:Part 6, the use of welding processes other than metal-arc welding is subject to the Engineers approval. It should be noted that welding procedures involving Electro Slag and Fusarc processes should not be permitted where fracture toughness is a critical design parameter, e.g. joints in areas of high applied tensile stress or severe restraint. Major butt welds that need to be traced to particular welders should be specified on the Drawings. Reference should be made to Clause 5.3 and Appendix H of BS 5400:Part 10 concerning fatigue aspects. In particular, note the manufacturing requirements given in Table 17 of Appendix H to BS 5400:Part 10. Bolt holes may have to be formed by drilling and weld reinforcements dressed flush in specific directions in order for them to qualify for specific classes of fatigue details assumed in the design. Any such additional workmanship requirements concerning fatigue details should be stated on the Drawings. GS 18.45 (6) Welding, Heating and Cutting Welds for temporary attachments can act as stress raisers and increase the risk of fatigue. In such cases, clamps, magnets, holding devices or other setting up fixtures should be used instead of temporary welded attachments, whenever practicable. Temporary welded attachments should not be permitted in highly restrained areas or areas which will be subjected to high tensile stresses or cyclic loading. Temporary welded attachments that are not required for the fabrication, assembly or erection of the steelwork should be prohibited. Temporary welded attachments, when permitted, should be removed by cutting with a flame torch 3 mm above the surface of the steel member when they are no longer required. The excess metal protruding above the parent plate surface should be removed by grinding and finishing flush.
18.12

2006 Edition

GS 18.51 (2)

Tightening of HSFG Bolts The manufacturer would normally recommend the load indicating gaps after initial and final tightening. However, the gap range after final tightening should still be established using a bolt load meter. If the use of a lubricant is approved in the part turn method, one method of establishing the bedding torque is to try a range of bedding torques below the values given in Table 18.3 of the GS and to determine the bolt shank tension for each trial bedding torque using the bolt load meter after final tightening of the bolt by applying the specified rotation (the part turn). Defects in Steelwork GS Clause 18.52 aims to encourage the Contractor to do things correctly the first time. If defects are infrequent and minor in nature, the repair of defects may be permitted.

(3)

GS 18.52

PREPARATION OF STEELWORK SURFACES

GS 18.54 Cleaning of Steelwork and Coated Surfaces In paragraph 18.4, Chapter 18 of the Highways and Structures Design Manual, it is recommended that as in all painting work, the surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared, free from grease, dirt, scale and rust in accordance with the requirements of BS EN ISO 12944 Part 4. (1) Soil or wet concrete may be removed with a strong fresh water jet and by scrubbing. Hardened concrete and strongly adherent substances may have to be removed by a combination of chipping, scraping, abrading, grinding or other mechanical means, aided by wire brushing. Loosened materials may be removed by brushing, dusting or vacuuming. Care should be taken to avoid reducing the thickness of the steel and damaging the steelwork surface. Use of hard grinding discs should not be allowed as their edges may easily cut into the steel surface. If damage to coated surfaces cannot be avoided, the coatings should be restored in accordance with GS Clause 18.62(8) or 18.70. Metal-spray coatings are porous and thus liable to retaining water. They should never be cleaned using wet processes. Wet cleaning will not remove the paint on sealed and painted metal spray coatings and may be used with care. (2) Dust, debris and abrasive remaining on wet blast cleaned steel surfaces and adjoining areas may result in re-contamination of the same areas and should be completely removed within one hour after wet blast cleaning.

18.13

2006 Edition

(3)

Degreasing by washing in solvent is not permitted (except in automatic degreasing plants) because this invariably leads to the spreading of a thin film of grease over the surface, which can impair the coatings. Steam cleaning may also result in the spreading of grease if the grease is not removed by scraping beforehand. Rust producing soluble salts on steel surfaces may not be visible. Their presence may be detected using potassium ferricyanide test paper. Please refer to Appendix G of BS 5493 for details of the test. The test may be repeated after cleaning to determine whether further cleaning is required. Final cleaning before handing over may be waived if the steelwork remains reasonably clean and dust free. Localized cleaning may be considered. Household detergents may contain chemicals that promote rusting. Detergents containing rust inhibitors, such as those for washing cars, may be suitable. Preparation of Steelwork Surfaces Loose rust and mill scale should be removed from uncoated steelwork surfaces bonded to concrete by wire brushing. Steelwork surfaces requiring this preparation should be shown on the Drawings. Uncoated aluminium metal spray is reactive to wet concrete even when sealed. When not protected by paint, it should not be extended into the contact areas between concrete and uncoated steelwork.

(4)

(6)

(7)

GS 18.55 (1)

(3)

It is now known that many metal-spray coatings have failed due to inadequate surface preparation. Blast cleaning metal sprayed steelwork should be specified to first quality and medium profile as stipulated in BS 2569:Part 1. Flame cleaning and mechanical cleaning including the use of wire brushes and abrasive tools cannot remove rust and mill scale adequately. Neither process can be used as a substitute for blast cleaning or acid pickling for new steelwork. They may, however, be used for maintenance work, for preparing steelwork which will be exposed to mild, non-corrosive conditions only, or for repairing steelwork the surface of which has been previously prepared by blast cleaning or pickling. Prolonged pickling may result in pitting of the steel, heavy deposits of phosphate and hydrogen embrittlement. Paints on galvanized and painted steelwork may blister if the steelwork is over pickled and primed soon after galvanizing. Blast Cleaning of Steelwork GS Section 18 does not specify whether blast cleaning should be carried out before or after fabrication. It should be noted that blast cleaning is most effective on steel that has not been allowed to rust. Where steel has been allowed to rust badly, longer times for blast cleaning may be required. Sometimes, first quality standards cannot be economically achieved. There may be advantages in blast cleaning steel and applying a pre-fabrication primer before fabrication.

(4)

(5)

GS 18.56

18.14

2006 Edition

(1)

None of the paint systems complying with Section 2 of BS 5493 requires a surface finish quality higher than Sa 2 in Swedish Standard SIS 05 59 00. Even though the exposure may be relatively mild in some applications, the use of lower surface finish qualities is not recommended. The need to amend the surface finish quality in the PS or on the Drawings should be remote. Direct comparison of blast cleaned steel to the pictorial standards printed in SIS 05 59 00 can be used for site control only if the lighting is good and the inspectors are highly experienced. That is why BS 4232 and Appendix F of BS 5493 both suggest the use of steel coupons, or approved blast clean samples, for site control and inspection purposes.

GS 18.58

Mechanical Cleaning of Steelwork Grinding should preferably be carried out using a flexible disc mounted on a power driven flexible pad, or a power driven arbor or spindle mounted flexible abrasive flap wheel. Hard grinding discs will easily cut into the steel surface. The power tools for wire brushing, abrading and grinding should be capable of working at high revolutions. As electric drill speeds are relatively slow, the use of hand held drills as a power source for wire brushing may result in a burnished appearance due to the formation of a patina of pollutants and corrosion products.

GS 18.59 (1)

Flame Cleaning of Steelwork The minimum thickness of 0.5 mm is based on distortion and buckling considerations. If the steelwork itself cannot sufficiently restrain distortion and buckling, a greater minimum thickness should be specified in the PS. Alternatively, the areas which cannot be flame cleaned should be shown on the Drawings. Cleaning of Bolts, Nuts and Washers Uncoated HSFG bolts are usually delivered with oiled threads or with all surfaces lightly oiled. Heavy oil films may be removed by swabbing with emulsion cleaners, followed by thorough rinsing and leaving to dry. Coated fasteners are usually delivered free of oil. If there are difficulties with tightening, the nut threads may be lubricated in accordance with GS Clause 18.51(3), if permitted by the Engineer. Fasteners having corrosion products, such as zinc salts formed on the threads, should not be cleaned but replaced.

GS 18.60

18.15

2006 Edition

METAL COATINGS TO STEELWORK

GS 18.62 (1) Metal Coatings to Steelwork Metal coatings required for the various steel members, articles and fasteners should be stated on the Drawings. If hot-dip galvanizing is contemplated, the size of the zinc bath available should be noted. Threaded fasteners for galvanized steelwork should normally be galvanized. Galvanizing HSFG bolts is to be avoided, as nut threads may have to be tapped oversize. General grade HSFG bolts may, however, be metal plated. To avoid galling during tightening, dissimilar metals should be specified for the bolt threads and nut threads, e.g. zinc plate for the bolt and cadmium plate for the nuts. Higher grade HSFG bolts (with an ultimate tensile stress from 981 N/mm2 up) should not be metal plated because of the risk of hydrogen stress cracking. (2) BS EN ISO 1461:1999 is does not apply to (a) sheet and wire that are continuously hot dip galvanized, (b) tube and pipe that is hot dip galvanized in automatic plants and (c) hot dip galvanized products for which specific standards exist and which may include additional requirement or requirements different from those of this European Standard. If the thickness the steel article is equal or greater than 6mm, the mean coating thickness achievable may be 85 microns. This would give a protective life for exterior applications ranging from less than 10 years to 30 years depending on the type of exposure. Galvanized steelwork prepared by blast cleaning may also require a greater coating thickness because of surface roughness. The thickness required for each individual case should be determined with the aid of Figure 1 in BS 5493. Greater coating thickness should be specified by amending this GS Clause in the PS, as necessary. Sherardized coating alone offers only temporary protection, but it can be T washed and painted to give longer protection.

(3)

(4)

Table 3, Part 1 in BS 5493:1977 shows that zinc metal spray may give a long to very long life before first maintenance is necessary. However, experience in the United Kingdom has shown that zinc metal spray is not suitable for overall application to highway structures, such as bridges, gantries, light columns or parapets. It is only suitable for temporary use under mild exposure. Metal-sprayed coatings are porous and must be sealed. Wetting metal-sprayed coatings must be avoided, even after sealing as far as possible.

18.16

2006 Edition

(5)

The plating thickness should be stated on the Drawings. If it is not stated, the thickness will be 5 microns. A total thickness greater than 25 microns is rarely economical. For bolts in the M20 to M36 range, a total thickness of 24 microns on the male and female threads combined is recommended. This thickness can be accommodated within the thread tolerances so that tapping nut threads oversize should not be required. The guidance given on GS Clause 18.62(3) concerning sherardized coatings also applies to zinc plating. Cadmium plating should be marked for easy identification as lethal fumes may be given off when they are heated.

(6) (7)

It should be noted that passivation may prevent the action of T wash. Tapping nut threads oversize for HSFG bolts may only be approved if the Contractor shows by tests that the nut strength will not prevent the attainment of the minimum shank tension specified in the appropriate part of BS 4395. If thick metal plates are specified for HSFG bolts and nuts, and tapping nut threads oversize is not approved, galling/seizing may occur as the bolts are tightened. Since zinc plating will have to be topped over with more long lasting paint coatings, it may be advisable to specify thin zinc/cadmium plating combinations to obviate the need for tapping HSFG nut threads oversize.

(8)

Whether the repairing of damaged metal coatings is acceptable is subject to GS Clause 18.52. Repairs under GS Clause 18.62(8) are only permissible for minor damage or defects resulting from faulty application procedures. For extensive damage and damage resulting from inferior surface preparation or faulty materials, the metal coated component should be replaced or the metal coating over the entire component should be removed and the component re-coated. Damage to metal coatings on threads of fasteners should not be repaired. If repair is permitted, zinc coatings may be made good by T wash and coated with a compatible zinc silicate paint (see Clause 11.3.2 in BS 5493). Compatibility of colour and texture should be examined. The application of zinc metal spray in two layers can cause problems and repairing sprayed zinc coatings by over-coating with a new layer is not advisable. Specialist advice should be sought for the repair of sprayed aluminium coatings.

18.17

2006 Edition

PAINTING STEELWORK
GS 18.63 (1) Painting Systems for Steelwork Painting systems A, B & C are intended for steelwork without metal coatings. Under usual local exposure conditions, their expected lives to first maintenance are less than 5, 5 to 10 and 10 to 15 years respectively, but this may vary depending on the actual exposure conditions. System D is for painting hot-dip galvanized, sherardized or metal plated steel. Painting hot-dip galvanized steel is not normally necessary unless additional chemical or abrasive resistance is required, or in cases where the decorative finish can only be achieved by painting. Metal-sprayed coatings are porous and should always be sealed as stated in GS Clause 18.62(4). Sealed metal-sprayed steel may be painted if required for decorative purposes. For System D, the metal coating to be painted should be thoroughly degreased in order that the wash primer may take effect. System E is mainly intended for repainting applications in maintenance works. The system(s) required should be stated on the Drawings taking the above into consideration. If none of the systems is suitable, other systems should be specified in the PS and on the Drawings, based on the recommendations of BS 5493. It should be borne in mind that the expected life to first maintenance for a given system and exposure condition may be less than that shown in Table 3 of BS 5493 due to the more severe climatic conditions in Hong Kong. New systems should be named F, G, H etc. Systems A to E are not intended for the protection of steel piles. Requirements concerning the protection of steel piles should be stated in the PS. The abrasive resistance of the system specified should be appropriate to the driving conditions that will be encountered. (2) The colour code of the finishing coat should be stated on the Drawings. Colour codes to BS 4800:1989 may be used. Application of Paint to Steelwork Note that roller application is not permitted. Roller coating should never be used for the initial priming coat of any paint system. The method has been found to result in too thin a coat and irregular surfaces, particularly with micaceous iron oxide paints. Paint formulated for one method of application is usually not suitable for another. For example, paint formulated for high build airless spraying may set too quickly for brush application. The manufacturers recommendations should always be followed.

GS 18.64 (3)

18.18

2006 Edition

GS 18.65 (1)(d)

Working Conditions for Painting Fine particles carried in suspension in the air should not pose a problem. However, dust thrown up into the air by the wind may readily deposit on the surface to be coated, and the presence of wind borne dust should thus be avoided when applying paint. As for surface dust, BS 5493 recommends visual inspection. The surface to receive coating should be free of any discernable traces of dust. Alternatively, the surface may be gently wiped with a piece of dry and light coloured tissue. The dust should be considered excessive if the piece of tissue is perceptibly soiled. Wiping surfaces to be coated with hands and fingers should not be attempted.

GS 18.66 (5)

Priming and Overcoating Time Limits It is recommended in paragraph 18.4, Chapter 18 of Structures Design Manual for Highways and Railways that direct application of paint to newly galvanized steelwork will result in premature failure of the paint system. Such failures are usually due to the formation of brittle zinc soaps at the paint/zinc interface with the resultant loss of adhesion and deterioration in the properties of the paint film. The pretreatment of the surface with a proprietary two pack etch primer prior to painting would prevent the failure of the paint system. Primers shall be applied in thin coats by continuous spraying and strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Suitable one-pack primers are also available, but care must be taken to ensure that they are formulated for use on galvanized steel. Two pack epoxide or polyurethane paints are chemically resistant. There may be intercoat adhesion problems if over-coating is delayed. The flash coat of primer should restore intercoat adhesion and be compatible with the coats with which it is in contact. The advice of the paint manufacturer should be sought.

(6)

PROTECTION OF JOINTS IN STEELWORK

GS 18.71 Protection of HSFG Bolted Joints For steelwork painted overall, it should be stated on the Drawings whether the faying surfaces at HSFG bolted joints are to be zinc or aluminium sprayed, primed, left as blast cleaned or weathered without loose mill scale and rust (see Clause 14.5.4.4 of BS 5400:Part 3). The treatment specified should be appropriate to the slip factor adopted in the design of the steelwork. Also, the protection system required at the free surfaces and edges of the joint materials should be stated on the Drawings. GS Clauses 18.71(2) and (3) specify the stop end details of coatings if the primer on the parent material is not extended into the faying surfaces of HSFG bolted joints.

18.19

2006 Edition

GS 18.75 (5)

Joints Made after Coating the Parent Material The surface preparation required is part of the protective system specified. So, if the parent material is blast cleaned, welded joints to be brought up to the full protective system should also be blast cleaned. Sealing of Joints in Steelwork For better adhesion, the solder wire backing may be dipped in a suitable etching primer before being plugged into the gaps.

GS 18.76 (2)

ERECTION OF STEELWORK
GS 18.83 Supporting Devices for Steelwork Degradable material like timber should not be allowed. Steel is the preferred material. The steel need not be of the same grade as the steelwork as the weaker link will always be the surrounding grout, mortar or concrete. The cover should be the same as for reinforced concrete under the same exposure conditions, e.g. 75 mm for packs and shims in beddings that will be buried below ground.

TOLERANCES
GS 18.87 Tolerances: Erection of Steelwork GS Clause 18.87 gives only some basic tolerance requirements. They are not exhaustive. The tolerance requirements should be amended or extended in the PS as necessary to suit specific steelwork projects.

TESTING: TESTS ON STEELWORK AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS

GS 18.89 Testing: Tests on Steelwork at Manufacturers Works In this GS Clause, manufacturer should be understood to mean manufacturer of the steel sections, plates and fasteners, as distinct from the fabricator.

18.20

2006 Edition

TESTING: STEELWORK
GS 18.90 Batch: Steelwork The batch sizes for the following tests and inspections should be stated on the Drawings: (a) Destructive tests on welds, (b) Non-destructive tests on welds, (c) Additional non-destructive tests on welds after delivery to the Site, (d) Test on welded stud shear connectors, (e) Test on rivets, and (f) Inspection on fabrication tolerances.

The batch size should be determined having regard to the amount of steel or steelwork put at risk, if a batch is accepted or rejected based on tests carried out on samples of limited size. Parts within the same batch should be made using similar methods under similar conditions; otherwise the sample tested may not be representative of the batch. Here are some examples of how a batch may be defined: (a) For a multi-span, simply supported composite bridge, butt welds of a certain throat thickness range within one span may be taken as forming one batch for the purpose of weld tests. (b) In critical applications, there may be provisions in the PS requiring certain important butt welds to be traced to the welder(s) making the weld. In that case, a batch of welds for testing may comprise butt welds made by one welder using one welding procedure over, say, a weeks time. (c) A batch of welded stud shear connectors may comprise, say, 200 studs of a given diameter welded onto material of a given thickness range, or part thereof welded within the same day. (d) A batch of rivets may comprise, say, 300 rivets of a given diameter through a given total ply thickness range, or part thereof completed within the same day. (e) A batch of steel beams for the purpose of checking fabrication tolerances may comprise, say, 20 beams of the same type, or part thereof in the same consignment for delivery. The areas specified in Clause 3.1.4 of BS 5400:Part 6 or on the Drawings have to be subjected to 100% quality grading. It is thus not necessary to specify a batch size for quality grading. Similarly, the same applies to the visual inspection of welds, non-destructive testing on welds of quality category A and through thickness testing of steel materials (Option B29 to BS 4360).

18.21

2006 Edition

GS 18.94 (2)

Non-compliance: Steelwork If the whole batch is not in compliance, the Contractor may propose to carry out 100% testing on the batch at his own costs. Samples: Steel The rate of sampling should be stated in the PS. The minimum rate may be inferred from the number of tests required as stated in BS 4360:1986.

GS 18.95

GS 18.97 (4)

Testing: Welds The BS adopted for non-destructive testing should be appropriate to the joint geometry etc., e.g. there should be no blind spot under the probing method proposed.

18.22

2006 Edition

APPENDIX 18-A REQUIREMENTS ON THE SUBMISSION OF PAINT SAMPLES

For each type of paint approved, one A sample consisting of 5 litres of paint should be supplied to the Engineer in unopened containers in the condition as received from the manufacturer for each 300 litres of paint required. An A sample is not required if the volume of paint required does not exceed 300 litres. A samples should be taken from the paint delivered to the place of painting. Paint should not be used until the Engineer confirms that the first A sample for that type of paint to be used is satisfactory. Paint should be delivered to the place of painting at least 3 weeks before the paint is used to allow for the taking of A samples and testing. For each type of paint approved, one B sample consisting of 500 millilitres of paint should be supplied to the Engineer in a tin sealed to air tightness for each 50 litres of paint required. One B sample should be taken for an incomplete lot of paint. B samples should be obtained by filling new, clean tins provided by the Contractor from paint being dispensed for application. Paint samples should be selected and labelled by the Engineer. Samples returned to the Contractor should be despatched immediately to a laboratory to be nominated by the Engineer.

18.23

2006 Edition

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 19 HANDRAILING, LADDERS, STAIRS AND FLOORING

19.1

2006 Edition

19.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 19 HANDRAILING, LADDERS, STAIRS AND FLOORING

MATERIALS
GS 19.01 General Requirements Hot dip galvanization shall comply with BS EN ISO 1461:1999. This is the latest BE EN ISO code that should be used. GS 19.10 (2) Bolts, Nuts, Screws, Washers and Rivets It may not always be possible to obtain bolts of the correct length. In such cases, the length of bolts projecting beyond the nuts may be suitably adjusted by the use of washers.

DESIGNED BY CONTRACTOR
GS 19.12 Designed by Contractor The live loading of 5 kPa specified in this GS Clause may give a very small design total load for certain (small) structural elements (e.g. a stair step). The designer may specify a minimum design point load by way of a PS clause in such cases, where necessary.

FABRICATION OF HANDRAILING, LADDERS, STAIRS AND FLOORING

GS 19.15 (2) Welding Steel Sometimes, it may be necessary to weld galvanized steel parts together during fabrication. Welding should be carried out by a qualified tradesman and be checked properly. The steel surfaces affected by welding are to be protected with a coating approved by the Engineer, which is compatible with the protective coating system used on the parent material. Bolting of parts together may be preferred to welding, where possible.

19.3

2006 Edition

SUBMISSIONS
GS 19.22 (2) Particulars of Handrailing, Stairs, Ladders and Flooring The original certificate bearing the chop of the manufacturer showing that the materials comply with the requirements stated in the Contract. This aims to ensure that authentic products are used in the Contract.

19.4

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 20 BRIDGEWORKS

20.1

2006 Edition

20.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 20 BRIDGEWORKS
PART 1: WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
GS 20.01 Prefabricated Sheeting The Engineer should consider additional protective measures for prefabricated sheeting that will be exposed and susceptible to damage by external agents.

SUBMISSIONS
GS 20.04 (1) Particulars of Waterproofing Systems The terms and assignment of any warranty for waterproofing systems provided by the manufacturer or supplier should also be investigated.

INSTALLATION OF WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS

GS 20.08 Installation of Waterproofing Systems The Engineer should ensure that the installation of waterproofing systems is carried out in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions after he has approved these systems and the specialist contractor for carrying out such works.

20.3

2006 Edition

PART 2: BRIDGE BEARINGS MATERIALS

GS 20.14 Holding-down Bolts for Bridge Bearings In the 2006 Edition of GS, it is specified that stainless steel should be used for the holding-down bolts. Designers should refer to Chapter 9 (Bearings) of the Structures Design Manual for Highways and Railways, which sets out the standards for the stainless steel of to be adopted for use in the fixings for bridge bearings. GS 20.15 Cement Mortar, Grout and Adhesive for Bridge Bearings A PS clause should be provided for the testing of these materials.

DESIGN OF BRIDGE BEARINGS

GS 20.17 Design of Bridge Bearings A PS clause should be provided requiring that all aspects of the proposed bearings also comply with current design standards and requirements for highway and railway structures in Hong Kong. If higher bearing stresses are proposed for adoption, the Engineer may wish the Contractor to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that sufficient steel reinforcement can be provided to resist the resulting bursting forces and that the bearing stresses are within the limits stated in Clause 7.2.3.3 of BS 5400: Part 4.

INSTALLATION OF BRIDGE BEARINGS

GS 20.26 Installation of Bridge Bearings The Engineer shall ensure that the bearings be supplied and installed by specialist contractors in the Supply and Installation of Bearings for Highway Structures category of the List of Approved Suppliers of Materials and Specialist Contractors for Public Works. As such, only those proprietary bearings already approved for being supplied and installed by these specialist contractors shall be used.

20.4

2006 Edition

TESTING: BRIDGE BEARINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

GS 20.29 Testing: Bridge Bearings A PS clause should be provided to define the scope of testing and test load conditions. As an alternative to having the bridge bearings tested by the Contractor at a laboratory approved by the Engineer, the Engineer may allow the bearings to be tested by the Contractor at an independent testing organization approved by the Engineer or by the manufacturer, with the results certified by an independent witness approved by the Engineer.

20.5

2006 Edition

PART 3: VEHICULAR PARAPETS MATERIALS

GS 20.40 Holding-down Bolts for Vehicular Parapets The provision of carrying out the pull out test for holding-down bolts to ensure the integrity of the parapet system shall be specified if appropriate. GS 20.41 Grout for Holding-down Bolts A PS clause should be provided for carrying out a procedure trial to assess the method of placing the bedding material to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

INSTALLATION OF VEHICULAR PARAPETS

GS 20.44 Installation of Vehicular Parapets PS clauses should be provided to elaborate the meaning of the terms smooth alignment and sufficient strength, if the Engineer considers such to be necessary to ensure that the quality and standards required for the completed works are met.

TOLERANCES
GS 20.49 Testing: Parapets Materials The frequency of tests and results of material tests shall conform to BS 6779 Part 1, Table 3 and Table 4 which cross-reference various BS specifications for different forms of materials of steel and aluminium. For example, BS EN 10210 Part 1 should be applied for engineering requirement for structural hollow steel sections and BS 1474 or BS EN 755 shall be applied for engineering requirement for aluminium and aluminium alloy. GS 20.51 Testing: Welded Components of Vehicular Parapets For a maintenance contract, a batch of parapets may be supplied to a number of installation locations under different Works Orders of the contract. The Engineer need not duplicate the tests for a batch under different Works Orders.

20.6

2006 Edition

GS 20.52 (1)

Testing: Metal Vehicular Parapet Posts For orders less than 150 posts, the Engineer may waive the static testing requirement if certified records are produced regarding the quality control and successful destructive testing carried out on posts of the same production group within the previous 3 months. Otherwise, if no satisfactory record is available, one intermediate post shall be tested. The theoretical moment of resistance (product of nominal yield stress and plastic modulus) at the critical section of the post is defined in BS 6779 Part 1, Annex B 2.2.

(2)(a)

20.7

2006 Edition

PART 4: MOVEMENT JOINTS DESIGN OF FABRICATED MOVEMENT JOINTS

GS 20.63 Design of Fabricated Movement Joints A PS clause should be provided requiring that all aspects of the proposed fabricated movement joints also comply with current design standards and requirements for highway and railway structures in Hong Kong. This GS Clause is prepared for vehicular and railway structures. PS clauses should be provided, after consultation with the relevant maintenance authority, for structures that will only be used by pedestrians and cyclists and will thus warrant different design loadings.

INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED MOVEMENT JOINTS

GS 20.67 Installation of Fabricated Movement Joints The Engineer shall ensure that the movement joints be supplied and installed by specialist contractors in the Supply and Installation of Expansion Joints for Highway Structures category of the List of Approved Suppliers of Materials and Specialist Contractors for Public Works. As such only those proprietary movement joints already approved for being supplied and installed by these specialist contractors shall be used. Other proprietary movement joints complying with the specifications and drawings in all respects may also be acceptable. However the specialist firm dealing with the supply and installation of these movement joints must first be included for such in the Supply and Installation of Expansion Joints for Highway Structures category of the List of Approved Suppliers of Materials and Specialist Contractors for Public Works. The main contractor engaged on projects involving the supply and the installation of movement joints shall be required to submit to the Engineer for approval full details of the proprietary movement joints he proposes to use. The details provided shall fully describe and illustrate the proposed method of installation of the movement joints. The Chief Highway Engineer/Bridges and Structures shall be consulted in case of doubt about the performance or suitability of any particular brand/type of movement joint. (Ref. Chapter 11, Structures Design Manual for Highways and Railways)

20.8

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 21 MARINE WORKS

21.1

2006 Edition

21.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 21 MARINE WORKS

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
GS 21.09 Reclamation The Engineer should decide on the extent of the different parts of filling works that apply to earthworks and those that apply to reclamation. Once this has been done, the limits of the reclamation should be clearly shown on the Drawings and amplified in the PS, as appropriate. Filling above + 2.5 m P.D. should conform to Section 6 of the GS - Earthworks. Careful attention should be paid at the planning stage to the final land use of the reclamation as this will have a major bearing on the selection of areas where end-tipping and placing of rock fill may be allowed.

MATERIALS
GS 21.12 (1) Fill Material for Marine Works
Recycled rock fill material is recycled from broken concrete and rock pieces of the construction and demolition material. It is currently being produced at the crushing plant of the Tseung Kwan O Fill Bank. Please refer to the CEDD website (http://www.cedd.gov.hk /eng/services/recycling/index.htm) for further information.
Amd 3/2009

(4)

Underwater fill material (Type 1) is basically natural sand similar to the following : (a) Coarse, sharp sand, free from deleterious material. (b) In general, the sand shall comply with the following: (i) If pumping is used in either the dredging or placing process, the sand in situ before dredging shall contain not more than 40% by weight of material passing a 75 m B.S. sieve.

(ii) If no pumping is used in either the dredging or placing process, the sand in situ before dredging shall contain not more than 30% by weight of material passing a 75 m B.S. sieve. (iii) If samples taken from the sand after dumping contain more than 20% by weight of material passing a 75 m B.S. sieve, then the percentages quoted above should be reduced as directed by the Engineer. (5) Underwater fill material (Type 2) is basically decomposed granite or similar types of rock. The restriction on plasticity index is intended to limit the clay content of this material.
21.3

2006 Edition

Where decomposed granite is used for underwater foundations, reference can be made to the Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO) Report No. 33 entitled An Evaluation of the Suitability of Decomposed Granite as Foundation Backfill for Gravity Seawalls in Hong Kong prepared by Mr E.B. Choot (1993 & reprinted in 1995) (http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/geo_reports/index.htm). The suitability of the use of decomposed granite depends on many factors, such as grading, plasticity index, permeability, coefficient of consolidation and construction programme. In order to limit excess pore pressures within the construction period for maintaining the stability of the seawall, the deposited layer should normally not exceed 15 m thick and should not contain Grade VI materials as defined in Table 4 of the Geoguide 3, Guide to Rock and Soil Descriptions, produced by GEO. The soft file of Geoguide 3 is posted on the CEDD website: (http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/manuals/index.htm). The suitability of the use of decomposed rock other than decomposed granite is subject to the Engineers evaluation. (7) Rock fill material (Grade 700) is equivalent to pell-mell rubble. Pell-mell rubble for underwater foundation mounds shall be of sound rough angular granite, free from weathering, and graded in size and mass generally between 25 kg and 500 kg, according to its location in the Works. Rock Armour The Engineer can refer to Table 4 of the Geoguide 3, Guide to Rock and Soil Descriptions produced by GEO for the classification of rock material decomposition. Examples of rock discolouration are also illustrated in Plate 3 of Geoguide 3. Facing Stones Header stones are not normally required for pitched slope seawalls with a surface slope flatter than 1 on 1. Details of facing stones should be shown on the Drawings. GS 21.16 (2) Bermstones If the Engineer requires weighing test, the sampling, weighing and compliance criteria for bermstones shall follow those procedures for rock armour. See GS Clauses 21.93, 21.96(4), 21.97(3) and 21.100. Joint Filler for Slip Joints It is intended that the specified joint filler be used for standard gravity seawalls. For other types of seawall, the types of joint fillers and sealants should be specified on the Drawings and appropriate PS clauses should be provided.

GS 21.13 (2)

GS 21.15

GS 21.18

21.4

2006 Edition

GS 21.21

Rubber for Fenders This GS Clause is prepared for common types of rubber fenders, such as hollow cylindrical, die, vee, cone, arch, double tee, etc. For other types of rubber fenders, the Engineer should check the physical properties of rubber given by the manufacturer against those values specified. A PS clause should be provided to specify the load-deflection and energy-deflection characteristics of the fenders, and details of any other tests required.

GS 21.22

Plastic Fenders The use of plastic fenders is included to promote the use of recycled materials in compliance with the governments green policy. Reference should be made to Port Works Design Manual (Part 2, Section 2.7.4), the soft file of which is posted on the CEDD website (http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/manuals/index.htm).

Table 21.6

Physical Properties of Plastic Fenders Loading test A PS Clause should be provided to specify a test load and the allowable maximum deflection of the plastic fender at mid span under the specified test load.

GS 21.24

Precast Concrete Pipes and Fittings for Submarine Outfalls Other types of pipes and fittings may also be specified for submarine outfalls, e.g. steel, ductile iron, high density polyethylene (HDPE), etc. If specified, appropriate PS clauses should be provided.

SUBMISSIONS
GS 21.25 Particulars of Marine Works The Engineer should consult the Environmental Protection Department (EPD) at an early stage for marine works that may have an adverse impact on the environment. GS 21.26 Particulars of Dredging The Fill Management Committee (FMC) co-ordinates the disposal of fill territory-wide. FMC should be contacted at an early stage for advice on suitable locations for the disposal of dredged material. The Contractor shall obtain a valid dumping licence from EPD for disposal of the dredged material at the approved marine dumping grounds.

21.5

2006 Edition

HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

GS 21.36 Storage of Fill Material and Dredged Material If it is necessary to stockpile fill material or dredged material on a foreshore, seabed or river bed within the Site, the Engineer shall ensure that it will not affect the Works, and that the material can be easily recovered or removed entirely. Adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure that the stockpiled material does not pollute the land or sea. GS 21.38 Handling and Storage of Precast Concrete Seawall Blocks, Copings and Wave Deflectors The Engineer may permit the use of precast concrete units that are damaged during handling or storage where the damage is of a minor nature without any risk of affecting the integrity of the structure and can be repaired satisfactorily.

(2)

GENERAL MARINE WORKS REQUIREMENTS

GS 21.42 Notification of Marine Works The Contractor shall notify the Director of Marine in writing not less than 14 days before commencement of the works of the following information: (a) The nature of the works, (b) The date of their commencement, (c) The location in which they will be carried out, giving the latitude and longitude accurate to the nearest second, and (d) The estimated duration of the works. The specified period of 14 days mentioned above is based on the assumption that all the necessary statutory requirements for the project have been cleared prior to commencement of the Contract. The Engineer should check that a Notice to Mariners or a Marine Department Notice in respect of the concerned works has been issued before the works start. GS 21.44 (1) Marine Traffic and Waterfront Operations Temporary Works or the Contractors Constructional Plant should not be allowed to cause any obstruction to marine traffic or to the operations of Government or private concerns, irrespective of whether such works and plant are within or outside the limit of the Site. For detailed requirement on marking and lighting, reference can be made to NP735 Maritime Buoyage System published by the Hydrographer of the Navy.
21.6

(2)

2006 Edition

GS 21.46

Work Boats A BQ item should be provided for the services required under this GS Clause.

GS 21.49

Refuse Containment Booms and Floating Refuse for Use of Inert Construction and Demolition Material in Reclamation Guidelines are provided by EPD and posted on the EPD website under Section 2.6 (Refuse containment booms and floating refuse) of Water Pollution Control (http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/eia_planning/guide_ref/cop_11. html). Plastic buoys for the refuse booms will be provided by the Employer. The Contractor shall provide adequate sinker blocks and lit marker buoys to ensure that the booms are visible above the water line and securely anchored. The Contractor shall deploy sufficient sampans and labour for collecting floating refuse and preventing floating refuse within the Site from drifting into public waters.

GS 21.50 (1)

Surveys for Marine Works Surveys by chain sounding are acceptable in cases where the water is found to contain a significant quantity of suspended solids and echo sounding proves to provide inaccurate results. Concreting in Locations Affected by Tides Polythene sheets are used to prevent the washout of cement mortar as the tide rises and falls. The Engineer may permit the use of tremie concrete for non-structural concrete works.

GS 21.52

DREDGING
GS 21.54 (1) Dredging The accumulation of mud debris at the bottom of foundation trenches may be minimized by limiting the depth of bulk cuts to 2 m and the final cleaning cut to a constant depth of 1 m. The method for disposing of dredged material should be specified in the PS and/or on the Drawings.

(4)

21.7

2006 Edition

DEPOSITION OF FILL MATERIAL BELOW +2.5 mPD

GS 21.56 Deposition of Fill Material The following applies to the deposition of fill material in reclamations below +2.5 mPD. For deposition above +2.5 mPD, refer to Section 6 of the GS - Earthworks. (a) The design of a reclamation should be aimed at fulfilling the requirements of the planned use and development, i.e. roads, drains, buildings, etc. The post-constructional behaviour of the reclamation should be considered in terms of settlement rate, strength, compressibility, displacement, etc. This will result in a wide variation in the reclamation practice to be adopted, ranging from totally uncontrolled end-tipping to a properly engineered thin layer construction. The Engineer should carry out a careful review of the design of the reclamation project in relation to this GS Clause and should introduce additional PS clauses to amplify and elaborate on the Site-specific requirements. Where end-tipping practice is specified, the areas and zones concerned should be clearly indicated in the PS and on the Drawings. (b) The allowable thickness of each layer or sub-layer and the distance between leading edges of the layers should be carefully checked by the Engineer to ensure that the reclamation remains stable at all stages of construction.

DEPOSITION OF ROCK ARMOUR AND ROCK FOR UNDERLAYER

GS 21.59 (2) Deposition of Rock Armour and Rock for Underlayer Filling the interstices of rock armour or its underlayer with small fragments of rock may adversely affect the performance of the structures. Apart from checking the interlocking of rock armour or its underlayer, the Engineer should check the interstices of rock armour or its underlayer to ensure they are not unnecessarily filled up with small rock fragments.

CONSTRUCTION OF MARINE STRUCTURES

GS 21.67 Bermstones for Marine Structures Early setting of bermstones is required to prevent scouring of the completed structural foundation under the action of waves and currents, and the Engineer will have to discharge his judgement according to the prevailing site conditions.

21.8

2006 Edition

DEMOLITION OF MARINE STRUCTURES

GS 21.79 Demolition of Marine Structures This is a new clause in the 2006 Edition of the GS. The sorting out and separating of the demolition debris on site to recover the reusable and/or recyclable material before disposal should follow the relevant clauses in Section 25 Environmental Protection of the GS, which relate to measures to reduce/minimize generation of C&D materials, works involving demolition, sorting of C&D materials, etc.

TOLERANCES
GS 21.80 Tolerances: Dredging The tolerances specified may not be appropriate for certain jobs, e.g. maintenance dredging and dredging at shallow depths or at exposed sites. GS 21.81 Tolerances: Deposition of Fill Material Clearance of the placed large size rock armour or artificial blocks should be checked to ensure adequate interlocking among the rock armour or artificial blocks. Subject to the agreement of the Engineer after taking into account the timing of the survey, accuracy of the surveying equipment and repeatability of the survey result and cross-checking the result with chain sounding method, echo sounding technique may be used in quantifying the specified tolerances.

TESTING: DREDGED MATERIAL

GS 21.88 Testing: Dredged Material PS clauses should be provided to specify the acceptable founding material and methods of testing for the samples of the dredged material. Standard soil mechanics tests, such as particle size distribution, plasticity index and coefficient of uniformity, may be adopted. For quick and easy checking of the sand content of the dredged material, the samples may be tested by the method stated in Appendix 21-A.

21.9

2006 Edition

TESTING: PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION, PLASTICITY INDEX AND COEFFICIENT OF UNIFORMITY OF FILL MATERIAL FOR MARINE WORKS
GS 21.89 Batch: Fill Material for Marine Works A batch should not be of a size that is incapable of allowing the Engineer to form an opinion that it has similar properties throughout. GS 21.90 Samples: Fill Material for Marine Works Apart from those samples required when the particulars of the fill materials are submitted to the Engineer, additional samples should be taken when the fill materials are delivered to the site for classification test.

TESTING: RELATIVE DENSITY, WATER ABSORPTION, AGGREGATE IMPACT VALUE, TEN PERCENT FINES VALUE, AGGREGATE ABRASION VALUE, SOUNDNESS, RESISTANCE TO FRACTURE AND WEIGHT OF ROCK ARMOUR AND ROCK FOR UNDERLAYER
GS 21.93 Batch: Rock Armour A batch should not be of a size that is incapable of allowing the Engineer to form an opinion that it has similar properties throughout. GS 21.95 (1) Testing: Rock for Rock Armour In general, granites found in Hong Kong comply with the strength and durability requirements of GS Clause 21.13 and should require no testing under this GS Clause. For volcanic and other types of rock, the Engineer should determine which of these tests need to be performed. Samples: Rock Armour The rock specimen samples should be provided near the deposition location in order that the Engineer can make reference to them in supervising the works. In addition to those specimen samples for size comparison and those samples required for dropping test, bulk samples should be taken when the fill materials are delivered to the site for weighing test. After testing, the rocks from the bulk samples that comply with the specifications should, whenever possible, be re-used in the works.

GS 21.96 (2)

(4)

21.10

2006 Edition

GS 21.97

Testing: Rock Armour If found necessary, the Engineer may also measure the dimensions of the rocks in the bulk samples and/or count the number of the rocks in the bulk samples which are discoloured or show other evidence of decomposition. The non-compliance criteria may follow that of the weighing test as given in GS clause 21.100.

GS 21.99 (2)(b)

Non-compliance: Dropping Test As the compliance criterion is only 1 percent of the mass of the armour rock, it is best to use a weighing device accurate to 0.1 percent. However, as the largest mass of armour rock is about 6.5 tonnes, there might be some difficulties in obtaining such a device. In such case, alternatives should be considered. The important measurement is the mass difference, and any means to measure this accurately would be acceptable. One method could be to ensure that the masses of the armour rock are weighed on the same weighing device immediately before and after the dropping test, and although the accuracy of the device may not be up to 0.1 percent, the requirement of 0.1 percent accuracy can be met by repeated weighing.

Appendix 21.1 Note 1

Loading Test for Plastic Fenders

Care should be taken to ensure that the direction of the test load matches with the direction of the working load, especially for those plastic fenders with different flexural properties over the minor and major axes.

21.11

2006 Edition

APPENDIX 21-A DETERMINATION OF SAND CONTENT OF DREDGED MATERIALS

Scope This method covers the determination of the percentage by mass of dredged materials retained on a 63 m B.S. test sieve. The following is required: (a) Apparatus as shown in Fig. 21.1, which comprises A beam balance graduated on one arm in a scale from 0 to 100 in divisions of 10. A sample bucket of about 500 ml capacity. A water tank of a size such that the sample bucket can be completely immersed in water. A scale pan suspended from a rider on the beam balance. A quantity of lead shot of about 0.2 kg.

Apparatus

(b) A 63 m B.S. test sieve. (c) A glass rod about 200 mm long and 5 mm in diameter. Procedure The procedure shall be as follows: (a) Fill the water tank with water and suspend the empty sample bucket from the beam balance with the bucket completely immersed in water. Sea water or fresh water shall be used in the test for dredged materials taken from a sea bed or river bed respectively. (b) Remove the rider and the scale pan and level the balance arm by shifting the position of the adjustable weight. Hold the beam balance arm in its levelled position by tightening the lock nut. (c) Take the sample bucket out and fill it with a sample of about 0.3 kg of dredged material. Add water to the sample to about 4/5 the height of the sample bucket. (d) Release the entrapped air by stirring the mixture of dredged material and water gently with a glass rod. (e) Replace the sample bucket with its contents to the beam balance and immerse it completely in the water tank. (f) Replace the rider and scale pan on the beam balance. Release the lock nut and place the rider on the 100 mark of the scale. Add lead shot to the scale pan until the balance arm is level and then tighten the lock nut again.

21.12

2006 Edition

(g) Remove the sample bucket and pour its contents into the 63 m B.S. test sieve. Wash the sample carefully until no trace of clay material is seen in the water passing the sieve. (h) Place all the retained material back in the sample bucket and repeat procedure (e). (i) (j) Release the lock nut and level the balance arm by adjusting the rider position on the scale. Read the sand content given as percentage by mass from the position of the rider. Each division on the scale represents a difference of 10%.

Reporting of Results

The sand content shall be reported to the nearest 5%, stating that the content is given in percentage by wet mass.

Figure 21.1 - Apparatus for Determination of Sand Content

21.13

2006 Edition

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 22 WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORKS

22.1

2006 Edition

22.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 22 WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORKS

NOTE
The specification for pipeworks in this Section of the GS is basically written for pipes conveying fresh water and salt water. Pipes for other purposes may be specified to comply with this Section if considered suitable by the designer.

MATERIALS
GS 22.13 Materials for Water Supply Pipeworks This GS Clause covers the materials for potable water supply pipeworks only. If other types of fluid are conveyed, this GS Clause should be amplified to suit the situation by means of a PS clause. A list of materials suitable for use with potable or fresh water is given in the Water Fittings and Materials Directory issued by the U.K. Water Research Council on an annual basis. GS 22.14 to GS 22.20 Steel Pipes and Fittings Elastomeric Joint Rings These GS Clauses only give a brief specification for pipelaying materials that are normally provided by Water Supplies Department (WSD) to the civil works contractor. If the Contractor provide the materials, or WSD provide pipelaying materials of different specifications, these GS Clauses should be amended to suit by means of PS clauses. GS 22.21 Anticorrosion Tape There are a number of proprietary brands for anticorrosion tape available in the market, which have been approved and used successfully on local projects. According to para. 6.3.1 (i) Specification in Terms of Performance in Chapter 5 of the Project Administration Handbook, it is not appropriate to refer to a particular trade name/patent/origin in the PS. In the Contractors submission to the Engineer for approval, the submission should include details of the projects on which these products have been used. GS 22.22 (3) Bituminous Coatings In order to avoid the possibility of the presence of the carcinogenic polyaromatic hydrocarbons, it should be specified that all bituminous coatings be made from petroleum or asphaltic bitumen and not coal tar bitumen.
22.3

2006 Edition

GS 22.27

Extension Keys In the 2006 Edition of the GS, stainless steel in lieu of hot dip galvanized steel is specified for use in order to provide a much longer working life for the components.

MATERIALS PROVIDED AND EQUIPMENT LOANED BY THE EMPLOYER

GS 22.28 (1) Materials Provided by the Employer A PS clause should be provided to amend this GS Clause if contracts are entered into with departments other than WSD, under which water supply pipeworks are also to be provided by the Employer. The materials to be provided by the Employer, and their locations and availability, should be indicated in the PS, preferably in the form of a schedule. Equipment Loaned by the Employer If the moulding box, pressure recorder and recording chart are not loaned by the Employer, this GS Clause should be amended by way of a PS clause.

(2) & (3)

GS 22.29

INSPECTION OF MANUFACTURE
GS 22.30 Inspection of Manufacture and Testing The guidance on GS Clause 22.14 to GS Clause 22.20 also applies here. If it is necessary for the Employer to appoint an independent inspection authority, this GS Clause should be amended by way of a PS clause and a SCC clause.

TRIALS
GS 22.35 Welding Trials For contracts entered into with WSD, the welding trials may be arranged with the WSD Workshop. Only welders proven to be competent in the welding trials should be accepted for welding steel pipeworks. For ease of monitoring, a list of competent welders should be maintained on the Site and they should wear name cards with photographs when working.

22.4

2006 Edition

TRANSPORT, HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

GS 22.38 Transport, Handling and Storage of Pipes, Joints and Fittings The Engineer may permit the use of pipes and fittings that are damaged during transport or storage, provided that the damage is of a minor nature and can be repaired satisfactorily. (3) & (5) Prolonged exposure to direct sunlight will adversely affect the properties of UPVC pipes, fittings and rubber rings by making them brittle. Such exposure should be avoided. Where appropriate, a weatherproof hut for the storage of rubber rings, gaskets and other perishable goods should be provided, and such requirements are to be stated in a PS clause. Storage of Pipes For safety reasons, the stacking height should not exceed 2 m. Before permission is given to stack pipes to a height greater than 2 m, the Contractor should be asked to demonstrate that the stack will be stable and that the pipes will not be damaged.

GS 22.40 (3)

SETTING OUT OF PIPELINES

GS 22.45 Setting-out of Pipelines This is a new clause in the 2006 Edition of the GS giving the procedure to help the Contractor achieve the exact alignment as required. The Engineer should note that the alignment information shown on the drawings is indicative only and ensure that the alignment setting-out is accurately carried out on site.

LAYING AND BEDDING PIPES

GS 22.46 (1) Laying Pipes A shorter period of notice may be necessary due to ground conditions, particularly where the trench bottom may be softened by water or where upheaving may occur. Wherever possible, the length of trench to be left open should be agreed with the Contractor before trench excavation is commenced. Factors to be considered are ground conditions, the trench support system, pipe lengths, traffic conditions and the effect on adjacent properties. If the gradient of the pipe is shallow, this requirement should not be given priority over other practical problems of pipe-laying. If the gradient is steep, this practice will make pipe-laying easier and will normally be preferred by the Contractor.

(6)

(7)

22.5

2006 Edition

CUTTING AND DRILLING PIPES

GS 22.51 (4) Cutting Pipes Only ductile iron pipes suitable for cutting on Site as defined in BS 4772:1988, Clauses 2.4.1(f) and 2.10.1.3, should be allowed for cutting on the Site.

JOINTING PIPES
GS 22.53 (7) Jointing Pipes The correct orientation of bolt-holes in flanges is important, as this will affect the orientation of fittings, specials and valves along the pipeline.

THRUST AND ANCHOR BLOCKS

GS 22.69 (1) Thrust and Anchor Blocks This GS Clause should be suitably amended if the blocks are supported on piles, as is required in soft ground with inadequate frictional resistance.

BED, HAUNCH AND SURROUND

GS 22.70 (3) Concrete Bed, Haunch and Surround It should be ensured that the details of joints shown on the Drawings are consistent with this GS Clause.

TOLERANCES
GS 22.71 Tolerances: Pipelines The specified tolerances are considered suitable for common application. In poor ground conditions, the specified tolerances on level may be difficult to achieve and relaxation may be necessary. If pipes are required to be laid by jacking or in heading, the tolerances on line and level may need amendment by way of a PS clause.

22.6

2006 Edition

SWABBING
GS 22.72 Swabbing of Pipelines This GS clause states that swabbing should not normally be required for new pipes each exceeding DN 600. Should it be considered necessary to swab new pipes each exceeding DN 600, this GS clause should be suitably amended by way of a PS clause.

WORK ON ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPES AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTES

GS 22.77 Work on Asbestos Cement Pipes and Disposal of Asbestos Wastes This is a new clause in the 2006 Edition of the GS. To prevent health hazards due to asbestos, the Engineer should ensure that the disposal of waste comply with the code of practice/regulations.

TESTING: JOINTS IN STEEL PIPES

GS 22.78 Testing: Joints in Steel Pipes This is a non-destructive test to verify the soundness of joint welding and should be carried out in the following circumstances: (a) When laying short lengths of watermains for connections or small extensions where a full hydrostatic pressure test is impracticable. (b) When laying watermains in areas where the reinstatement must be done progressively as the mainlaying proceeds, e.g. in heavily trafficked roads, rail tracks, accesses etc., but a hydrostatic pressure test might not be possible until the full length of the watermain (or an extensive length) is complete. The Engineer on the Site should determine the exact location and number of tests that are required.

TESTING: PRESSURE PIPELINES FOR WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORKS

GS 22.81 (2) Testing: Pressure Pipelines for Water Supply Pipeworks Owing to site constraints, it is not always possible to carry out a final pressure test on the complete pipeline after construction. However, if it is possible, the requirement for a final pressure test, together with the test pressure, should be specified in the PS.

22.7

2006 Edition

TESTING: WATER STERILIZATION

GS 22.84 Testing: Water Sterilization Samples of the water should be taken for bacteriological analysis at a number of points well distributed along the pipeline and at all extremities. The waterworks chemists of WSD will examine the results of the analysis to determine whether the pipeline is adequately sterilized.

APPENDIX 22.2 PROTECTION TO STEEL PIPES, FITTINGS AND SPECIALS USING EPOXY SYSTEM OTHER REQUIREMENTS
This is a new appendix in the 2006 Edition of the GS on the use of epoxy coating systems to protect the internal and external metal surfaces against corrosion and to achieve a longer working life than using other materials.

22.8

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 23 WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

23.1

2006 Edition

23.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 23 WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

NOTE
This Section of the GS deals mainly with reinforced concrete water retaining structures and does not cover steel, glass fibre reinforced plastics or other types of water retaining structures.

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
GS 23.08 Water Retaining Structure A list of the structures to be constructed for storing, conveying or excluding water, sewage or other aqueous liquids should be included in the PS.

MATERIALS
GS 23.09 Sliding Layers The requirement for any other materials to be incorporated in the water retaining structures should be stated in the PS.

MATERIALS PROVIDED AND EQUIPMENT LOANED BY THE EMPLOYER

GS 23.10 Materials Provided by the Employer The locations of the water and sterilizing chemicals provided by the Employer should be specified in the PS. If the Employer does not provide the locations, this GS Clause should be amended to suit.

DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
GS 23.16 Drainage Systems Rodding pits should be provided for cleaning drainage systems for water retaining structures.

23.3

2006 Edition

CONSTRUCTION OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

GS 23.18 Floor Slabs of Water Retaining Structures If reinforcement is discontinuous across the joint, the sequence of construction will be immaterial. GS 23.19 (1) (2) Walls of Water Retaining Structures See guidance on GS Clause 23.18. For both appearance and watertightness, the full height of the wall should be concreted in a single lift, wherever possible. The concrete in the stem of the wall should be placed as soon as possible after the base has been concreted. In this way, differential strains are reduced. GS 23.20 Roof Slabs of Water Retaining Structures If reinforcement is discontinuous across the joint, the sequence of construction will be immaterial. GS 23.21 Built-in Pipes in Water Retaining Structures For appearance and watertightness, built-in pipes should be cast in-situ with the water retaining structure. Boxing-out of openings to take the pipes should only be allowed in exceptional circumstances.

PROTECTION OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

GS 23.22 (1) Protection of Water Retaining Structures Prolonged exposure to direct sunlight will cause cracking of the roof slab and should be avoided. The maximum load permitted on the roof slab should be specified in the PS so that the Contractor is fully aware of all constraints.

(2)

23.4

2006 Edition

DEPOSITION OF FILL MATERIAL

GS 23.23 (2) (3) Deposition of Fill Material The compaction method to be adopted should be specified in the PS. Any other types of structures to be tested for watertightness before deposition of fill material should be stated in the PS. Large service reservoirs should not normally be included due to cost implications and time constraints.

CLEANING AND STERILIZATION OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

GS 23.24 (2) Cleaning and Sterilization of Water Retaining Structures Advice can be obtained from waterworks chemists of Water Supplies Department (WSD) on the concentration of sterilizing chemicals.

GS 23.25

Treatment and Disposal of Effluent This is a new clause in the GS, 2006 Edition. It stipulates the procedure of treatment for the cleansing effluent that is not fit for discharging into the natural stream course or storm water drainage system, and the procedure of de-chlorination of the effluent.

Appendix 23.1

Appendix 23.1 is a new appendix in the GS, 2006 Edition giving the procedure of treatment of the sludge discharged from the washout chamber to the mobile centrifuge and microfiltration plant. Appendix 23.2 is a new appendix in the GS, 2006 Edition specifying the requirement of the mobile treatment to be proposed by the Contractor.

Appendix 23.2

TESTING: WATERTIGHTNESS OF ROOFS

GS 23.31 Non-Compliance: Watertightness of Roofs Materials for repairing potable or fresh water retaining structures should be non-toxic, should not promote microbial growth, and should not impart a taste, odour, cloudiness or discolouration to the water. The whole of the roof, including the repaired areas, should be retested to simulate the loading condition as far as possible.

23.5

2006 Edition

TESTING: WATERTIGHTNESS OF STRUCTURES

GS 23.32 (6) Testing: Watertightness of Structures Before permission is given for emptying the structure, the Engineer should check to ensure that the water will not flood the existing stormwater drainage system or stream courses, or cause damage to adjacent properties. Compliance Criteria: Watertightness of Structures The designer may consider tightening the acceptance criteria if the structure is located within, or in the vicinity of, critical slopes that could be adversely affected by the leakage water. GS 23.34 Non-compliance: Watertightness of Structures Paragraph 1 of the guidance on GS Clause 23.31 also applies here.

GS 23.33

TESTING: WATER STERILITY

GS 23.35 to GS 23.37 Samples: Water Sterilization Compliance Criteria: Water Sterilization Samples of the water should be taken for bacteriological analysis and the results of the analysis examined by waterworks chemists of WSD to determine whether the structure is adequately sterilized.

23.6

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 24 BUILDING WORKS

24.1

2006 Edition

24.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 24 BUILDING WORKS

NOTE
This Section of the GS only covers those works commonly used on building projects undertaken by the DEVB Works Group of departments. The specification of the works that are occasionally required, such as false ceilings and raised floors, should be included in the PS or shown on the Drawings. The idea of green roofs, largely established in western countries, is beginning to influence Asian cities. Other major Asian cities such as Tokyo, Beijing and Shanghai are actively promoting green roofs. Hong Kong should catch up by adopting a more proactive approach to encourage the installation of green roofs. New buildings could include green roofs as an integral part of the design. Existing roofs could be retrofitted with vegetation covers. In early 2007, Architectural Services Department (ArchSD) has completed the Study on Green Roof Application in Hong Kong. The Final Report together with the Executive Summary are posted on the ArchSD website for knowledge sharing: (Ref. http://www.archsd.gov.hk/archsd_home01.asp?Path_Lev1=7) As green roofs will bring amenity and aesthetic benefits, environmental benefits, and economic benefits, designers are encouraged to adopt green-roof design when there are opportunities. The above-mentioned Final Report provides some design and technical guidelines, which designers may find useful.

24.3

2006 Edition

PART 1: ASPHALT ROOFING MATERIALS

GS 24.01 Mastic Asphalt The thickness of mastic asphalt to be applied on top of the isolating membrane should be shown on the Drawings or stated in the PS. GS 24.02 Isolating Membrane It is necessary that on all horizontal surfaces the asphalt should be laid on sheathing felt complying with BS 747, type 4A(i), bitumen based. This practice has the support of the Building Research Establishment. The underlay, apart from providing thermal insulation, isolates the asphalt from structural movement.

SUBMISSIONS
GS 24.10 Samples of Materials The samples should be stored on the Site and used as a standard for checking against the future delivery of materials to the Site.

ASPHALT ROOFING WORK

GS 24.20 (1) & (2) Solar Protection If stone chippings or reflective paint are to be applied to the roof surfaces for solar protection, these should be shown on the Drawings or specified in the PS.

24.4

2006 Edition

PART 2: CARPENTRY AND JOINERY MATERIALS

GS 24.25 Timber for Carpentry and Joinery The GS, 2006 Editions lays down new requirement for restriction of the use of tropical hardwood or teak for sustainability purposes. When the Contractor proposes to use timber in the form of softwood or hardwood, he has to produce evidence to prove that the timer originates from a sustainable resource or managed plantation as certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) or other Approved Authority. The website of the FSC is www.fsc.org. FSC is is an international organization that brings people together to find solutions that promote responsible stewardship of the worlds forests. Through consultative processes, it sets international standards for responsible forest management. It accredits independent third party organizations that can certify forest managers and forest product producers to FSC standards. In order to ensure the consistency and integrity of standards in different countries and regions around the world, each national forest stewardship standard must be accredited by FSC. Accreditation means that the standards meet all the requirements set by FSC to ensure the credibility of the FSC certification process. These requirements refer to both the content of the standards and the process used to draw up the standards, including compatibility with FSC Principles and Criteria, a balanced local consultative process for their design and compatibility with local circumstances. Once a national forest stewardship standard has been accredited by FSC, all local and international certification bodies must use that standard in their certification processes.

SUBMISSIONS
GS 24.29 (1) Particulars of Timber Sub-clauses (a) to (e) are new requirements in the GS 2006 Edition aiming to require the Contractor to produce certificates to prove that the timber is from managed plantations as approved by the FSC with a view to achieving sustainability. A PS clause should be provided to amend this GS Clause in case certificates of timber and particular information as mentioned in this GS Clause are not required, e.g. for minor carpentry and joinery works.

24.5

2006 Edition

GS 24.30

Samples of Materials See guidance on GS Clauses 1.04 and 24.10 for the purpose of submission of samples. A mock-up sample for furniture, if required, should be specified in the PS.

STORAGE OF MATERIALS
GS 24.31 Storage of Timber Timber exposed to high humidity and in situations conducive to condensation of water is at high risk of biological degradation due to fungal decay and wood-destroying insect larvae. Timber may need to be stored on site for some time before it is used in the Works. As such, the Engineer should ensure that the Contractor submits a proposal for properly storing the timber that arrives on site and carry out regular inspections to see that the timber is stored in a dry, weatherproof and well ventilated store with a raised floor that will not be affected by the rainy weather or surface runoff.

TESTING: TIMBER
GS 24.41 Testing: Timber This is a simple test and can be carried out on the Site with assistance provided by the Contractor. (3) The constant mass is reached when the mass measurements taken 24 hours apart give a difference of less than 0.2%.

24.6

2006 Edition

PART 3: GLAZING MATERIALS

GS 24.42 (2) Glass Float glass is manufactured to one quality only, and is suitable for all classes of glazing and silvering. It is available in thickness up to 25 mm. In situations where glass thicker than 25 mm is to be used, the appropriate type of flat glass should be stated in the PS.

SUBMISSIONS
GS 24.45 Samples of Materials See guidance on GS Clauses 1.04 and 24.10 for the purpose of submission of samples.

GLAZING WORK
GS 24.47 Glazing Work The requirements for other glazing works, e.g. glazing sealants, heat strengthened glass and tempered glass, if any, should be specified in a PS clause or shown on the Drawings.

24.7

2006 Edition

PART 4: PLUMBING MATERIALS

GS 24.54 (5) & (6) Sanitary Appliances The type of W.C. flushing cisterns or urinals required should be shown on the Drawings or stated in the PS.

SUBMISSIONS
GS 24.57 Samples of Materials See guidance on GS Clauses 1.04 and 24.10 for the purpose of submission of samples.

TESTING: PLUMBING - FOUL DRAINS

GS 24.61 (1) Testing: Plumbing - Foul Drains A visual inspection is required to ensure that all foreign debris has been removed from the system and that all pipes are truly aligned and are at the correct falls. The lengths of foul drains to be tested in each test are normally dictated by convenience and by the location of the system.

(2)

TESTING: PLUMBING - WATER PIPES

GS 24.63 Testing: Plumbing - Water Pipes If a section of watermain terminates with a sluice valve, the wedge of the valve should never be used to resist the water pressure under testing because this might lead to permanent distortion of the working parts of the valve. Instead, the valve should be fitted with a blank flange or socket plug and the valve left in the open position while testing. The end of the main and any test plug must be well secured to resist the end thrust of the water pressure in the main.

24.8

2006 Edition

PART 5: PLASTERWORK AND OTHER FINISHES MATERIALS

GS 24.65 Cement, Water and Sand The cement for plasterwork and other finishes shall be Portland Cement (PC) complying with the new standard BS EN 197-1:2000 in accordance with Section 16. It should also be noted that the river-deposited sand from Mainland China has been subjected to a cessation of sand exportation for the purpose of protection of their river ecology. As this would affect the supply of sand material, the Contractor needs to submit proposals of alternative materials such as clean, hard and durable fine aggregates from crushed rock. GS 24.66 Premixed Plaster This is a new clause in the GS 2006 Edition. Premixed plaster is factory-produced to ensure it is of high quality standard. Six-mix plastering shall be banned. The Engineer should ensure that the premixed plaster manufacturing company has acquired ISO certification. The application of such material shall follow the manufacturers instructions. GS 24.75 Tiles If it is necessary to obtain fittings from sources other than the manufacturer of the tiles, the tile manufacturer should be asked to confirm that the proposed materials are compatible with the tile system before giving approval. GS 24.84 & GS 24.87 Tile Adhesive and Tile Grout Particulars of Tile Adhesive and Tile Grout These are new clauses in the GS, 2006 Edition. Tiles have been reported to fall out of the walls in a number of housing projects after they have been installated for not a very long time. To minimize such failure of tiles, the new specification requires the tile adhesive to be of a proprietary brand to be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit the details in accordance with GS Clause 24.87 to the Engineer for approval, such details including those projects on which that proprietary brand has been successfully adopted.

24.9

2006 Edition

SUBMISSIONS
GS 24.88 Samples of Materials See guidance on GS Clauses 1.04 and 24.10 for the purpose of submission of samples.

TRIAL PANELS
GS 24.94 Trial Panels for Tile Adhesive As the tile adhesive is very important to prevent falling-off of tiles after installation, the GS, 2006 Edition has included this new clause for making trial panels for testing the tile adhesive proposed. The Engineer should ensure that the tile adhesive is appropriate for use on the Contract.

PLASTERING AND RENDERING

GS 24.98 (1) Applying Spatterdash to New Concrete Bonding agents for obtaining a better key in plastering work are available. These may be based on bitumen, polyvinyl acetate (PVA), acrylics, epoxy resin or other materials. The most widely used of these are based on PVA. Joint Inspection to Spatterdash This is a new clause in the 2006 Edition of the GS, which gives a chance for the Engineers Representative to be satisfied with the application of the spatterdash before proceeding to the next stage of preparing the plastering and rendering. GS 24.100 & GS 24.101 Background Preparation for Plastering and Rendering Preparation of Hardened Concrete to Receive Cementitious Renders These are new clauses in the GS, 2006 Edition. A major cause of falling-off of tiles is that the surface of the concrete on which to receive plastering and rendering has not been properly prepared. Great attention should be paid to the conditions of the concrete surface before the plastering/rendering can be applied. The surface must be cleaned of loosened materials or other external materials that are adhered to the concrete surface. Experience shows that if the concrete surface is too dry, it will absorb the moisture content from the plastering/rendering, thus changing the water content of the cementitious of plastering/rendering (i.e. drier than it should be). The dry concrete surface should thus be properly wetted prior to application of plastering and rendering. However, if the surface is too wet, for example by excess wetting or due to the wet weather, this will also cause failure of the plastering/rendering, so sufficient time should be allowed for drying out of the excess moisture on the surface. This is the meaning of adjusting the suction in GS Clause 24.101(b). Tiles should not be applied immediately after plastering/rendering .
24.10

GS 24.99

2006 Edition

SCREEDS, TERRAZZO AND GRANOLITHIC CONCRETE

GS 24.113 (9) Screeds Any specific requirements, such as the provision of wire mesh for screeds on the top of floor trunkings, should be specified in the PS, where appropriate. The type of screed surface finish required should be shown on the Drawings or stated in the PS.

24.11

2006 Edition

PART 6: PAINTING MATERIALS

GS 24.128 (1) Paint and Associated Materials Materials in a painting system should preferably be obtained from the same manufacturer to avoid possible adverse chemical interaction and incompatibility. If the Contractor proposes materials from different manufacturers, the manufacturers should be asked to confirm that the proposed materials are compatible with each other. Aluminium Primer Calcium Plumbate Primer Primers are used on previously unpainted surfaces to obtain adhesion, satisfy porosity and inhibit corrosion of metals. For non-ferrous metals, especially aluminium, chromate based primers are the most commonly used. Lead-based primers should never be used on aluminium. GS 24.146 Volatile Organic Compound Content Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) are organic chemical compounds that have high enough vapour pressures under normal conditions to significantly vaporize and enter the atmosphere. The VOC Regulation, effective from 1 April 2007 under the Air Pollution Control Ordinance, also controls the VOC content in architectural paints, printing inks and six selected consumer products - air fresheners, hairsprays, multipurpose lubricants, floor wax strippers, insecticides and insect repellents. The VOC Regulation sets limits on the VOC content of 51 types of architectural paints/coatings, 7 types of printing inks and 6 broad categories of consumer products, which will be implemented in phases between 1 April 2007 and 1 January 2010. No person shall import to or manufacture in Hong Kong for local sale or use any of the regulated products containing VOCs in excess of the prescribed limits in the Regulation. Please check the following links for details of the VOC limits on the EPD web site-: (http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/air/prob_solutions/voc_reg.html)

GS 24.129 to GS 24.132

24.12

2006 Edition

PART 7: BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK MATERIALS

GS 24.162 (1) Wall Ties The twist grip type of galvanized mildsteel wall ties are available in 300 mm, 250 mm, 200 mm and 150 mm lengths. Little is known about the durability of steel ties but evidence suggests that they have a longer life if they are hot-dip galvanized.

SUBMISSIONS
GS 24.164 Samples of Materials See guidance on GS Clauses 1.04 and 24.10 for the purpose of submission of samples.

HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

GS 24.170 Handling and Storage of Bricks and Blocks The Engineer may permit the use of bricks and blocks that have been damaged during transport or storage where the damage is of a minor nature and can be repaired satisfactorily.

LAYING BRICKS AND BLOCKS

GS 24.171 (4) Types of Mortar Where strength is critical, bricks with one frog only should be laid with the frog upwards so that it is automatically filled with mortar. Maximum permissible compressive stresses for frogged bricks are computed on the condition that the frog is solidly filled with mortar, and this fact should be brought to the notice of all concerned with the building of load bearing walls in frogged bricks.

24.13

2006 Edition

PART 8: METAL WINDOWS AND DOORS DESIGN AND FABRICATION OF METAL WINDOWS AND DOORS
GS 24.186 Roller Shutters and Doors Any detailed specification for roller shutters and doors, including any specific requirements for the fire resistance period, should be stipulated in the PS or shown on the Drawings.

SUBMISSIONS
GS 24.188 Samples of Materials See guidance on GS Clauses 1.04 and 24.10 for the purpose of submission of samples. A mock-up sample for windows and doors, if required, should be specified in the PS.

24.14

2006 Edition

PART 9: MASONRY SUBMISSIONS

GS 24.196 Samples of Materials See guidance notes on GS Clauses 1.04 and 24.10 for purpose of submissions of samples.

RUBBLE STONE WALLING

GS 24.199 Preparation of Stone for Rubble Stone Walling The type of rubble walling required should be shown on the Drawings or stated in the PS.

24.15

2006 Edition

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 25 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

25.1

2006 Edition

25.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 25 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

GENERAL
GS 25.01 (1) General Requirements Pursuant to GCC Clause 1(1), the Works include all temporary works of every kind required for construction, completion and maintenance of the Works. In determination of the extent of area outside the site for which the Contractor shall be responsible, a reasonable approach may be taken to consider whether the contributing effect arising from the Contractors works would render the acceptable environmental standards to be exceeded anywhere outside the Site, irrespective of where the effect may be. (2) The Contractor is obliged to conform in all respects to the provisions of any enactment under GCC Clause 30. A list of the legal and other requirements relevant to environmental protection and pollution control is included at Appendix 25-A to this Guidance Note. Please note that this list is not intended to be exhaustive but for the reference of the users of this Guidance Note only. All relevant ordinances and their regulations are already available on-line in the Bilingual Laws Information System (http://www.legislation.gov.hk/eng/home.htm), where the laws of Hong Kong are established and updated by the Department of Justice. Apart from observing and pollution control Contractor shall also Environmental Permit Ordinance (Cap. 499). included in the PS. (5) and complying with all relevant environmental protection ordinances, regulations and contractual requirements, the observe and comply with the conditions set out in the issued under the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) The Environmental Permit and its conditions are normally

If the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements on environmental protection, payment on environmental protection items (if any) should not be made. As a record, the Engineer should write to the Contractor stating the non-compliances and reasons of not certifying such a payment. The Engineers satisfaction and certification of payment for the Contractors environmental protection measures does not absolve the Contractor from the liability of complying with the relevant legislation.

25.3

2006 Edition

WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

GS 25.02 Water Pollution Control - General Requirements A set of guidelines and references related to water pollution control are posted the EPD website: (http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/water/guide_ref/water_guideline s.html) (3) The requirement of the GS is the performance stipulated in the respective clauses. Following the practice stated in the guidance documents is a necessary but not a sufficient condition to demonstrate compliance with the practice. The Contractor still has an obligation to comply with all statutory requirements and contractual performance criteria even if the practice outlined in the Practice Note has been followed. Marine Plant and Equipment The Contractor is obliged to provide assistance, instruments, etc. as may be necessary for examining, measuring or testing any work under GCC Clause 42(2). Avoidance of Pollution during Dredging, Transporting and Dumping of Marine Mud The Contractor is not required to seek agreement from the Engineer for the appointment of an employee for handling the work. However, if the Engineer considers that the employee is not suitable, he may, pursuant to GCC Clauses 17 and 18, require the Contractor to replace that employee with a competent substitute. GS 25.06 (1) Discharge into Sewers, Drains and Water Bodies For any application of a license for making a discharge into the waters of Hong Kong, the Contractor is required to publicly notify the public of such an application by means of publishing a notice in English and Chinese newspapers. The period of objection from public is 30 days from the date of notification. In normal circumstances, a license would not be granted if the discharging point of wastewater is:

GS 25.03 (2)

GS 25.04 (7)

Within 100 m from a gazetted beach; Within 200 m of marine fish culture zone or Site of Special Scientific Interest; In any typhoon shelters; In any marina; Within 100 m of a seawater intake point.

(3)

Pursuant to GCC Clause 38, the Contractor should provide and maintain efficient and hygienic toilet facilities for the use of all persons on the Site and keep the Site in a clean and hygienic condition.
25.4

2006 Edition

GS 25.07 (2)

Wastewater from Construction Activities In accordance with GCC Clause 15, the Contractor should execute the Works in strict accordance with the Contract to the satisfaction of the Engineer unless the execution is physically impossible. In a well-known English case (Turriff Ltd. v Welsh National Water Development Authority [1979]) in the late 1970s on the problem of what would amount to a physical impossibility in construction contracts, the court has construed physical impossibility in a commercial and practical manner. Surface Runoff The treated surface run-off should be reused for other purposes such as vehicle washing, dust suppression, groundwater recharge, etc. as far as practicable so as to reduce water consumption and wastewater discharge.

GS 25.08

(1)

The Engineer should write to the Contractor in March of each year reminding him of his obligations under the Contract to implement adequate measures to ensure that the Works are carried out safely, particularly during the wet season. It is a good practice for works involving slopes to construct the outermost permanent surface channels first and ahead of other works such as cutting back or soil nailing to reduce the chance of surface erosion. The Contractor should be encouraged to adopt such a practice.

GS 25.09 (1)

Protection of Natural Streams/Rivers The Contractor should take full photographic records to demonstrate the pre-construction conditions. The photographs, which should be in colour and imprinted with the date, should cover the ground conditions in the vicinity of the existing natural streams and rivers concerned.

NOISE CONTROL
GS 25.10 (1) Noise Control - General Requirements A set of guidelines and references related to environmental noise control is posted on the EPD website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/noise/guide_ref/noise_guidelines. html The Summary Offences Ordinance and the Noise Control Ordinance control environmental noise covering construction activities, commercial and industrial activities as well as neighbourhood-type noise. In addition to these two Ordinances, the Contractor shall also observe and comply with the relevant requirements stipulated in the Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Noise at Work) Regulation, which provides for the safety and health protection to workers against excessive noise in the industrial sector, and the Road Traffic (Construction and Maintenance of Vehicles) Regulation, which controls the noise emitted by vehicles propelled by internal combustion engine.
25.5

2006 Edition

GS 25.11 (1)

Allowable Noise Limits Any additional restrictions on execution of construction works, including known requirements from the stakeholders and any other relevant authorities, should be specified in the PS. Before allowing the Contractor to work outside the normal working hours, the Engineer must ensure that the Contractor has obtained the necessary Construction Noise Permit (CNP) under Noise Control Ordinance (Cap.400) as appropriate. Noise Mitigation Measures Operations that would generate noise should be carefully planned to avoid disturbance to noise sensitive receivers such as schools and hospitals. Consultation with the potentially affected parties during detail design stage is needed to work out and agree a working sequence/programme and other noise mitigation measures. Such agreement and measures should become part of the particular specifications. Consideration should be given to locating noisy site operations and constructional plant, away from noise sensitive receivers. If possible, electricity source from power companies in lieu of using generator on site should be considered to minimize noise emitted from the site. For drilling works, the use of rotary drilling in lieu of percussive drilling should be considered for those sites in the vicinity of noise sensitive receivers. Noise problems are often associated with excessive vibration. The use of noise abatement measures alone may not resolve the problems effectively. The use of vibration-dampening measures in conjunction with noise abatement measures should be considered when dealing with noise problems.

(2)

GS 25.12 (1)

AIR POLLUTION CONTROL

GS 25.14 Air Pollution Control - General Requirements A complete set of guidelines and references issued by EPD on matters relating to air pollution control can be found on the following website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/air/guide_ref/air_guidelines.html

25.6

2006 Edition

(1)

According to the Air Pollution Control (Construction Dust) Regulation, a notice must be given to the Director of Environmental Protection (DEP) before the commencement of the following types of works:

Site formation; Reclamation; Building demolition; Tunnel works, excluding any part beyond 100 m from the exits; Construction of a building; or Road construction work

References shall be made to the Air Pollution Control (Construction Dust) Regulation for details of the notification requirements. (4) Any air pollution control system, equipment or measure should be operated or implemented properly and effectively. In the case of malfunctioning or breakdown of the system/equipment, the Contractor should stop the activity concerned as soon as practicable until the system/equipment is restored to proper functioning to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Dust Suppression Rock drilling should be avoided as far as practicably possible as it usually generates more dust than drilling in soil. To suppress dust generation, the designer should review his design to minimize rock drilling but without compromising the proper function of the design. Water or a dust suppression chemical should be continuously sprayed on the surface where drilling operation that causes dust emission is carried out, unless the process is accompanied by the operation of an effective dust extraction and filtering device. For production of sprayed concrete using cement, the de-bagging, batching, mixing and spraying processes should be carried out in an area sheltered on the top and the 3 sides. GS 25.18 Odour Mitigation Other practical mitigation measures to minimize the odour problems due to the temporary stockpiling of odorous material may include good planning to take into account the prevailing wind directions and speed, method and sequence of work to minimize time of exposure.

GS 25.15 (1)

25.7

2006 Edition

GS 25.19

Hoardings Adjoining Public Areas According to clause 13 of Part III of Schedules of Air Pollution Control (Construction Dust) Regulation, the requirement for provision of hoarding does not apply for road opening or resurfacing work, or for construction work carried out in a construction site that is completely paved or completely covered with hardcore. Nevertheless the provision of fences/screens will depend on safety requirements, feasibility, public acceptance, security considerations, and duration of works, etc. for any particular project, in addition to the need to mitigate significant air pollution. Transparent hoardings should be used at locations where traffic sight distances might be affected by normal non-transparent hoarding materials. Transparent hoardings may also help in improving lighting conditions, reduce sense of enclosure, enhance security and help in winning public acceptance.

WASTE MANAGEMENT
GS 25.21 (1) Measures to Reduce/Minimize Generation of C&D Materials There is also a requirement pursuant to Clause 4 of Appendix AIII, Chapter 3, Construction Site Safety Manual that the Contractor shall provide the Engineer at monthly intervals a complete list of all sub-contractors, whether directly employed by the Contractor or not, on the Site and the Works and the name of the Safety Supervisor for each such sub-contractor, insofar as the employment of a Safety Supervisor is expressly set out in the Contract or in the absence of such requirement then as the law may require. Works Involving Demolition In addition to the environmental aspects, the Engineer should also check the Contractors draft Safety Plan or Safety Plan in accordance with the checklist at Appendix AVII of Chapter 3, Construction Site Safety Manual, and should ask the Contractor to make any amendments necessary. Sorting of C&D Material Sufficient area should be identified and provided under the Contract for the Contractor to carry out on-site sorting of C&D material. The term specialist contractor means a contractor who is authorized by a license granted under section 21 of the Waste Disposal Ordinance to provide the service of collection or removal of chemical waste and includes any person collecting or removing such waste on their behalf. DEPs approval is required where a large container with a capacity in excess of 450 litres is to be used for storing chemical waste. The original container for storing the same type of chemical waste should be used whenever practical to minimize waste.
25.8

GS 25.23 (1)

GS 25.24 (1)

(10)

2006 Edition

GS 25.25 (11)

Trip Ticket System For the non-compliance and the necessary follow-up action arising from the trip ticket system is of particular concern or in any other circumstances deemed necessary, the Engineer should invite the Contractors top site management to attend the Site Safety and Environmental Committee Meeting to discuss the problems. The Contractors top site management should be the Project Manager or a person of equivalent rank representing his company. Non-compliance with the Trip ticket system requirements may only be justifiable if the Engineer is convinced that the improper disposal is made due to exceptional circumstances (e.g. under emergency situation, etc.). Details on the regulating actions to be taken when a Contractor receives an adverse report are given in Paragraph 5.4 of the Contractor Management Handbook.

(17)

GS 25.26 (1)

Avoidance of Nuisance Pursuant to GCC Clause 24, the Contractor is obliged to indemnify the Employer in respect of all claims arising out of or in relation to the interference with the convenience of the public, traffic and adjoining properties. For slope stabilization works, the need for provision of wheel-washing facilities is exempted under Section 10 of the Schedule of Air Pollution Control (Construction Dust) Regulation (Cap. 331 sub.leg.R). The requirement of this sub-clause of the GS is exempted for slope stabilization works under Section 10 of the Schedule of Air Pollution Control (Construction Dust) Regulation (Cap. 331 sub.leg.R). Handling and Disposal of Waste A list of licensed waste collectors and recyclers can be downloaded from the EPD website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/waste/guide_ref/guide_ref_dwc.html

(4)

(4)(b)

GS 25.27 (2)

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND AUDIT

GS 25.29 Environmental Monitoring and Audit General Requirements The need or otherwise for The Environmental Monitoring & Audit (EM&A) and Environmental Team (ET) service for non-designated projects under the Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance will have to be decided by the project office when drawing up the contract. The particulars of EM&A will have to be detailed in the PS if it is decided to undertake such a programme. If EM&A is not required, Clauses 25.29 to 25.34 should be deleted by a clause in the PS.

25.9

2006 Edition

GS 25.30

Environmental Team The EM&A programme aims to ensure that the EIA requirements are met. The performance requirement of the Contractor on environmental matters are specified in this section of the GS. The Engineer or his representative will have to supervise the works of the Contractor to meet such requirements. In addition, the management structure of the EM&A personnel aims to ensure impartiality, independence and facilitate proper monitoring on EM&A works. In general, the ET shall not be an associated body of the Contractor. Since the ETs responsibilities are crucial to ensure environmental performance and compliance with the specifications, the ET should be carefully chosen according to the capability, qualification and experience, and to meet the relevant requirement of the Environmental Permit, where applicable. The duties and obligations of the ET stipulated in this section of the GS should be duly reflected and included as specific terms in the separate employment contract for the ET. The ET plays the major role in the EM&A programme and, therefore, should actively participate in the environmental management process of the construction works. The ET Leader should be required, under its employment agreement, to participate in all site audits and all site safety and environmental committee meetings of the construction contract. Random checks should also be conducted by the Engineer on the Site to see if the personnel undertaking the ETs duties are the ones agreed by the Employer. It is essential to note that, in order not to erode the power of the Engineers Representative(s) (ER), the ET should have no power to advise the Contractor directly. The EM&A clauses in this section of the GS are drafted in such a way that ETs advice is forwarded to the forward the environmental monitoring and audit results in a report format to the Engineer, the Contractor as well as the Employer (and the Director of Environmental Protection as necessary). The ET should recommend the appropriate mitigation measures to the Engineer who shall notify the Contractor accordingly in case of exceedance of the environmental limits specified in the Contract. The Contractor should follow these recommendations from the ET. Although the ET must act through the Engineer, who retains the overall control on any approval process, the ETs employment contract should state clearly the need for the ET to act in concert with the ER and carry out its work within the time limit, if any, as stipulated in the construction contract.

25.10

2006 Edition

APPENDIX 25-A A LIST OF THE LEGAL AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS RELEVANT TO ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND POLLUTION CONTROL

Table of Contents

Section
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0

Title
Air Quality Noise Emissions Waste Management Wastewater Discharges Dangerous Goods/Materials Storage Miscellaneous Ordinances/Regulations Other Requirements

Page
25.12 25.15 25.17 25.18 25.19 25.20 25.22

Note: In view of many legal and other requirements for control of environmental pollution, the above list in this appendix serves to provide a general outline of such requirements that need to be complied with during execution of works.

25.11

2006 Edition

1.0 Air Quality Ordinance/Regulation* Air Quality AIR POLLUTION CONTROL ORDINANCE (Cap 311) This Ordinance provides for the control of air pollution from stationary sources and motor vehicles. Level of air pollutants emitted shall not exceed the Air Quality Objectives of each Air Control Zone. Technical Memorandum for Specifying Air Quality Objectives for Hong Kong ^ provides statutory air quality objectives for all declared Air Control Zones in the Territory. Technical Memorandum to issue Air Pollution Abatement Notice to control Air Pollution from Stationary Processes ^ specifies the principles, methods, standards and guidelines for assessing air pollution from stationary polluting sources. General Description of Requirements

Air Pollution Control (Furnaces, ovens and chimneys) (Installation and Alteration) Regulations (Cap 311A)

These Regulations stipulate that prior approval from EPD is required if there is any installation or alteration of fuel, burning equipment or chimney on premises.

Air Pollution Control (Smoke) Regulations (Cap 311C)

These Regulations control smoke emission from combustion sources including engines, ovens, industrial plant and furnaces.

Air Pollution Control (Specified Processes) Regulations (Cap 311F)

These Regulations provide for the licensing of new, specified processes and registration of existing processes.

Air Pollution Control (Fuel Restriction) Regulations (Cap 311I)

These Regulations prohibit the use of fuel with high sulphur content solid and liquid fuel for commercial and industrial appliances (In Shatin, only gaseous fuel is allowed except for the appliances used on construction sites or for emergency purposes).

Air Pollution Control (Vehicle Design Standards) (Emission) Regulations (Cap 311J)

These Regulations specify emission standards for vehicle engines.

Air Pollution Control (Motor Vehicle Fuel) Regulation (Cap 311L)

This Regulation stipulates the requirements relating to the contents of motor vehicle fuel. Under the regulations, it is an offence to pour, place and discharge or add any fuel additive containing any amount of lead into the fuel tank.

* Ordinances/Regulations can be accessed via Bilingual Laws Information System http://www.legislation.gov.hk/eng/home.htm ^ Technical Memoranda can be accessed via EPD website http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/statutory/esg_stat.html 25.12

2006 Edition

Ordinance/Regulation* Air Quality Air Pollution Control (Asbestos) (Administration) Regulation (Cap 311P)

General Description of Requirements

This Regulation provides for the qualifications and fees payable for the registration of a person or laboratory for the control of asbestos.

Air Pollution Control (Construction Dust) Regulation (Cap 311R)

This Regulation specifies the mitigation measures for specific type of construction works including road construction, tunnelling, bridge construction and building construction.

Air Pollution Control (Emission Reduction Devices for Vehicles) Regulation (Cap 311U)

This Regulation requires the registered owner of a motor vehicle to install an approved emission-reduction device on the vehicle to reduce its emission of air pollutants.

Air Pollution Control (Volatile Organic Compounds) Regulation (Cap 311W)

This Regulation imposes maximum limits on the volatile organic compound (VOC) content of architectural paints, printing inks and six selected consumer products - air fresheners, hairsprays, multi-purpose lubricants, floor wax strippers, insecticides and insect repellents. The limits are being enforced in phases from 1 April 2007.

OZONE LAYER PROTECTION ORDINANCE (Cap 403)

This Ordinance gives effect to Hong Kongs international obligations under the 1985 Vienna Convention and the 1987 Montreal Protocol. It prohibits the manufacturing of substances that deplete the ozone layer and imposes control on the import and export of these substances through registration and licensing provisions.

Ozone Layer Protection (Controlled Refrigerants) Regulation (Cap 403B)

This Regulation controls the release of controlled refrigerants into the atmosphere from large-scale installations and motor vehicles. Bans the venting of controlled refrigerants (CFC-11, CFC-12, CFC-115) used in large-scale refrigeration (>50kg refrigerant charge) and motor vehicles to atmosphere. Any person who allows any controlled refrigerant used for refrigeration equipment or a motor vehicle to escape into the atmosphere commits an offence. The Regulation also provides for the maintenance of records in relation to refrigeration equipment.

RADIATION ORDINANCE (Cap 303)

This Ordinance controls the import, export, possession and use of radioactive substances and irradiating apparatus. The Radiation Board of the Department of Health is the authority to enforce this Ordinance and its subsidiary Regulations.

* Ordinances/Regulations can be accessed via Bilingual Laws Information System http://www.legislation.gov.hk/eng/home.htm ^ Technical Memoranda can be accessed via EPD website http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/statutory/esg_stat.html 25.13

2006 Edition

Ordinance/Regulation* Air Quality ROAD TRAFFIC ORDINANCE (Cap 374)

General Description of Requirements

This Ordinance regulates road traffic, vehicles and users of road and related matters. It includes provisions to limiting pollution from vehicles through maintenance requirements.

Road Traffic (Construction and Maintenance of Vehicles) Regulations (Cap 374A)

These Regulations specify smoke levels for in-service vehicles.

* Ordinances/Regulations can be accessed via Bilingual Laws Information System http://www.legislation.gov.hk/eng/home.htm ^ Technical Memoranda can be accessed via EPD website http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/statutory/esg_stat.html 25.14

2006 Edition

2.0 Noise Emissions Ordinance/Regulation* Noise Emissions NOISE CONTROL ORDINANCE (Cap 400) This Ordinance provides statutory control to restricting and reducing the nuisance caused by environmental noise. It deals with noise from construction activities, domestic premises, public places, industrial and commercial premises, and noise from construction sites. Technical Memorandum on Noise from Percussive Piling ^ sets out the requirements for the control of percussive piling including restrictions on piling times and the procurement of a Construction Noise Permit (CNP) issued by the EPD. The permitted hours of operation are determined by the amount by which the Calculated Noise Level exceeds the Acceptable Noise Level. The use of three types of noisy hammers (diesel, pneumatic and steam hammers) in built-up areas has been phased out. Technical Memorandum on Noise from Construction Work other than Percussive Piling ^ prescribes the maximum noise levels for all construction activities that include powered mechanical equipment other than those required for percussive piling. Basic Noise Levels are set out according to an Areas Sensitivity Rating. Technical Memorandum on Noise from Construction Work in Designated Areas ^ details the procedure that should be adopted for control of noise generated by the use of Specified Powered Mechanical Equipment other that percussive piling and/or the carrying out of Prescribed Construction Work. Technical Memorandum for the Assessment of Noise from Places other than Domestic Premises, Public Places or Construction Sites ^ contains technical procedure to be adopted by the Authority when investigating a noise complaint concerning a commercial/industrial premises. Noise Control (General) Regulations 1989 (Cap 400A) This Regulation stipulates the forms required for application of a CNP and provides examples of the CNP once issued and also of a Noise Abatement Notice. General Descriptions of Requirements

Noise Control (Air Compressors) Regulations (Cap 400C)

This Regulation requires hand-held and portable air compressors to comply with specified noise emission standards and to be fitted with noise emission labels when in use.

Noise Control (Hand Held Percussive Breakers) Regulations (Cap 400D)

These Regulations require hand-held percussive breakers to comply with specified noise emission standards and to be fitted with noise-emission labels when in use.

Noise Control (Construction Work) Regulation (Cap 400G)

This Regulation prescribes construction works (in addition to powered mechanical equipment and percussive piling) that are controlled through the Noise Pollution Control Ordinance and Technical Memorandum.

* Ordinances/Regulations can be accessed via Bilingual Laws Information System http://www.legislation.gov.hk/eng/home.htm ^ Technical Memoranda can be accessed via EPD website http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/statutory/esg_stat.html 25.15

2006 Edition

Ordinance/Regulation* Noise Emissions Noise Control (Construction Work Designated Areas) Notice (Cap 400H)

General Descriptions of Requirements

This Regulation defines the designated areas in which the use of specified mechanical equipment and/or the carrying out of prescribed construction works is controlled (using the CNP system).

Noise Control (Motor Vehicles) Regulation (Cap 400I)

This Regulation addresses the control of mechanical noise from motor vehicles. Only motor vehicles complying with the noise emission standards shall be allowed first registration in Hong Kong.

Road Traffic (Construction and Maintenance of Vehicles) Regulations (Cap 374A) (See Road Traffic Ordinance under Air Quality)

These Regulations prohibit the use of motor vehicles without silencers or with a modified or defective silencer.

* Ordinances/Regulations can be accessed via Bilingual Laws Information System http://www.legislation.gov.hk/eng/home.htm ^ Technical Memoranda can be accessed via EPD website http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/statutory/esg_stat.html 25.16

2006 Edition

3.0 Waste Management Ordinance/Regulation* Waste Management WASTE DISPOSAL ORDINANCE (Cap 354) This Ordinance provides for the licensing of collection services and disposal facilities for all types of waste. The control scheme on chemical waste, the control of illegal dumping and also requires the production of a comprehensive plan for all the collection and disposal of wastes. General Descriptions of Requirements

Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste) (General) Regulation (Cap 354C)

This Regulation requires chemical-waste producers to be registered with EPD and specifies requirements for control on all aspects of chemical waste disposal including storage, collection, transport, treatment and final disposal. It is an offence to indiscriminately discharge chemical waste into sewers.

Waste Disposal (Charges for Disposal of Chemical Waste) Regulation (Cap 354J)

This Regulation applies to the disposal of chemical waste at the Chemical Waste Treatment Centre. Charges vary according to the type and quantity of waste treated as specified in the Regulation.

Waste Disposal (Charges for Disposal of Construction Waste) Regulation (Cap 354N)

This Regulation substitutes the Waste Disposal (Charges for Disposal of Waste), Regulation 1995 to give effect to the revised charging scheme. It sets charges for the disposal of construction waste at landfills, sorting facilities and public fill reception facilities.

* Ordinances/Regulations can be accessed via Bilingual Laws Information System http://www.legislation.gov.hk/eng/home.htm ^ Technical Memoranda can be accessed via EPD website http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/statutory/esg_stat.html 25.17

2006 Edition

4.0 Wastewater Discharges Ordinance/Regulation* Wastewater Discharges WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ORDINANCE (Cap 358) This Ordinance provides for the declaration of Water Control Zones (WCZs) and requires that effluent discharge into waters or into foul sewer in a WCZ must be licensed. Technical Memorandum - Standards for Effluents Discharged into Drainage and Sewerage Systems, Inland and Coastal Waters ^ sets out the limits that make it acceptable for discharge of effluents into foul sewers, storm water drains, inland and coastal waters. The limits control the physical, chemical, and microbial quality of effluents. General Descriptions of Requirements

Water Pollution Control (General) Regulations (Cap 358D)

This Regulation gives practical effects to the Water Pollution Control Ordinance.

Water Pollution Control (Sewerage) Regulation (Cap 358AL)

This Regulation requires that premises be connected to the communal sewer (where a communal sewer exists).

SEWAGE SERVICES ORDINANCE (Cap 463)

This Ordinance provides for the imposition of sewage charges and trade effluent surcharges and other related matters.

Sewage Services (Sewage Charge) Regulation (Cap 463A)

This Regulation specifies the charging scheme for sewage charges.

* Ordinances/Regulations can be accessed via Bilingual Laws Information System http://www.legislation.gov.hk/eng/home.htm ^ Technical Memoranda can be accessed via EPD website http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/statutory/esg_stat.html 25.18

2006 Edition

5.0 Dangerous Goods/Materials Storage Ordinance/Regulation* Dangerous Goods/Materials Storage DANGEROUS GOODS ORDINANCE (DGO) (Cap 295) This Ordinance and its subsidiary regulations provide for the control of the manufacture, handling, labelling, storage and transport of dangerous goods. Under the DGO, no person shall manufacture, store, convey or use any dangerous goods without a valid licence issued by the respective authorities. All explosives, compressed gases, petroleum, corrosive substances, substances which become dangerous by interaction with water or air, substances liable to spontaneous combustion or of a readily combustible nature and other substances giving off inflammable vapour, poisonous gas or vapour are defined as dangerous goods. General Description of Requirements

Dangerous Goods (Application & Exemption) Regulations (Cap 295A)

There are about 450 dangerous substances identified in the legislation and these Regulations classify them into 10 categories. Some chemical wastes are also classified as dangerous goods under the DGO and the producers of these chemical wastes should comply with the Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste) (General) Regulation as well as the DGO.

Dangerous Goods (General) Regulations (Cap 295B)

These Regulations address the transportation, storage and use of classified dangerous goods.

Dangerous Goods (Government Explosives Depots) Regulations (Cap 295D)

These Regulations address the control of storage of explosives in government depots. No person shall cause or permit any explosive to be received into or removed from the depots without permission of the authority.

GAS SAFETY ORDINANCE (Cap 51)

This Ordinance governs the design, construction, installation, use, inspection and maintenance of any Notifiable Gas Installation.

* Ordinances/Regulations can be accessed via Bilingual Laws Information System http://www.legislation.gov.hk/eng/home.htm ^ Technical Memoranda can be accessed via EPD website http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/statutory/esg_stat.html 25.19

2006 Edition

6.0 Miscellaneous Ordinances/Regulations Ordinance/Regulation* Miscellaneous Ordinances/Regulations ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT ORDINANCE (EIAO) (Cap 499) This Ordinance requires designated public-sector and private-sector projects with potential significant environmental impacts to be subject to the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) process. A permit is required for the developments. Technical Memorandum on Environmental Impact Assessment Process ^ details the principles, procedure, guidelines, requirements and criteria relevant to the EIA process. General Descriptions of Requirements

PUBLIC HEALTH AND MUNICIPAL SERVICES ORDINANCE (Cap 132)

This Ordinance makes provision for urban services and public health. It includes control of nuisance caused by emissions of dust and fumes, control of the discharge of hazardous materials to sewers. It places restriction on the storage of wastes in buildings and to prevent mosquito breeding.

DUMPING AT SEA ORDINANCE (Cap 466)

This Ordinance provides for control of marine dumping, extends control on marine pollution and gives legal effect to the Marine Dumping Action Plan. A permit issued under this Ordinance is required for dumping at sea and valid for specific periods of time, for specific quantities and types of waste.

ANTIQUITIES AND MONUMENTS ORDINANCE (Cap 53)

This Ordinance provides for control of the protection of declared antiquities and monuments, and discovery of antiquities. No person shall excavate and search for antiquities without a licence.

WILD ANIMALS PROTECTION ORDINANCE (Cap 170)

This Ordinance prohibits any person from hunting or wilfully disturbing any protected wild animals including a nest or egg of any protected wild animal without a special permit.

FORESTS & COUNTRY SIDE ORDINANCE (Cap 96)

This Ordinance prohibits any person who, without lawful authority cuts grass, removes turf or earth, rakes pine needles, plucks or damages any bud, blossom or leaf of any tree, shrub or plant etc., in a forest.

PESTICIDES ORDINANCE (Cap 133)

This Ordinance requires all persons/companies involved in the import, manufacture and sale or supply of pesticides to apply for licences. In addition, it details specific requirements relating to the use, storage and conveyance of the pesticides.

COUNTRY PARKS ORDINANCE (Cap 208)

This Ordinance provides for the designation and protection of country parks.

* Ordinances/Regulations can be accessed via Bilingual Laws Information System http://www.legislation.gov.hk/eng/home.htm ^ Technical Memoranda can be accessed via EPD website http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/statutory/esg_stat.html 25.20

2006 Edition

Ordinance/Regulation* Miscellaneous Ordinances/Regulations WATERWORKS ORDINANCE (Cap 102)

General Descriptions of Requirements

Attention is drawn to sections 23-24, 29-33 of this Ordinance on Mapping of gathering grounds, Control of leases land in gathering grounds, Unlawful taking of water, Pollution, Damage, etc., to waterworks, Obstruction, Cost of repairing damage and recovery of damages or loss. WSD website: http://www.wsd.gov.hk/en/html/info_publ/index.htm

MINING ORDINANCE (Cap 285)

The Ordinance stipulates the control of mining through the granting of mining license.

* Ordinances/Regulations can be accessed via Bilingual Laws Information System http://www.legislation.gov.hk/eng/home.htm ^ Technical Memoranda can be accessed via EPD website http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/statutory/esg_stat.html 25.21

2006 Edition

7.0 Other Requirements Other Requirements Environmental Standards and Guidelines General Descriptions of Requirements These Standards and Guidelines contain a comprehensive list of documents and publications on the subject of environmental protection. EPD website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/esg_main content.html

EPD Practice Notes for Professional Persons PN 1/93 Noise from Construction Activities Statutory PN 2/93 Noise from Construction Activities Non-statutory PN 1/94 Construction Site Drainage PN 3/94 Contaminated Land Assessment And Remediation (Superseded by the new Guidance Note for Contaminated Land Assessment and Remediation that took effect on 15 August 2007) posted on the EPD website : http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_stan dards/non_statutory/esg_non_stat.html PN 4/94 Air-Conditioning Refrigerants A Time for Change PN 1/96 Use of Quiet Construction Equipment for Road Opening Works during Non-Sociable Hours PN 3/96 Landfill Gas Hazard Assessment for Developments adjacent to Landfills PN 2/97 Handling of Asbestos Containing Materials in Buildings

These Practice Notes are developed by the Professional Persons Environmental Consultative Committee and cover guidance for a range of environmental issues. EPD website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/resources_pub/publication s/pub_propeccpns.html

25.22

2006 Edition

Other Requirements EPD EIAO Guidance Notes GN 2/2002 The Role and Operation of Environmental Study Management Group GN 3/2002 Flexibility and Enforceability of Mitigation Measures Proposed in an Environmental Impact Assessment Report GN 4/2002 The Role of Independent Environmental Checker GN 5/2002 Implementation Schedule for Mitigation Measures arising from the Environmental Impact Assessment Process GN 6/2002 Some Observations on Ecological Assessment From the Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance Perspective GN 7/2002 Ecological Baseline Survey for Ecological Assessment GN 8/2002 Preparation of Landscape And Visual Impact Assessment Under the Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance GN 9/2004 Preparation of Construction Noise Impact Assessment Under the Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance GN 10/2004 Methodologies for Terrestrial and Freshwater Ecological Baseline Surveys GN 11/2004 Methodologies for Marine Ecological Baseline Surveys GN 12/2005 Road Traffic Noise Impact Assessment under the Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance Assessment of Impact on Sites of Cultural Heritage in Environmental Impact Assessment Studies

General Descriptions of Requirements These Guidance Notes are developed by EPD to outline the considerations and procedure for undertaking an EIA in accordance with the EIAO. EPD website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/eia/english/guid/index.html

25.23

2006 Edition

Other Requirements A Concise Guide to the Ozone Layer Protection Ordinance

General Descriptions of Requirements This Guide serves as an introduction to the understanding of the Ozone Layer Protection Ordinance which gives effect to the international obligations affecting the HKSAR under the 1985 Vienna Convention for the Protection of the Ozone Layer and the 1987 Montreal Protocol. EPD website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/laws_regulations/comp_g uides/cg_air.html

A Concise Guide to the Ozone Layer Protection (Controlled Refrigerants) Regulation

This Guide contains guidance on how to comply with the Ozone Layer Protection (Controlled Refrigerants) Regulation. EPD website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/laws_regulations/comp_g uides/cg_air.html

Code of Practice on the Packaging, Labelling and Storage of Chemical Wastes

This Code of Practice provides guidance for complying with the requirements of the Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste) (General) Regulation. EPD website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/waste/gu ide_ref/guide_cwc_sub3.html

A Guide to the Control on Import and Export of Waste

This Guide provides guidance on the requirements of waste import/export in Hong Kong under the Waste Disposal Ordinance. EPD website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/waste/gu ide_ref/guide_wiec_tcs2.html

Code of Practice on the Handling, Transportation and Disposal of Asbestos Waste

Asbestos waste is classifiable as chemical waste under the Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste) (General) Regulation and its handling, collection, transportation and disposal is controlled by the legislation. This Code of Practice gives guidance to persons who may come into contact with asbestos waste on the safe handling of asbestos waste and how they can comply with the legislative controls. EPD website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/waste/gu ide_ref/guide_cwc_sub4.html

A Guidance Note on the Best Practicable Means for Cement Works (Concrete Batching Plant) BPM 3/2

This Guidance Note lists out the minimum requirement for meeting the best practicable means for cement works (concrete batching plant). It includes recommendations for the exhaust, emission limits, fugitive emission control, loading, unloading, handling, transfer and storage of cement and other dusty materials etc. EPD website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/non_stat utory/esg_non_stat.html

25.24

2006 Edition

Other Requirements EM&A Guidelines for Development Projects in Hong Kong

General Descriptions of Requirements These Guidelines provide a general reference for environmental monitoring and audit practice for development projects. EPD website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/non_stat utory/esg_non_stat.html

Recommended Pollution Control Clauses for Construction Contracts

These Clauses are generally good engineering practice to minimize inconvenience and environmental nuisance to nearby residents and other sensitive receivers. Some modifications may be necessary to suit specific site conditions before incorporation into construction contracts. EPD website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/non_stat utory/esg_non_stat.html

Clearing Mikania (Nature Conservation Practice Note No. 01)

This Practice Note provides technical guidance on the clearance of Mikania. AFCD website: http://www.afcd.gov.hk/english/conservation/con_tech/con_te ch.html

Safe Use of Agricultural Pesticides

This document provides guidelines on application and storage requirements for the use of agricultural pesticides. AFCD website: http://www.afcd.gov.hk/english/publications/publications_qua/fil es/leaflet_c.pdf http://www.afcd.gov.hk/english/publications/publications_qua/fil es/leaflet_ap_e.pdf

DSD TC 2/2004 Protection of Natural Rivers and Streams from Adverse Impacts Arising from Construction Works

This Circular provides guidelines for the planning and execution of construction works and for the vetting of public and private development proposals that affect natural rivers and streams. DSD website: http://www.dsd.gov.hk/publications_publicity/other_publicatio ns/internal_guidelines/index.htm

DSD Practice Note No. 1/2005 Guidelines on Environmental Considerations for River Channel Design

This Practice Note presents the essential environmental considerations that should be taken into account and incorporated whenever practicable, in the design of river channels. DSD website: http://www.dsd.gov.hk/publications_publicity/other_publicatio ns/internal_guidelines/index.htm

25.25

2006 Edition

Other Requirements Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines (in particular Chapters 4, 9 & 10)

General Descriptions of Requirements These Standards and Guidelines provide guidance for including environmental considerations in the planning of both public and private developments including measures to conserve natural landscape and habitats, and to promote greening in the urban areas. PlanD website: http://www.pland.gov.hk/tech_doc/hkpsg/english/index.htm

WBTC 10/92 - Provision of Refuse Containment Booms in Reclamation Contracts Involving Public Dumping

This Circular promulgates the inclusion of suitable provisions in reclamation contracts involving public dumping. It aims at reducing unsightly pollution and at savings in Government resources used to collect and dispose of the floating refuse.

WBTC 32/92 - The Use of Tropical Hardwood on Construction Sites

This old Circular aims to reduce the amount of hardwood timber used on construction sites. However, it should be noted that in the GS 2006 Edition (Sections 4 and 14), timber and hardwood are strictly prohibited for use in the fencing and falsework respectively, unless approved by the Engineer.

WBTC 4/97 Guidelines for Implementing the Policy on Off-site Ecological Mitigation Measures

This Circular sets out guidelines for the implementation of the Governments policy on off-site ecological mitigation measures which, in brief, requires that where such a measure is required, it would be provided to the extent that it is practicable, on a like for like basis and within the boundaries of Hong Kong.

WBTC 17/2000 - Improvement to the Appearance of Slopes

This Circular outlines the principles and procedures recommended for all departments involved in new slope formation and in upgrading and maintenance of existing slopes for improving the aesthetic and environmental impact of slope works.

WBTC 19/2001 - Metallic Site Hoardings and Signboards

This Circular establishes the revised policy requiring the use of metallic site hoardings and signboards, in order to reduce the amount of timber used on construction sites.

WBTC 6/2002 & 6/2002A - Enhanced Specification for Site Cleanliness and Tidiness

These Circulars promulgate an enhanced specification on cleanliness and tidiness of public works sites.

WBTC 7/2002 - Tree Planting in Public Works

This Circular affirms the advocated policy on tree planting that adopts a flexible and balanced approach in the planning and design of public works.

WBTC 11/2002 Control of Site Crushers

This Circular sets out the necessary procedure and requirements for setting up site crushers in Government projects, if the project proponent considers setting up site crushers is technically feasible and environmentally acceptable.

25.26

2006 Edition

Other Requirements ETWB TCW 33/2002 - Management of Construction and Demolition Material Including Rock

General Descriptions of Requirements This Circular introduces measures to enhance the management of construction and demolition material including rock in public works projects.

ETWB TCW 34/2002 - Management of Dredged/Excavated Sediment

This Circular sets out the procedure for seeking approval to dredge/excavate sediment and the management framework for marine disposal of such sediment.

ETWB TCW 13/2003 - Guidelines and Procedures for Environmental Impact Assessment of Government Projects and Proposals

This Circular sets out the guidelines and procedure for the EIA of Government projects and proposals, including those not covered by the EIAO. The guidelines and procedure also cover the submission of environmental appraisals of projects or proposals to the Executive Council where appropriate.

ETWB TCW 13/2003A - Guidelines and Procedures for Environmental Impact Assessment of Government Projects and Proposals - Planning for Provision of Noise Barriers

This Circular sets out additional guidelines on the planning for provision of noise barriers in project programmes.

ETWB TCW 22/2003 &22/2003A Additional Measures to Improve Site Cleanliness and Control Mosquito Breeding on Construction Sites

These Circulars introduce additional measures to improve site cleanliness and control mosquito-breeding on construction sites.

ETWB TCW 34/2003 - Community Involvement in Greening Works

This Circular sets out the policy and requirements for community involvement in greening works of capital works projects. This circular is to be read in conjunction with ETWB TCW 3/2006.

ETWB TCW 2/2004 - Maintenance of Vegetation and Hard Landscape Features

This Circular sets out the departmental responsibilities for maintenance of vegetation and hard landscape features.

ETWB TCW 11/2004 Cyber Manual for Greening

This Circular promulgates and sets out the maintenance responsibilities on the government-wide greening manual called Cyber Manual for Greening.

ETWB TCW 14/2004 Maintenance of Stormwater Drainage Systems and Natural Watercourses

This Circular sets out the departmental responsibilities for the maintenance of stormwater drainage systems and natural watercourses in government and private lands, as well as the main watercourses designated under the Land Drainage Ordinance.

ETWB TCW 29/2004 - Registration of Old and Valuable Trees, and Guidelines for their Preservation

This Circular sets out the procedure for registration of old and valuable trees on unleased Government land within built-up areas and tourist attraction spots in village areas.

25.27

2006 Edition

Other Requirements ETWB TCW 31/2004 Trip Ticket System for Disposal of Construction & Demolition Materials

General Descriptions of Requirements This Circular promulgates the amended trip ticket system for public works contracts including capital works contracts, term contracts and design and build contracts, where construction and demolition materials including waste generated on site require disposal.

ETWB TCW 2/2005 - Capital Works or Maintenance Works (including Tree Planting) Within or Adjacent to the Kowloon-Canton Railway (Hong Kong) Section, Tsim Sha Tsui Extension and Ma On Shan Rail

This Circular consolidates the existing guidelines and procedure about capital works and maintenance works within or adjacent to the KCR (Hong Kong) Section, Tsim Sha Tsui Extension and Ma On Shan Rail.

ETWB TCW 5/2005 - Protection of Natural Streams/rivers from Adverse Impacts Arising from Construction Works

This Circular provides an administrative framework to better protect all natural streams/rivers from the impacts of construction works. The project proponents should ensure that comments/advice received from AFCD and appropriate departments are incorporated into the planning, design and construction of the projects as far as practicable.

ETWB TCW 10/2005 - Planting on Footbridges and Flyovers

This Circular sets out the policy and requirements for planting on footbridges and flyovers.

ETWB TCW 16/2005 Adoption of Energy Efficient Features and Renewable Energy Technologies in Government Projects and Installations

This Circular sets out the guidelines and procedure on adoption of energy-efficient features and renewable energy technologies in government projects and installations.

ETWB TCW 19/2005 Environmental Management on Construction Sites, and ETWBs Interim Guidance Note on Administration of Environmental Management and Pay for Safety and Environment Scheme (PFSES) for Public Works Contracts dated 19.06.2006

This Circular sets out the policy and procedure requiring contractors to prepare and implement an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) and adopt unified standards on environmental nuisance abatement measures for specified processes or works. It also promulgates the use of ultra low sulphur diesel (ULSD) in constructional plant, as defined in Schedule 1 of the Air Pollution Control (Motor Vehicle Fuel) Regulation.

ETWB TCW 3/2006 Tree Preservation

This Circular sets out the policy on tree preservation, and the procedure for control of tree-felling, transplanting and pruning in public works projects. This Circular also covers the reporting of unauthorized tree-removal (i.e. felling or transplanting), on both private and unleased Government land.

HPLB/ETWB JTC 1/04 - Protection of the Harbour Ordinance

This Circular sets out the requirements of the Protection of the Harbour Ordinance (PHO) (Cap. 531) and provides guidance for public officers and public bodies to follow in considering and approving reclamation proposals.

25.28

2006 Edition

Other Requirements HPLB/ETWB JTC 1/06 - Air Ventilation Assessment

General Descriptions of Requirements This Technical Circular sets out the guidance for applying air ventilation assessments (AVA) to major government projects.

Other relevant WBTCs, DEVB/ETWB TCWs, PWD TCs and L&WB TCs

Reference shall be made to other relevant WBTCs, DEVB/ETWB TCWs, PWD TCs and L&WB TCs as necessary.

Construction Safety and Environmental Management Manual (CSEMM)

This Manual contains site safety and environmental considerations and requirements to be observed in the design and construction of engineering works.

25.29

2006 Edition

2006 Edition

GUIDANCE NOTES ON SECTION 26 PRESERVATION AND PROTECTION OF TREES

26.1

2006 Edition

26.2

2006 Edition

SECTION 26 PRESERVATION AND PROTECTION OF TREES

GENERAL
GS 26.02 General Requirements The preservation and protection of trees requires careful planning. Tree preservation is an integral part of the project from the very first stage of the process. Trees identified to be suitable for preservation should be carefully considered in the design and documentation phases so that the tree protection zones are clearly identified and the design takes into account the trees during construction and in the long run. The methods of preservation and protection of trees, which are included in the specifications, may also involve site-specific requirements. Details of preservation and protection of trees should be made clear to every member of the design and construction team, including construction workers of the Contractors and Subcontractors. It has to be made clear that preservation and protection requires every team member to work closely together in order to protect the environment. The main construction activities that kill trees include root damage/cut, soil compaction and grade changes. Damage to roots can be fatal. Most roots are shallow and limited to top 500 mm of soil while extending in a radius of more than 2 times of height of a tree. Owing to the distribution of roots, trees are very sensitive to construction activities and the erection or protective fencing around the tree protection zone should be one of the first activities on site.

SURVEY AND IDENTIFICATION OF EXISTING TREES

GS 26.03 Tree Survey Before giving agreement to the Contractors on-site status identification of trees, the Engineer should ensure that the status of each tree as identified on site corresponds with that specified in the contract documents. The identification labeling or marking system for the preserved trees may involve the use of plastic survey-flagging in the form of laminated plastic sheets but not nails or paint.

26.3

2006 Edition

REMOVAL OF EXISTING TREES

GS 26.05 Felling of Existing Trees Normally, the Engineer should give approval to the Contractor for felling the tree only after approval to tree-felling application under ETWB TCW No. 3/2006 has been obtained. But in emergency cases where the damaged tree constitutes a hazard, the Engineer may, for safety reason, give approval to the Contractor for felling the tree even if the approval for tree-felling application has not yet been obtained. GS 26.06 Transplanting of Existing Trees The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of tree transplanting, either within or off the Site in accordance with GS 26.06(a) and (b) (also refer to ETWB TCW 3/2006, paragraph 20 and note that the project office should allow at least 12 months in advance for consultation, approval, sourcing of receptor location and preparation works for the transplanting operation such as root cutting and crown thinning).

PRESERVATION AND PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES

GS 26.08 General Precautionary Measures to Preserved Trees Construction works should not take place within the tree-protection zone. If it is found unavoidable to proceed with construction works within the tree-protection zone after consideration of all other alternatives, generally the distance between the tree trunk and the construction works should not be less than 2/3 of the distance measured from the trunk to the perimeter of the tree-protection zone. If the distance of tree-protection zone is reduced on one side in this way, a corresponding increase in distance of the tree-protection zone should be made on the other side. (a) It is a common malpractice of the Contractor to store building materials such as paving blocks or drain pipes and equipment or machinery such as air compressors or electric generators underneath trees. The Engineer should caution the Contractor against this malpractice. Protection of Preserved Trees from Physical Damage and Soil Compaction In approving the method statement for erection of the temporary protective fencing, the Engineer should consider the appropriateness of the materials, construction method, and height of the fencing in relation to the degree of construction activities taking place on the Site. If at all possible, the Engineer should not give permission for the Contractor to enter the area enclosed by the temporary protective fencing except for the following works: a) The necessary arboricultural works and maintenance works to the tree, and

GS 26.09

26.4

2006 Edition

b) Those constructions works required under the Contract or approved by the Engineer to be carried out within the tree-protection zone. To avoid disturbance to the protective fencing once it is erected, it is essential to consider all the construction operations that will be undertaken in the vicinity of the trees, in particular: c) The location and space needed for all foundation excavations, d) The location and space needed for all service runs, e) All changes in ground levels, including the location of retaining walls, and making adequate allowance for foundations of such walls, f) Space for machinery and access during works, and g) Space for site offices, workshops, canteens, containers, temporary latrines including their drainage and other temporary structures.

GS 26.10

Protection of Preserved Trees from Changes in Ground Levels If at all possible, the Engineer should not approve the lowering of the entire area around a preserved tree. If the entire area around the tree-protection zone is lowered much more than 150 mm, it is likely that the preserved tree will not survive.

GS 26.11

Protection of Preserved Trees from Excavation including Trenching The Engineer should approve excavation works within the tree-protection zones only after all other alternatives have been considered and proved not appropriate. The Engineer should co-ordinate the trenching works with the Contractor and the government departments or utility companies concerned so as to avoid or minimize trenching works within the tree-protection zones. The Engineer should ensure that the Contractor backfills the holes of excavation as soon as possible to minimize the risk of drying out the roots.

(2)(d)

The Engineer should insist that the branches and roots are cut cleanly to promote quick wound closure and regeneration and to prevent entry of disease-causing organisms. Sharply cut ends promote a flush of new roots, helping the tree recover from injury.

26.5

2006 Edition

GS 26.14

Pruning of Preserved Trees Crown thinning is not necessarily beneficial to the tree as thinning the crown may reduce the trees food-making capability and stress the tree further. Crown thinning should, therefore, be applied wisely to ensure a balanced structure and root to foliage ratio. During the course of construction, pruning to preserved trees, other than that specified in the Contract, may be required for the following purposes: a) To make room for construction or equipment operation, b) To remove split, torn, broken, diseased or dead branches as part of the work of repair to damage, and c) To improve the trees structural integrity, such as removing the fork for prevention of catastrophic split of the tree. The Engineer should identify any necessary pruning work, in addition to that specified in the Contract, at the commencement of the Contract as far as possible in order that the Contractor can carry out the pruning work during the site clearance stage when it is the most convenient time to do such work. Pruning paint or dressing to cover exposed wounds or pruned limbs is normally not recommended. Heavy tars, such as loose bark, retain water and favour disease development. In exceptional circumstances, an approved non-toxic paint may be applied thinly to give a darker-coloured surface for cosmetic purposes.

GS 26.15

Control of Pest and Disease for Preserved Trees In approving the method statements for the pest and disease control measures that involve the use of pesticide or fungicide, the Engineer should observe the guidelines on the safe use of chemicals of the Agriculture, Fisheries and Conservation Department. Caution should be taken to avoid excessive application of fertilizer, in particular nitrogen. Excessive nitrogen application can result in increased stem and foliage growth, causing stress to the tree, especially during hot and dry weather.

REPAIR OF DAMAGE
GS 26.16 (2)(a)( ii) Repair of Damage to Preserved Trees and Other Affected Plants Watering of the undisturbed portions of the tree before, during, and after the disturbance may be considered. Mulching may include a shallow layer of mulch such as wood chips or coarsely chopped twigs and bark.
26.6

2006 Edition

References:
ETWB TCW 2/2004 Maintenance of Vegetation and Hard Landscape Features This Circular sets out the departmental responsibilities for maintenance of vegetation and hard landscape features.

ETWB TCW 29/2004

Registration of Old and Valuable Trees, and Guidelines for their Preservation This Circular sets out the procedure for registration of old and valuable trees on unleased Government land within built-up areas and tourist attraction spots in village areas.

ETWB TCW 3/2006

Tree Preservation This Circular sets out the policy on tree preservation, and the procedures for control of tree felling, transplanting and pruning in Government projects.

Cyber Manual for Greening

The Cyber Manual for Greening is a consolidation of documents on the subject of greening kept by all departments with planting and maintenance responsibilities on vegetation in Hong Kong (Ref. http://etwbwb.host.ccgo.hksarg/)

26.7